Factory Education Manual English

Target
Factory
Education
Manual
2008
© 2008 Target. This document and the contents within are the property of Target and its subsidiaries (collectively
“Target”). They are for the sole use of authorized Business Partners and their Factories and shall not be reproduced
or disclosed in any form to any party whatsoever without the express written consent of Target.
Understanding the Factory Education Manual
The Factory Education Manual you have been provided is a guide to help Vendors
educate their Factories on Target’s processes, procedures and requirements. As a
vendor you will be responsible to ensure your factories receive the appropriate
information they need in order to successfully meet Target’s expectations.
• The “V/F” logo has been placed throughout the Factory Education Manual. It is
important to understand that this symbol represents key information that should be
shared between the Vendor and the Factory.
• Factories should partner with their Vendors to ensure you have received and
understood the information documented. Factory questions about content should be
reviewed with their Vendor partner for follow-up.
Note: Many factories work with multiple Target vendors and therefore may receive
multiple copies of this manual if you work with multiple Target Vendors. Please
notify your Vendor partners if you have already received a copy of this manual and
do not want to receive additional copies.
• The Master Table of Contents lists each chapter included in the manual. Located
within each chapter is an introduction to that topic which includes:
o Overview – Explains the main topic to be covered and what it is important to
learn and understand
o Table of Contents – Details the sub-topics contained within the main topic
o Objectives – What each Factory should expect to learn from this information
o Resources – Locations of where to find additional information on a topic or a
contact where questions can be answered
• Partners Online (POL) refers to the information that the Vendor has access to
through Target’s external website. Reference to this site will be shown throughout
the document as:
o POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Product >
Development > Sloper Pattern Library
Note: If procedures and policies change, updates will be posted to POL. POL
content updates override existing Factory Education materials until updates are
made to the Factory Education Manual within the next update cycle.
• Common Terms and Acronyms are located in the Factory Education Manual. This is
a listing of commonly used terms and acronyms and can be referred to if you do not
understand the meaning. Key reference terms to understand are:
o HG or HL refers to Hardgoods or Hardlines area of Target
o SH refers to Soft Home area of Target
o SL refers to Softlines area of Target
o TSS refers to Target Sourcing Services (Target’s Internal Sourcing Team)
o Target Headquarters (HQ) refers to Target’s Offices in Minneapolis, Minnesota
USA
o Business Partner refers to Vendor
o Target Guest refers to Target Customer
Factory Education Manual 2 of 11
© 2008 Target. This document is for the sole use of authorized Business Partners and their Factories and shall not be reproduced or disclosed in any form to any
party whatsoever without the express written consent of Target.
Printing the Manual
It is recommended to print the entire manual. If you need to print only a chapter, you
must select the pages you want to print.
Master Table of Contents

Introduction, Common Terms and Acronyms …………….......... 2-11
Global Compliance ………………………………………………….. 1-41
C-TPAT - International Supply Chain ……………………………… 1-36
Product Design & Development – Color …………………………… 1-8
Product Design & Development – Sample Requirements and Fit 1-29

Process - SL Only ……………………………………
Product Design & Development – Fabric…………………………… 1-5
Product Design & Development – Trims …………………………… 1-6
Product Design & Development – Sample Management 1-8

HG/SH Only ……………………………
Product Design & Development – Technical 1-23
HL/SH Only ……………………………
Product Design & Development – Packaging…………………… 1-8
Factory Evaluation…………………………………………………… 1-12
Production Planning …………………………………………………. 1-7
Product Testing ……………………………………………………. 1-22
Product Inspections ………………………………………………….. 1-50
Targets Needle and Metal Contamination Policy and Procedure 1-11

………………..
Floor Ready Requirements …………………………………….. 1-10
Standard Inspection Packet (SIP)…………………………….. 1-20
Packing & Carton Markings ………………………………………… 1-20
International Transportation / Shipping ……………………………. 1-15
Product Safety, Recall and Product Regulatory References …… 1-4
Introduction
The Factory Education Introduction gives a brief overview about Target as a company in
addition to explaining how we want the Vendor and Factory to partner in utilizing the
information in the Factory Education Manual.
Factory Education Initiative

The purpose for these education materials is to ensure that factories producing
merchandise for Target:
• Are aware of and follow Target’s expectations
• Know and understand Target’s processes and procedures
• Know your role as a Target vendor and understand how that differs from your
factories roles and responsibilities
• Know who to contact with questions
Roles and Responsibilities

Vendor
• Two Options to Locate and Print Factory Education Manual:
1. Partners Online > Guidelines & Info > Training > Use the “Search” Function and
type Factory Education
2. Partners Online > Guidelines & Info > Training > LMS > Learn > Catalog >
Vendors > Domestic or Import (based on vendor type) > Source Product > Factory
Education
• Provide comprehensive and consistent education and training to all of your factories
utilizing the Target Factory Education Manual
• Ensure your factory receives all appropriate Important Updates available on POL.
Important Note: This document is for the sole use of authorized Business
Partners and their Factories and shall not be reproduced or disclosed in
any form to any party whatsoever without the express written consent of
Target.
Factory
• Understand training procedures and requirements before beginning Target
production.
• Ensure Factory Education Manual is in a secure location that is easily accessible
within each factory.
• Share Factory Education Manual with all new factory management.
• Each factory should demonstrate pride in manufacturing and quality.
• Be a Solution-Based Partner and proactively problem solve by:
o Analyze the problem
o Find ways to correct problems as they arise
o Partner with vendor and appropriate TCPS team
Target Compliance & Production Services (TCPS)

• Global Compliance deals with ensuring the factory meets Target expectations of
social compliance (child labor, safety and health requirements, etc).
• Quality Assurance handles factory evaluations, production planning and product
inspections to ensure the factory meets Target’s expectations.
• Product Safety Recall and Regulatory works with the vendor, factory and all areas of
the company to manage safety and quality related issues for any product that is
recalled.
Recommendation for Presenting Factory Education Materials

• Invite appropriate Factory Managers or Personnel to one common location to share
factory education materials.
• Designate an appropriate Presenter(s) within your Organization.
o It is recommended that more than one Presenter be assigned due to the large
number of topics to be trained.
o Vendor Presenter(s) should closely review, ensure understanding and practice
materials before educating the assigned factory personnel. If questions:
Refer to Partners Online for additional topic information
Refer to the Resource section located within each chapter that gives e-mail
contact addresses to help answer specific questions
• Considerations for scheduling training:
o Review the total time needed, in relation to the number of factories that require
training.
o Develop a Timing and Action Plan to ensure training is completed by the scheduled
due date.
o Options may include:
Train all topics over 2-3 day time frame.
Train only specific topics each day, such as International Supply Chain Security
and Global Compliance.
Train specific topics each week or month
Factory Education Completion Date

• Due date to have all current factories trained and educated is September 01, 2008
• New factories need to be trained and educated 60 days after registration into
Target’s Business Partner Management (BPM) system.
Target Stores
Target and Super Target Stores
Merchandise within a Target Store
Target Store Facts:

• Target is the second largest general merchandise retailer in America and the third
largest in the world.
• As Target continues to grow, our plan is to have approximately 2010 stores by the
year 2011.
• Target works with our vendor partners to strategize on your growth plan.
• Target Merchant and Internal teams, along with the stores, work together to create
assortments and merchandising displays that are interesting and unique.
• Target works hard to ensure their shelves are well stocked for their guests.
Being the Best Factory Ever!

• Importance of having better informed and trained factories could provide:
o Increased productivity
o Improve product quality
o On time deliveries
o Increased profits
Remember this document is for the sole use of authorized Business

Partners and their Factories and shall not be reproduced or disclosed in
any form to any party whatsoever without the express written consent of
Target.
COMMON TERMS
AND
ACRONYMS
COMMON TERMS AND ACRONYMS
AN Ticket – Ticket with zero retail and no UPC used with garments that have multiple
pieces.
Anchoring – Process of securing product on hangers within the shipping carton to

minimize movement during transit.
Approved/Authorized Supplier – Suppliers on the Owned Brand Approved Supplier

matrix. All owned brand trims must be purchased from an Approved/Authorized Supplier.
AQL –Acceptable Quality Level
Assortment Item – A master item that represents a group of items for ordering and
shipping purposes.
BOL or B/L – Bill of Lading
BPM – Business Partner Management is a system that is used to build a Business

Partner Profile that will gather information with respect to the vendors trading partner
relationship with Target.
Braiform – Target’s designated hanger and size cap supplier for hanging garments
Breakpack – A method of distribution where product is brought into the Regional

Distribution in a master carton and the innerpacks are distributed to the stores;
sometimes referred to as Split Case. Minimum ratio is 3:1; maximum ratio is 10:1.
BV – Bureau Veritas testing lab
CAP – Corrective Action Plan
Casepack – The number of selling units per carton.
CBP – Customs and Border Control
Consolidator – An overseas business partner that manages the movement of Target

freight from overseas vendors.
COO – Country of Origin; country of manufacture or production.
Copyright – Original work fixed in a tangible medium (books, movies, sound,

recordings, fabric design, photos, etc.)
Commit – Refers to a document vendors may receive from merchandising teams via
POL where items and preliminary quantities are estimated so that the vendor may start
with pre-production planning.
Country of Export – The country from which the product was shipped.
CPSC – Consumer Products Safety Commission
Customs Trademark Release letter – Letter issued by Target Brands, Inc., allowing a
manufacturer to import merchandise bearing its owned brands or exclusive license
brands into the US. This letter will only be issued to vendors who have signed a Target
Brands, Inc. Manufacturer’s Trademark Agreement.
DC – Distribution Center
Deconsolidator - A business partner in US that unloads the freight once cleared by

customs and allocates the freight to Target Distribution Centers.
DI – Direct Import
DPCI – Target Department, Class, and Item Number that comprise Target’s identification
of an item that is 9 digits long (e.g. 123-45-6789)
DQA – Dedicated Quality Assurance personnel at vendor level
DuPro – During production Inspection
EDI – Electronic Data Interchange
EPA – Environmental Protection Agency
ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival
ETD – Estimated Time of Departure
EBP – External Business Partner
FE – Factory Evaluation
FDA – US Food and Drug Administration
Floor Ready - Requirements for product presentation and sale
Forwarder – Also referred to as Freight Forwarder or Consolidator.
FRI – Final Random Inspection
Grovesite – External FTP site for product objectives
HG –Hardgoods
HL – Hardlines
Innerpack - Grouping of selling units within a casepack/carton
Integrated – refers to all SL and some HL vendors who are using Target’s new business
model of strategic sourcing
IW – Import Warehouse
Keyline – An electronic digital file, or the print out of the file, containing all graphic and
typographic components arranged on the dieline to produce the desired package.
KPOM – Key Points of Measure
LTL – Less Than Truckload
MAWB – Master Air Waybill
MST – Multistage Testing
MT – Manufacturing Technician (TCPS)
MTA – Manufacturer’s Trademark Agreement
OGR - On Going Random (testing)
OTM – Overseas Transportation Management
OTS – On Time Ship
Owned Brand – Brand that is found exclusively at Target stores. This product includes
such labels as Cherokee, Merona, Shabby Chic, Restore & Restyle, and many others.
Patent – A government-granted property right that imparts a monopoly for a limited

period of time on the use and development of qualified invention.
PD&D – Product Design & Development
PID – Product Identification Number
PLM – Product Lifecycle Management
PO – Purchase Order
POL – Partners Online: Target’s website to communicate business critical information to

our partners, requiring a login and password.
POM – Points of Measure
PPR – Pre-production Planning Requirements
Preferred Supplier – Non-owned brand trims should be purchased from a Preferred

Supplier.
QA – Quality Assurance
QAI – Quality Assurance Initiative
RDC – Regional Distribution Center – A location where product is received and then
distributed out to the stores.
RN – Registration Number
RTA – Ready to Assemble (mainly applies to furniture)
RTS – Ready to Ship
RTW – Ready-To-Wear
SH – Softhome
SL – Softlines
SIP – Standard Inspection Package
SOVE – Standards of Vendor Engagement = Target’s code of conduct for all suppliers
and business partners.
Sustainable -
Target Spec - Product Specification provided by Target
TCPS – Target Corporation Production Services
TOP - Top Of Production (testing)
Trademark – Word, phrase, design or logo used to identify one party’s products and
services from another.
TSS – Target Sourcing Services
UCC – Uniform Code Council (www.uc-council.org)
UPC – Universal Product Code
USDA – United States Department of Agriculture
VGS – Vendor Generated Spec; product specification provided by Vendor
VIRF– Vendor Inspection Request Form
VTA – Vendor Timing and Action
GLOBAL
COMPLIANCE
© 2008 Target Corporation Global Compliance 1 of 41

GLOBAL COMPLIANCE
Overview of Global Compliance

The role of Global Compliance is to protect the Target brand by ensuring our products are
produced ethically and in accordance with our Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE), the
Vendor Conduct Guide, & local laws.
Who participates in the Global Compliance program?
Vendors and factories:

• Which manufacture products with Target’s owned
brand labels.
• Which manufacture products with labels licensed
exclusively to Target.
• Which manufacture products distributed by or
manufactured for Target.
• Which manufacture products for Target’s “See Spot
Save” department. See Spot Save products will be
labeled distributed by or manufactured for the vendor.
• Which source through Target Sourcing Services
(TSS), including National or Market label products.
Global Compliance requires that vendors register all applicable

factories with Target prior to the start of production. Global Compliance conducts unannounced
audits of registered factories to review working conditions. Factories partner with their vendor
business partners to address any issues identified. Target expects compliance to be sustained
over time in order for vendors and factories to continue receiving Target orders.
Table of Contents
1. Local Laws & Applying Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE)
2. Best Practices for a Factory Compliance Program
3. Internal Audit Process
4. Taking Corrective Actions
5. Target’s Unannounced Audit Process
6. Sustaining Compliance
Objectives
• Establish & sustain internal Factory Compliance Program
• Provide clear documentation of Factory Compliance Program
• Demonstrate success through “Acceptable” Target audit results
Resources
• Applying Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE) in Factories
• Local labor authority in your country
• Useful website: U.S. Customs & Border Protection (www.cbp.gov)

1. Local Laws & Applying Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE)
Global Compliance has three primary expectations of factories producing our products:
1) Know and adhere to national,

When local law conflicts with Target’s SOVE,
regional, and local laws and we expect compliance with the stricter
regulations that apply to your factory standard.
and its workers.
Examples:
2) Know and adhere to all U.S. laws • In China the legal minimum working age is 16.
and regulations that apply to the Target defines child labor as below the local
merchandise you are producing, minimum working age, or the age of 14,
including U.S. Customs rules and whichever is greater. Our expectation is that
regulations regarding Country of all factories in China hire workers who are 16
years of age or older.
Origin.
• In Thailand, local law permits employees to
3) Conduct your business ethically work a total of 84 hours a week. Target
and in accordance with Target’s requires that workers do not work more than 60
Standards of Vendor Engagement hours a week. We expect that all factories
(SOVE). producing Target products, including those in
Thailand, comply with this requirement.
2. Best Practices for a Factory Compliance Program
The best practice for a factory to effectively meet our expectations is to establish and
maintain a strong internal factory compliance program. Strong compliance programs
generally include the following elements:
• Health & Safety Management System

• Reasonable Working Hours & Fair Wages Monitoring
• Human Resources Management (HRM) System
• Worker Education & Training
• Worker Communication Opportunities
• Legal Information Management
• Record-Keeping System
Let us review each program element in detail.

Health & Safety Management System
This system ensures that both the factory and dormitory (if applicable) provide a healthy
and safe environment that is in compliance with local laws.
What makes a Health & Safety Management System successful?
• Regular review of all legal and client requirements using an organized tool such as a
checklist.
• Immediately addressing any issues identified and looking for ways to prevent re-
occurrence.
• A testing schedule for all emergency systems and equipment. Be sure to test
functionality during a power failure.
• Health & safety trainings for all workers. Health & safety training should be a
component of new hire orientation.
• Specialized trainings for those who work in high-risk functions, such as with
chemicals.
• Maintain records of all related trainings, tests, etc.
EXAMPLE: Health & Safety Checklist

Reasonable Working Hours & Fair Wages Monitoring
Develop systems to ensure that all workers are paid at the legal wage rate for all hours
worked, work no more than 60 hours per week total, and receive at least one rest day in
seven.
What makes Working Hours & Fair Wages Monitoring successful?
• Time-Keeping & Payroll Documentation

o A punch time clock system OR an
electronic system (scan card or finger
scan) which accurately tracks all hours
worked within the same system. Accurate
time records will help factory management
correctly assess potential working hours
risks and address them immediately.
o All workers – whether regular, piece-rate,
contract, migrant/guest, casual, or
temporary – have a time card and
complete it themselves for all hours
worked.
o Time cards that reflect only the exact hours that are worked for any given day.
o Workers are able to verify hours worked each day.
o All workers are paid for all hours worked at or above the pay rates stated by local
law.
o Itemized pay stubs are available to all workers in the local language.
EXAMPLE: Itemized Paystub in Local Language

• Capacity & Resource Planning
o Analyzing production capacity based on the number of workers available and a
maximum work week of 60 hours. Develop a production plan in advance to
ensure workers do not work more than 60 hours in a week and work no more
than six days in a row.
o Partnering with the sales department to only accept orders based on capacity.
o Partnering with the Human Resources department to hire more workers during
peak seasons to avoid exceeding working hours laws and/or Target’s Standards.
o Reviewing the capacity of each major work area of the factory. The work areas
which are critical to product shipment but have the smallest capacity could create
a bottleneck and lead to excessive working hours in the future.
• Providing Training
o Educating workers on their pay structure, including the type and amount of all
deductions taken from their pay, wage rates, bonuses, and incentive systems.
o Providing training on the time-keeping system for new workers and on an
ongoing basis.
o Ensuring managers and line supervisors receive specialized training and
understand the importance of managing all time-tracking within the time-keeping
system.
• Internal Reviews
o Watching for product build up at the end of the line during busy season. If this
occurs, consider how to plan production to avoid excessive hours for any
individual employee.
o Reviewing production records in comparison to time records for each department
to ensure that all hours have been recorded in the time-keeping system.
o Randomly reviewing payroll records of different workers to verify that they match
time cards and wages meet local laws.
Human Resources Management (HRM) System
An HRM System prevents issues such as child labor, discriminatory hiring or

employment practices, and inadequate benefits provision.
What makes an HRM System successful?
• A standardized hiring system that enforces no hiring outside of the designated

personnel department – No exceptions.
• Age documentation required for hiring and a copy of an original identity document
kept on file. Examples of age documentation are:
o Government identification card
o Birth certificate
o Passport
o Driver’s license
Note: If none of the above forms of identification are available, a substitute form of
identification and age documentation must be provided, such as a Doctor’s or School’s
Certificate. Appropriate documentation should include a photograph. If a photograph is

not available as part of the standard identification, the factory should take a photograph
of the employee and keep it on file for future reference.
• Critically examining authenticity of age documentation.

o Ask:
Does the potential new hire closely resemble the EXAMPLE: Personnel File
photograph? Could this identification belong to a with Age Documentation
close relative?
Could this identification be forged?
o When possible:
Authenticate using specialized technology.
Contact the local authority which issued the
identification to verify authenticity.
• Decisions concerning hiring, advancement, disciplinary
action, or dismissal made based on ability, not personal characteristics.
• Educating new hires on contract terms and factory policies & procedures.
• Obtaining signed contracts from new hires and providing them with a copy.
• Creating organized personnel files using standard format. Files should include at
least name, address, date of birth, start date, copy of original identity document, and
contract.
• Holding management & supervisors accountable for violating local laws or factory
policies.
• Ensuring employees are educated about all benefits available to them, especially
legally required benefits.
• Partnering with payroll department to administer benefits.
• Creating worker handbook and/or rules detailing all rules and policies, in the
language(s) of workers. Ensure distribution to all workers.
Worker Education & Training
Provide new hire orientation, ongoing education, and advanced training as needed on
key topics such as factory rules, health & safety emergency procedures and prevention,
and benefits.
What makes Worker Education & Training successful?
• Coordination of training content and schedule by an individual or team.

• Evaluation following training to assess if workers understood and retained
information.
• Consideration of the needs of new hires, typical workers, and workers in specialized
positions. New hire orientation should train new workers on all major topics, as well
as their individual job responsibilities.
• Reviewing methodology to determine which presentation options are most effective
for the audience for given topics. Be sure to take into account literacy, language(s)
typically spoken and understood by workers, and other key factors.
• Scheduling to ensure workers on all shifts are trained and that trainings are
coordinated throughout the year to produce the best results.

Worker Communication Opportunities
Worker communication opportunities enable workers to provide feedback to

management about issues at the factory as well as ask any questions they have about
topics such as accessing benefits, pay rates, factory rules, or disciplinary procedures.
What makes Worker Communication opportunities successful?
• Demonstrating a strong interest in hearing from workers and providing assistance.

Options include establishing open office hours during lunch or break time when
employees can ask Human Resources questions or establishing an elected
employee representative committee which has access to factory management.
• Options for confidentiality, such as a locked box where workers can leave feedback
or questions that are answered via the factory board.
• Providing a confidential channel for communication other than a worker’s supervisor.
Remember, a worker could experience challenges with his/her supervisor.
• Ensuring that workers who do not speak the local language or who speak a different
language than management have a means of communicating with management, and
vice versa.
• Most of all, being responsive when a pattern of worker concerns or challenges
emerges.
Legal Information Management
Legal Information Management is a method for staying informed about changes to local
and international laws and regulations and ensuring compliance.
What makes Legal Information Management successful?
• Knowing which regional and/or national authorities determine laws and regulations
that affect the factory.
• Knowing how changes in laws and regulations are communicated.
• Monitoring all local trade, industrial, and/or export regulations.
• Monitoring U.S. laws and regulations that are applicable to merchandise being
transported into the country.
• Designating a person responsible for staying informed and up to date with all laws
and regulations and ensuring factory implementation.

Record-Keeping System
A record-keeping system is an organized method for maintaining all legally required

records as well as those needed to meet client requirements.
What makes a Record-Keeping System Example: Training Attendance Record

successful?
• Coordinating record-keeping throughout the

factory. Consider what records are required to
demonstrate compliance in all areas.
• Keeping production documents by client, order
and style on site for at least one year from the
date of importation.
• Maintaining commercial records for all orders,
whether single-country or multi-country
production. Commercial records include
production orders, invoices, payment records,
and transportation records.
• Ensuring proper country of origin is accurately
reflected on all product manufactured.
More specifically, documents kept at the factory for

one year must include, but are not limited to:
• Target’s Purchase Order to the vendor, the
vendor’s purchase order to the factory, and
records of the vendor’s payment(s) to the
factory.
• Purchase and receipt records, bills of lading, and other transportation records for
bulk materials.
• Purchase and receipt records, bills of lading, and other transportation records for
accessories such as zippers, trimmings, hang tags, or buttons.
• Export documents such as transportation to port records, forwarder’s cargo receipt,
bills of lading, commercial invoices to Target, proof of payment and customs export
declarations.
• Daily production records (including piece-rate data) for each worker. Production
records include timecards, timecard reports, knitting or sewing tickets, daily
production reports, and payroll records.
Note: Vendor business partners must keep the production and commercial records
described above for five years from the date of importation. If a factory is uncertain of
how to determine the proper country of origin, it is the responsibility of the vendor/factory
to obtain additional resources to help. These resources could include an International
Trade Attorney, a Customs Broker, or conducting additional research. If you have
questions about Country of Origin or customs record-keeping requirements, please visit
the U.S. Customs & Border Protection web site at www.cbp.gov or contact your vendor
business partner. Vendor Business Partners can review additional information about
these topics in the Customs Compliance section of Partners Online
(www.partnersonline.com).

3. Internal Audit Process
Once a factory has established a compliance program, regular internal audits are a
useful tool for identifying any remaining issues. Following the internal audit, factory
management and workers use the corrective action process to address outstanding
issues and prevent them in the future. By proactively identifying and resolving issues,
the factory is best able to ensure success during a future vendor or brand audit.
An internal audit can either be completed by a factory’s own staff or by an independent

auditing firm hired by the factory. If the audit is conducted by the factory, it is a good
idea for staff members to review areas outside of their day-to-day responsibilities so that
they can provide a fresh perspective.
If the audit is conducted by an independent auditing firm, the factory should provide
information about what standards it is trying to meet. It may be useful to provide the
auditing firm with Applying Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement in Factories. If
you don’t have access to this document, please contact your Vendor.
At minimum, your internal audit process should include the following steps:
1. Factory Tour
• Walk through all factory facilities, including production area, warehouse, canteen,
and dormitory.
• Examine health and safety conditions.
• Review time-keeping system and ensure that it meets requirements and is fully
functional. Test the system to see if it will function during a power failure.
• Select up to 10 workers to interview. Select a diverse group representing a variety of
work stations, ages, races (if applicable), workers types (regular, piece-rate, migrant,
temporary, etc), and roles (floor worker, line supervisor).
2. Worker Interviews
• Conduct in private and keep individual responses confidential – There should be no

consequences to the worker for sharing information.
• Conduct in the language(s) of workers.
• Address working conditions and primary compliance issues.
• Provide an opportunity for workers to voice concerns.

3. Personnel Records Review
• Determine if:
o There is a policy for personnel records management, including in regards to new
hires.
o All workers (contract workers, piece-rate workers, migrant/guest workers, casual
workers, and temporary workers, etc) have a personnel file.
o All personnel files include:
Employment date.
Proof of age at the time of hire.
A copy of the signed employment contract for each worker.
Any other documentation the factory has developed as part of its personnel
record system.
o The personnel files are being maintained in the same way.
• Select a large number of personnel records at random to ensure that personnel files
are standardized and include all key elements.
• Review personnel files of the workers interviewed to cross-check information they
provided and ensure files are being kept accurately.
• Review files being created for newly hired workers. Determine if the files are being
created in a timely manner and if the files of the new workers the same as those of
existing workers.
4. Time, Production, & Payroll Records Review
• Review working hours and production records. Determine if:

o All hours are recorded within the same time-keeping system, for all workers. In
particular, look for any hours that might be recorded manually by either workers
or supervisors.
o All workers use their time cards to punch in and out for shifts and breaks.
o All production hours are accounted for in the time-keeping records.
• Review payroll records, including pay rates and times paid. Determine if:
o There is enough information provided on paystubs and in payroll records to be
able to determine if workers were paid on time at the correct rates.
o Workers were paid on time, at the correct rates, for all hours worked.
• Cross-check all information.
Note: Be sure to review records for all types of workers (piece-rate, temporary, regular,
etc). All piece-rate workers must have time cards and be paid at least the minimum
legal wage rate for all hours worked. Complete time and wage records for piece rate
workers must be kept. The factory must calculate the total legal hourly wages for each
worker for every pay period and confirm that his/her total piece-rate wages are higher. If
they are not, the factory must pay the difference.

Example: Piece-Rate Wage Review
Scenario #1 Scenario #2
Hours Worked 2 Regular Hours 4 Overtime Hours
Wage 10 per Regular Hour 15 per Overtime Hour
Piece-Rate 5 per Item 5 per Item
Items Made 20 Items 10 Items
Amount worker 2 Regular Hours x 10 4 Overtime Hours x 15 per
should be paid per Regular Hour = 20 Overtime Hour = 60
according to local
law:
Amount paid to 20 Items Made x 5 10 Items Made x 5 Piece-
worker by factory Piece-Rate = 100 Rate = 50
for these hours:
Is this acceptable? 100 > 20 Æ This is 50 < 60 Æ This is not
acceptable! acceptable. The factory
must pay the worker an
additional 10 to ensure that
the worker receives the
minimum legal rate for all
hours worked.
5. Country of Origin Review
• Review production and commercial records to determine that:

o Required records are available on site for a minimum of one year.
o The process for working with vendor business partners to maintain records for a
minimum of five years and ensure they are readily available upon request is in
place.
o Country of Origin is accurately reflected on the product.
o The factory is not participating in any illegal transshipment practices. Examples
of illegally transshipping include:
▪ Falsely claiming a country as the Country of Origin to avoid paying anti-
dumping duties.
▪ Claiming Country of Origin on a product to benefit from preferential trade
privileges provided by policies or trade agreements such as the North
American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA), Generalized Systems of
Preferences (GSP), or Singapore Free Trade Agreement (SFTA).
▪ Claiming a false Country of Origin because the quota for the item has expired
in the correct country.
▪ Claiming a false Country of Origin for a designer item because the country is
more desirable to the consumer.
Throughout the internal audit, record any issues identified.

4. Taking Corrective Actions
Following the audit, factory management should meet to review the results and develop
a detailed corrective action plan (CAP). A CAP is a written plan which documents
specific details about how and when the factory will resolve the issues identified during
the audit and prevent them from re-occurring. An effective CAP:
• Clearly defines the issues identified during the audit.

• Specifically states how the factory will resolve each issue.
• Identifies a person at the factory responsible for implementing the plan.
• Specifies an internal deadline.
• Includes information about both the short-term resolution of the issues as well as a
system for preventing the problem from re-occurring in the future.
• Provides a method for tracking progress.

Example: Factory CAP Format
Note: The CAP should be reviewed regularly until all issues identified during the audit have been addressed in full. Once the first
draft of the CAP has been completed, it is useful for the factory to share it with Vendor business partner to communicate what
compliance issues have been identified and how they will be addressed. In addition, factory management can use information from
the CAP to determine when the next internal audit should be conducted, or if a regular schedule should be established.
8
5. Global Compliance Unannounced Audit Process
• Vendors participating in the Global Compliance program register all applicable

factories prior to the start of production. As part of the registration process, factory
management signs the Authorization for Unannounced Compliance Audit (AUCA)
form. Factory management’s signature indicates that the factory will:
o Allow Target or its representatives to conduct unannounced social compliance
audits.
o Comply with local labor & wage laws, Target’s SOVE, and U.S. Bureau of
Customs & Border Protection laws.
Example: Completing the AUCA Form
• Audits are conducted either by a Target Global Compliance auditor or a third party
auditor and focus specifically on working conditions. Most auditors are from the local
area and the audit is conducted in the local language. Upon arrival, the auditor will
provide a copy of the signed AUCA form and identification such as a Target
employee badge or letter provided by Target to authorized third parties.
• It is important to make sure that other managers besides the factory general
manager or owner are aware of the AUCA and the possibility that an unannounced
audit could take place. This can help avoid a “Denied” audit that results in a penalty
for the vendor.
• Target’s audit is similar to the Internal Audit Process we described in Part 3. In

addition to the steps shown, we also include:
o An Open Meeting. During the opening meeting, the auditor reviews the audit
process and requests any documents required to complete the audit.
o Management Interviews. During these private interviews with factory
management, the auditor reviews the hiring process and working conditions
during both peak and off-peak seasons.
o A Closing Meeting. During the closing meeting, the auditor will provide factory
management with a copy of the audit results, review any compliance issues
8
identified during the audit, and discuss how to correct them. Factory
management and the auditor will agree on a date when each issue must be
corrected.
• Following the audit, factory management should immediately contact its vendor
business partner to discuss the audit results and begin work on its corrective action
plan (CAP).
• A Global Compliance Analyst at Target headquarters will review the audit findings
and send an official copy of the results to the vendor shortly after the audit. Vendors
are required to submit a CAP within 7 days after receiving the audit results from
Target. Following the audit, all questions concerning audit results or evidence of
corrective actions should be directed to the Global Compliance Analysts at Target
headquarters, via the factory’s vendor business partner. Questions and other follow-
up information should not be directed to the auditors and/or the Target local offices.
7. Sustaining Compliance
• Factory management’s commitment to ethical business practices is the most

important element of sustaining compliance. Target is seeking business partners
who share our ethical concerns.
• In addition to its standard Factory Compliance Program, factory management should

seek to continuously improve compliance performance by:
o Focusing on opportunities to achieve best practices, not just minimum
expectations in program development. Can the factory become a leader in social
compliance? Is there an opportunity to distinguish itself from the competition?
o Focusing on issue prevention instead of reacting to issues identified through
client audits. To do so, carefully analyze information coming from the factory’s
internal compliance program. For example:
Are there patterns in issues identified through worker feedback, the health &
safety checklist, or regular internal audits? If so, there may be a larger issue
at the factory that requires a new approach.
Are external resources required?
Should the factory seek client support or hire a consultant to address the
problem in a different way?
o Communicating compliance issues and successes to clients. Never let any
potential challenges come as a surprise. Proactive communication and
demonstrating improvement over time helps business partners manage risks and
build trust.
o Seeking to look beyond social compliance to explore environmentally sustainable
business practices.
o Developing ways to measure compliance program effectiveness and
continuously improve over time.
Note: Improved compliance performance could result in decreased worker turnover,

increased productivity, and decreased overtime payroll expenses.
8
Applying Target’s
Standards of Vendor
Engagement (SOVE)
in Factories
8
“Since its founding, Target Corporation has been guided by the highest ethical and legal
standards – a commitment that has provided us with a reputation for excellence.”
–Target Vendor Conduct Guide
Target and its affiliated companies conduct our business in an ethical manner. We are
concerned about human rights. We expect our business partners to share our ethical concerns.
We use our Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE) in selecting our business partners and
expect compliance with these standards by our business partners, including all manufacturers,
contractors, subcontractors and suppliers utilized in the manufacture and finishing of products
that are ordered by Target or any of its affiliated companies.
As a facility that produces Target owned brand product (“factory”), it is your responsibility
to comply with local laws, as well as with our Standards. Target’s expectation is that factories
develop processes and procedures for sustaining compliance on an ongoing basis.
Target’s expectation is that all owned brand vendors establish an internal compliance program
to ensure that factories and subcontractors are in compliance with our Standards and applicable
local laws. Target Global Compliance recommends that your program include:
A manager responsible for compliance programming such as training, factory

monitoring, corrective action planning, and verification.
An education and training program for factories to prevent issues from occurring. Be
sure to share our Standards with the factory and obtain factory management’s
commitment to meet them.
“Self-Audits” conducted by your staff or a reliable third party before you request
registration of a new factory. A self-audit is a detailed review to ensure a factory
meets Target’s Standards and is compliant with local laws.
Ongoing compliance monitoring of factory and sub-contracted business partners.
Proactive communication of issues to Target Global Compliance.
Strong corrective action plans to address any issues identified. Corrective action
plans should include both a plan for addressing issues in the short-term and
preventing their re-occurrence in the long-term. Vendors should verify that factories
have fully implemented corrective actions and maintain appropriate documentation.
Continuous improvement mechanisms for hiring and personnel record management,
payroll systems, and time-keeping systems within your factories.
This guidebook reviews our eight Standards of Vendor Engagement—Safe & Healthy
Workplace, No Forced or Compulsory Labor, Fair Disciplinary Practices, No Discrimination,
Reasonable Working Hours & Overtime, Fair Wages, No Child Labor, and Country of Origin—
and provides detailed information to vendors about requirements and best practices for meeting
our expectations. We encourage you to use this as a reference tool when working with factories
and subcontractors to achieve compliance.
8
Table of Contents
Safe & Healthy Workplace................................................................................20
No Forced or Compulsory Labor.....................................................................26
Fair Disciplinary Practices ...............................................................................28
No Discrimination .............................................................................................29
Reasonable Working Hours & Overtime .........................................................31
Fair Wages.........................................................................................................33
No Child Labor ..................................................................................................36
Country of Origin ..............................................................................................38
Additional Expectations ...................................................................................39
Appendix A: Use of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) ..........................40
Appendix B: Resources ...................................................................................41
8
Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
Safe & Healthy Workplace

“We seek business partners who provide a safe and healthy workplace that complies
with local laws. Business partners who provide residential facilities for their workers
must also provide safe and healthy residential facilities in compliance with local
standards.”
The factory and dormitory should be in compliance with all local health and
safety laws and regulations regarding the workplace. Unless otherwise noted, all
information pertains to both factory and dormitory conditions.
All workers have access to functional fire safety equipment.
Requirements
All fire safety equipment must be placed in locations accessible to all workers. Pathways to
emergency equipment must be kept free from obstruction.
Fire extinguishers should be placed on the walls at an appropriate height to be used by all
workers. Extinguishers should not placed low enough that they are blocked by work stations
or so high that workers cannot reach them. Fire extinguishers should not be on the floor
where they may be blocked easily or may be damaged if they fall over.
Fire extinguishers/hoses, hydrants, and/or the sprinkler system should be available
throughout the factory and dormitory in accordance with local laws and regulations. If there
are no local laws and regulations, have enough equipment located throughout the factory to
successfully fight a fire. An approximate reference is 1 set of safety equipment per 100
square meters.
Written instructions in the workers' language should be on or near the fire extinguishers.
All fire safety equipment must be functional and serviced regularly. Fire extinguishers must
be fully charged.
Fire extinguishers must be an appropriate size for workers to operate easily.
Best Practices
Have a distinct-sounding fire alarm that is fully functional, audible in all areas of the factory,
and supported with a battery back-up. The fire alarm must sound automatically but also have
an emergency activation device. Workers should be familiar with its purpose. In areas where
workers wear ear plugs, the fire alarm must have a visual component, such as a flashing
light.
Paint a yellow or red box on the floor around fire safety equipment, extending approximately
1 meter. Educate workers that no equipment or other obstructions can be placed within the
box.
Factories should research and select the appropriate Fire Extinguisher Class for their
production/product types. Fire extinguishers typically come in four classes which are
designed to put out different types of fires—ordinary combustibles (Class A), flammable
liquids (Class B), electrical equipment (Class C), and flammable metals (Class D). Fire
extinguishers should be labeled with the appropriate picture and letter class. Many now
come with a multi-class rating.
8
Provide clean, sanitary, and neat work and living areas.
Requirements
The factory and dormitory must be clean and well-maintained.

The factory and dormitory must have an appropriate number of toilets according to local law.
If there is no local law, an appropriate ratio is one toilet for every 25 workers.
Toilets should be cleaned, well-maintained, and functional.
Toilets should offer privacy for workers, including doors and gender markings.
Provide sufficient clean, fresh drinking water, free of charge.
Provide canteen or eating area for the workers away from the production floor. Do not allow
eating on the production floor.
The dormitory and factory need to be separate facilities.
The dormitory should be in compliance with all local housing laws and regulations, including
providing adequate protection against weather conditions (e.g. Includes walls, a floor, and
roof).
The number of occupants in the dormitory rooms must be in compliance with all local housing
laws and regulations.
Male and female workers must have separate accommodations for sleeping, with proper
privacy.
Provide running water and functional shower or bathing facilities for dormitory residents.
Provide cooking or canteen areas for dormitory residents. Cooking needs to be done in a
canteen/kitchen (not in the dormitory) for fire safety purposes.
Cooking and/or canteen areas should be cleaned and well maintained.
Ensure all workers are prepared for an emergency and educated on how to
prevent health and safety issues.
Requirements
Educate workers on all fire emergency procedures, including how to operate fire
extinguishers, call the fire brigade, and evacuate. Review training at least annually.
Train at least one worker in first aid procedures and to administer first aid treatment in case of
a medical emergency. Keep training documentation on file. Best practice: Train at least one
worker per shift. Consider training more than one worker in case of absence.
Conduct emergency and fire drills, managed by qualified fire safety officers, for all workers in
accordance with local law. If there is no applicable local law, conduct emergency and fire
drills at least once a year. Ensure fire drills are run on every shift and include a power
shutdown to test all safety equipment.
Keep records of all trainings, including photographs of the training, the date, time, topics, and
number of worker participants. Records should include the signature of participants’
supervisors.
Maintain a fire drill log with key information such as the time and date of the drill, if the drill
was managed by the fire brigade, if it was announced or unannounced, how many workers
were involved in the drill, any issues that occurred, etc.
8
Best Practices
Provide Health & Safety education or training to all workers during initial orientation and on
an ongoing basis. All workers, including night shift workers, must be included. Provide
specific education on:
⎯ Fire safety
⎯ Safe operation of factory machinery & equipment
⎯ Chemical safety (if applicable)
⎯ Benefits of using Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and health risks associated
with not using PPE
Following trainings or safety drills, conduct a de-brief to discuss successes and failures with
management.
Ensure workers have easy access to unobstructed emergency exits.
Requirements
All emergency exits must be clearly marked (painted or lighted on each floor).
An adequate number of emergency exits must be
available on each floor. Each worker must have
access to at least two exits.
Emergency exits must be unlocked from the inside
and doors must push out to open.
Ensure that all aisles and exits are cleared and not
crowded so workers can move easily in case of an
emergency in the factory.
The factory must have an accurate, easy-to-
understand evacuation plan posted on each
floor/area.
Best Practices
Emergency escapes, such as staircases and ladders

should be clear and lead safely to the ground.
Clearly delineate emergency aisles with yellow or red lines and teach workers that red or
yellow areas must be completely free from obstruction.
Remove excess product and production waste on a regular basis.
Materials or boxed goods should be stored or stacked safely on pallets and shelves in stacks
that are not too high or unstable. Workers should use appropriate safety equipment to
retrieve items from high locations. Consider assigning someone to monitor storage practices
regularly to ensure safety.
Label doors that could be mistaken for exits but lead elsewhere – For example, “Bathroom” or
“Not an Exit.”
8
Factory is well-lit day-to-day and during an emergency.
Requirements
Emergency lighting must be installed throughout the entire factory

and dormitory, function properly, and have a back-up power supply.
Emergency lighting should clearly light aisles and exits during a
power outage.
Adequate lighting should be provided for all workers to perform their
jobs safely and comfortably, without damaging their vision.
Best Practices
Test emergency lighting regularly in a full power outage drill.
Basic first aid supplies are available at all times.
Requirements
First aid kits should be properly supplied and placed on each floor/area in the factory, even if
a medical facility is also available on site.
First aid kits should be continuously complete and include basic supplies such as bandages
and ointment. Best practice is to include pain relievers, anti-bacterial ointment, eyewash,
tourniquets, tape, etc. Note: As applicable, Eyewash should be in addition, not instead of, an
eyewash station.
Best Practices
Review first aid kit inventory daily or weekly as well as after any first aid incident and refill
accordingly to ensure there are never any shortages.
First aid kits should be unlocked and/or readily accessible to all workers at all times.
Machines are operated safely.
Requirements
All machinery should have functioning safety features. Examples:

⎯ Machinery with hazardous parts such as conveyor belts, gears, and abrasive wheels,
must be equipped with protective devices.
⎯ All stamping, punching, or cutting machines must be equipped with safety devices.
⎯ Sewing machines must have needle guards.
⎯ Machinery that has automatic feeds should have automatic shut-offs.
Appropriate and functioning personal protective equipment (PPE) should be made available
to all workers, free of charge, based on job function. PPE examples include: metallic cutting
gloves, facemasks, goggles, earplugs, ventilators, reinforced footwear, etc. Please see
Appendix A for additional details concerning the appropriate use of PPE.
8
Best Practices
Train all workers to operate machinery in a safe and effective manner.

Educate all workers on the benefits of using PPE.
Electrical systems are properly configured and protected with the appropriate
safety equipment.
Requirements
All electric systems in the factory and dormitory should be in compliance with local health &
safety regulations in order to prevent fire:
⎯ Electrical cables/wires should be covered properly with tubing, electrical tape, or
proper covers.
⎯ Electrical outlet/switch box should be properly installed and covered.
⎯ Warning signs should be posted as applicable.
Minimize the risk of hazardous materials through appropriate chemical safety

measures.
Requirements
Provide an eye wash station for workers in a

location that is accessible from anywhere that
hazardous chemicals are being used.
Chemicals must be marked with the proper
chemical names and hazard symbols in the
language of workers, and stored in a safe
designated location with proper instructions.
Wherever chemicals are used, factories must
maintain a current list of Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) in the language of workers.
Workers handling chemicals should be trained
to understand MSDS.
Provide adequate ventilation in the factory,
such as windows, fans, air conditioning, or
heating to promote air circulation and
comfortability.
Tools or flammable materials must be stored
in a safe location.
Best Practices
Eliminate hazardous materials when possible

by using non-toxic alternatives.
Have written procedures for all handling of
chemicals and hazardous materials.
Document all related procedures.
8
Provide workers handling chemicals or exposed to chemicals special training to ensure safe
usage. Training should include both orientation and ongoing components, and cover day-to-
day responsibilities, systems and emergency management, and clean-up.
Factories emitting hazardous material into the air should provide proper ventilation or
purification systems.
Exhaust fans must be properly covered and not in a position that could harm workers.
Minimize hazardous waste materials through a waste management system, best practices in
work flow design, and worker training.
Poisonous, hazardous, and/or flammable materials should be stored in a safe location with
proper controls and appropriate warning signs.
Have a secondary containment system in place in case of chemical spills. Ensure that there
is no ability for leakage directly into the sewer system, such as through a drain in the
chemical storage area. Label all storage tanks and containers clearly.
Store chemicals in an appropriate area away from the dormitory and production areas. This
area should be cool and dry and
equipped with a fire prevention
system. Post “No Smoking” signs
and avoid all possible fire hazards,
including improper chemical mixing
or the accidental storage of
combustible chemicals in close
proximity.
Post emergency procedures in
chemical mixing and storage areas.
Keep paths used to transport
chemicals and the path to the eye
wash station free.
Workers transporting chemicals
should wear or carry distinctive
markers to alert others to clear the
way.
Dispose of chemicals and
hazardous materials in accordance with local laws.
Instruct workers fully in the use and purpose of specialized PPE and exhaust systems for the
purpose of chemical and air quality safety. Provide specialized PPE as applicable, if
indicated by the MSDS (e.g. Respirators, gloves of certain material). Post mandatory PPE
signs where needed. Please see Appendix A for additional information concerning PPE.
Research the most appropriate chemical safety and air quality systems for your particular
industry in order to best protect worker health.
Workers must not place their faces between sources of hazardous material and ventilation
systems.
Limit access to chemicals to those who require access for their jobs.
Safe & Healthy Workplace Best Practices
Designate a qualified person to manage health and safety issues.

Develop a system for reviewing all health and safety requirements regularly to ensure
compliance.
Maintain thorough health and safety records on site for one year. Records should document
training programs (prevention), any incidents that occur, and how incidents were addressed.
Investigate any incidents that occur, determine cause, develop and implement a plan for
prevention, and keep records on file.
8
No Forced or Compulsory Labor
“We will not knowingly work with business partners who use forced labor in the
manufacture of products for our stores.”
Workers should not be forced to work or be bound to employment in order to

fulfill a debt to a factory or a third party.
Requirements
Ensure that all workers are working on a voluntary basis and that they are receiving
compensation in accordance with local law, in the form of cash or equivalent.
Ensure that no prisoners work in the factory and/or that no production is subcontracted to
prison laborers. Please note that prison labor is a zero tolerance compliance violation for
Target.
Workers should not be required to pay a deposit or fee, or purchase uniforms, tools, or other
items required for work, in order to begin, continue, or terminate employment.
All recruitment fees should be paid by the factory.
Factory cannot withhold payment to workers in order to prevent them from leaving their jobs.
Do not take deductions from wages unless they are either mandatory under local law or
voluntary, reasonable, and clearly understood by workers.
Factories should provide pay slips or payment receipts that are itemized and available in
workers’ local language(s).
Workers cannot be disciplined or receive a penalty for refusing to work overtime.
Best Practices
Develop a written set of instructions for all labor agents establishing the prohibition of forced
and compulsory labor.
Require labor agents to disclose their labor sources.
Ensure workers do not have large amounts of debt to a factory that may cause excessive
deductions and/or penalties.
Ensure workers that submit resignations with proper notice receive their last pay without
penalty.
Develop an internal procedure to confirm voluntary acceptance of overtime work.
8
Ensure all workers are aware of the factory rules and have an employment
contract.
Requirements
Each worker (including contract workers, piece-rate workers, migrant/guest workers casual
workers, and temporary workers) must have an employment contract.
Provide a copy of the employment contract to each worker in his/her local language and
ensure there is a copy in his/her personnel folder. The contract must by signed by both the
worker and factory management.
The factory should create a written document that details the factory rules in the language(s)
understood by local and migrant/guest workers.
Factory rules should provide information about disciplinary practices in the workplace and be
consistent with local law.
Post the factory rules in a visible area and/or distribute them to the workers.
Best Practice
Provide training on factory rules to all workers on a regular schedule (i.e. quarterly, annually).
Ensure training is done in format that takes into account different learning styles of workers.
Eliminate all unreasonable restriction on the movement of workers.
Requirements
Do not withhold personal identification to guarantee that workers, particularly migrant/guest

workers, will not leave.
Workers must retain possession or control of their passports, travel documents, identification
papers and any other legal document.
Workers should be free to leave the factory and/or dormitory at all times, unless a curfew has
been put into place for their own safety. If such a curfew is in place:
⎯ Curfew hours should be reasonable, and based on legitimate security concerns.
⎯ A protocol should be put in place for times when workers are unable to meet curfew
restrictions and require exceptions.
⎯ All policies regarding curfew must be clearly communicated to workers both verbally
and in writing.
Best Practices
Do not lock dormitory or workplace for the purpose of restricting worker movement.
Verify that security guards are used to protect the factory and not to restrict the movement of
workers.
Provide lockers for workers where they can store their personal identification and valuables
safely.
8
Fair Disciplinary Practices
“We will not knowingly work with business partners who utilize physical or mental
punishment against their workers”
Ensure factory management does not condone, create or contribute to an

intimidating, hostile, or offensive work environment.
Requirements
Factories must ensure that workers are not subject to corporal punishment, harassed,
physically, and/or mentally abused. Please note that corporal punishment is a zero
tolerance compliance violation for Target.
Create a written policy that outlines that the above practices are prohibited and details
appropriate disciplinary procedures.
Factory rules should provide information about disciplinary practices in the workplace and be
consistent with local law and Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement.
Factory rules may not include fines or fees for the following, or similar:
⎯ Damaged goods
⎯ Drinking water
⎯ Minor disciplinary infractions such as smoking or tardiness
⎯ Freedom of movement violation (For example: Limitations on bathroom privileges)
All workers, including management, should receive education on factory policy.
Best Practices
Security guards are not authorized to impose disciplinary actions against workers.
Encourage management to take classes on harassment, awareness, sensitivity to other
cultures, corporal punishment, and mental abuse.
Create a system in which workers can raise issues of concern, including treatment by their
supervisor, without repercussions.
Maintain written records of disciplinary measures taken.
Workers should be aware of factory rules and Target’s Standards of Vendor

Engagement.
Requirements
Post factory rules in a public area. Factory rules may also be distributed in the form of a
handbook and included in a detailed employment contract. Keep posted and/or distributed
factory rules up to date.
Ensure factory rules are written in the language of workers.
Educate all workers on all factory rules, and ensure that workers are made aware of any new
rules or changes.
Make sure Target’s Standards of Vendor Engagement (SOVE) is posted in a visible location
and that it is in the language of workers.
8
No Discrimination
“While we respect cultural differences, we believe workers should be employed
based on their abilities rather than their race, gender, personal characteristics or
beliefs, and encourage our business partners to eliminate discrimination in their
workplaces.”
Hire, compensate, promote, discipline, & terminate workers based on

qualifications, abilities, and performance – regardless of race, gender,
personal characteristics, or beliefs.
Requirements
Create and distribute job titles and descriptions for all positions.
Make all employment and compensation decisions based on requirements for job
performance.
Establish objective criteria for hiring decisions and job assignments. Do not make
assignments based on gender.
Best Practices
Allow all eligible job applicants to apply and/or take related exams.
Do not collect information that is not related to job performance and not required by law
during the application process.
Do not include criteria that are not directly related to job tasks in employment advertising – for
example: gender or age characteristics.
Establish clear non-discrimination policies documented in the factory rule book and/or worker
handbook, including:
⎯ Confidential grievance procedure in which workers can report discrimination to
someone other than a direct supervisor. Review policy frequently to ensure
effectiveness.
⎯ Appropriate consequences for violations.
Have a system that effectively implements non-discrimination policies.
Establish and communicate objective measurements for performance (including bonuses)
and promotions.
Establish and apply objective criteria for dismissal.
Develop and provide non-discrimination and cultural sensitivity trainings for all workers which
address the importance of treating all races, gender, and religious groups equally. Provide
specific topics for Managers, Supervisors, and Security Guards.
Document employment practices over time to establish credibility.
Do not use pregnancy testing to prevent or result in the termination of

employment.
Requirements
Do not require pregnancy testing as a condition of employment.

Do not use marriage or pregnancy as a reason for prohibition of or termination of
employment.
8
Knowledge of pregnancy should only be used in order to provide reasonable accommodation
for pregnant women, such as avoiding work that may put them at risk, and ensuring they are
provided proper benefits under local law.
If pregnancy testing is legal and in use, clearly communicate its purpose within the factory
rule book.
8
Reasonable Working Hours & Overtime
“We seek business partners that do not require a work week which exceeds local
laws or business customs, and encourage our business partners not to require more
then a 60-hour work week on a regularly scheduled basis, except for compensated
overtime in compliance with local laws.”
Maintain a work schedule that complies with both Target’s Standards of

Vendor Engagement and local law.
Requirements
Ensure workers are not working more than 60 hours a week, whether or not the local law
allows for more hours.
Follow local working hours laws that apply to adolescent and female workers.
Provide a minimum of one full rest day in seven days to all workers.
Workers should receive vacation/time off in accordance with local law.
Female workers should receive maternity leave in accordance with local law.
Provide reasonable meal and rest breaks in accordance with local law.
Detail working schedule, normal working hours, rest days, and holiday policy in the factory
rules and/or in worker handbook, in a language understood by local and migrant workers.
Best Practices
Accept order quantities and deadlines that are in keeping with resource constraints such as
number of workers and a maximum work week of 60 hours.
Develop a production plan in advance to ensure workers do not work more than 60 hours in a
week.
Hire additional workers during peak season to avoid exceeding working hours laws and/or
Target’s Standards.
Provide training to workers about how to access vacation benefits.
Ensure working overtime is optional and voluntary.
Requirements
Overtime hours worked should comply with the local law, both in terms of hours worked per
day and hours worked per week. Total working hours per week may not exceed 60.
Workers should be able to decline working overtime without any repercussions or penalties,
including the loss of future ability to work overtime.
Best Practice
Develop an internal procedure to confirm voluntary acceptance of overtime work.
8
In order to ensure accurate working hours, factories must use a fully
functioning punch time clock or scan card time-keeping system (as you may
have read in the Fair Wages section).
Requirements
The time-keeping system must be either a punch time clock system or a scan card system
which accurately tracks all hours worked. It cannot be a manual time-keeping system, or
supplemented by a manual time-keeping system.
The time-keeping system must have a battery back-up which starts immediately in the case
of power loss.
All workers (including regular workers, piece-rate workers, contract workers, migrant/guest
workers, casual workers, and temporary workers) must have a time card.
workers, casual workers, and temporary workers) must accurately complete their own time
card for all hours worked, including overtime.
Management should ensure that workers are not punching time cards earlier than work start
time or later than work finish time. Time cards should only reflect actual hours worked.
Time cards must be properly completed and easy to read.
All hours, including overtime, must be recorded within the same time-keeping system.
Workers should be able to verify regular and overtime hours worked each day.
Best Practices
Provide training on the time-keeping system for new workers and on an ongoing basis.
Ensure managers and line supervisors receive specialized training and understand the
importance of managing all time-tracking within the time-keeping system.
Conduct regular internal audits to ensure that the time-keeping system is being used properly
and that it ties back to the payroll systems properly.
8
Fair Wages
“We seek business partners that provide wages and benefits in compliance with local
laws, and encourage our business partners to commit to the betterment of wage and
benefit levels that address the basic needs of workers and their families.”
Pay workers for all hours worked at the pay rates stated by local law.
Requirements
Worker wage for regular hours worked must meet or exceed the minimum wage according to
local law.
Worker wage for overtime hours worked must meet or exceed the overtime wage rate
according to local law.
If there is no local law regarding overtime compensation, workers must be compensated at a
higher rate than for regular hours.
Workers should be properly compensated for working on holidays in accordance with local
law.
If the wages of workers calculated by piece-rate fall below the applicable legal wage rates
(minimum, overtime, holiday, etc) then the factory must calculate the difference between the
piece-rate wage and the correct legal wage and pay the difference to the workers in order to
meet the legal minimum rates.
Implement payroll deductions in order to provide legal benefits or voluntary

services only.
Requirements
Implement benefits such as medical insurance, social security/retirement, etc, in accordance

with local law. Ensure that deductions are used specifically for the purpose stated and that
employees receive appropriate benefits documentation, such as an itemized paystub
showing specific deductions.
Do not take deductions from wages unless they are either mandatory under local law or
voluntary, reasonable, and clearly understood by workers.
⎯ Examples of reasonable deductions might include the cost of meals or dormitory
accommodations.
⎯ Examples of unreasonable deductions might include deductions for drinking water,
uniforms, work-related tools, or safety equipment.
Recruitment agency fees may not be deducted from worker wages.
8
Best Practices
Maintain supporting documentation to prove mandatory deductions are being taken and
applied in accordance with local laws.
Do not use short-term, renewable contracts or apprenticeships which are not substantively
different from full-time employment opportunities in order to avoid payment of benefits or
higher wages to workers under local law.
Employers should not deduct amounts for dormitory, meal, or similar expenses which exceed
actual cost. Employers should keep records available which demonstrate the actual cost of
these expenses if they are deducted from worker wages.
Properly recognize the length of service of all workers in order to determine benefits to which
they are entitled, as applicable.
Ensure workers fully understand their wage structure and can verify the
accuracy of payments they receive.
Requirements
Educate workers on their pay structure, including the type and amount of all deductions taken
from their pay, wage rates, bonuses, and incentive systems.
Pay stubs or receipts of payment should be itemized and available to all workers in the local
language.
Workers should be able to verify regular
and overtime hours worked each day.
Best Practices
Education provided should be both verbal

and in writing.
Education program should include an
orientation component for new workers
and a plan for regular refresher training of
existing workers.
Provide access to a contact in the human
resources department (or other applicable
department) in case a worker has a
related question.
Include details of wage structure,
compensation, benefits, and pay schedule
in the employment contract to be signed
by factory management and individual
worker.
Provide access to complete and accurate payroll and production records.
Requirements
Payroll must include:

⎯ Complete pay period date
⎯ Worker name
8
⎯ Total hours worked & break-down by type of hours (regular, overtime, etc)
⎯ Worker wage rates (normal, overtime, etc)
Payroll and/or production records should reflect all hours worked by the workers. Factories
should maintain a single authentic set of payroll and production records which clearly and
accurately provides information for all workers.
Factory must provide auditors access to review the payroll records.
Keep all wage records for five years.
Document the timely distribution of wages.
Requirements
Pay workers in a timely manner, in accordance with local law.

Ensure workers sign a log documenting receipt of payment.
Provide workers with an itemized pay stub or receipt for payment.
In order to ensure accurate working hours, factories must use a fully

functioning punch time clock or scan card time-keeping system (as you may
have read in the Reasonable Working Hours & Overtime section).
Requirements
The time-keeping system must be either a punch time clock system or a scan card system
which accurately tracks all hours worked. It cannot be a manual time-keeping system, or
supplemented by a manual time-keeping system.
The time-keeping system must have a battery back-up which starts immediately in the case
of power loss.
workers, casual workers, and temporary workers) must have a time card.
workers, casual workers, and temporary workers) must accurately complete their own time
card for all hours worked, including overtime.
Management should ensure that workers are not punching time cards earlier than work start
time or later than work finish time. Time cards should only reflect actual hours worked.
Time cards must be properly completed and easy to read.
All hours, including overtime, must be recorded within the same time-keeping system.
Workers should be able to verify regular and overtime hours worked each day.
Best Practices
Provide training on the time-keeping system for new workers and on an ongoing basis.
Ensure managers and line supervisors receive specialized training and understand the
importance of managing all time-tracking within the time-keeping system.
Conduct regular internal audits to ensure that the time-keeping system is being used properly
and that it ties back to the payroll systems properly.
8
No Child Labor
“We will not knowingly work with business partners who utilize child labor. We define
child labor as either being below the local minimum working age, or the age of 14,
whichever is greater. We do make an exception for legitimate apprenticeship
programs.”
Ensure all workers meet the minimum age at the time of hire according to local
law, or the age of 14, whichever is greater.
Requirements
Establish and enforce a comprehensive human resources system to prevent child labor.
Ensure policies include a clause that no department can hire anyone outside of the
established hiring channels. Do not allow any exceptions, whether for permanent workers,
contract workers, piece-rate workers, migrant/guest workers, casual workers, or temporary
workers.
Define consequences if managers or supervisors violate local laws and/or Target’s
Standards. Hold managers or supervisors accountable.
Vendors: Understand the definition of child labor for all countries where you source product,
and whether it meets Target’s Standards.
Factories: understand the legal working age and adolescent working age, and how the laws
compare to Target’s Standards.
Verify proof of age and identity for each applicant prior to hiring. Documentation should
include an authenticated original identity document with a photograph, such as ID Card, Birth
Certificate, Passport, Driver’s License, Doctor’s Certificate, etc. Never hire anyone without
this information.
Confirm that all production work is performed in the factory or a controlled environment in
order to prevent risk of participation by child or adolescent laborers.
Please note that child labor is a zero tolerance compliance violation for Target.
Best Practices
Critically examine the authenticity of age and identity documentation. In regions where
falsification is widespread, substantiate age through other information sources, such as:
⎯ Contact source of original document, such as local government authority, for
authentication.
⎯ Ask for multiple original document sources for cross comparison.
⎯ Utilize specialized document authentication machinery to rule out falsification.
⎯ In depth interview using advanced interview techniques to cross-check information.
Track type and occurrences of falsified documents identified over time and train human
resources staff to recognize common practices.
Interview prospective workers to ensure appearance matches identity documents.
Create a corporate “No Child Labor” policy and include it in the company manual.
Vendors: Ensure factory suppliers have a hiring policy that specifies a minimum age in
keeping with Target’s Standards.
Share age requirements with hiring agencies, if applicable.
Control access to production areas. Do not allow any individual below the legal working age
or the age of 14 (whichever is greater) access to the production floor, unless on a guided tour
in the company of an authorized worker.
8
Keep organized personnel records with proof of identity & age for all workers.
Requirements
Each worker (including contract workers, piece-rate workers, migrant/guest workers, casual
workers, and temporary workers) must have a personnel record.
The personnel record must contain employment date and proof of age at the time of hire.
Personnel records for each worker (including contract workers, piece-rate workers,
migrant/guest workers, casual workers, and temporary workers) need to be available for
review.
Provide Target Global Compliance and/or our designated third party auditors with complete
access to personnel records for all workers.
Best Practices
Personnel records should be standardized and created at the time of hire.

Each personnel records should include the following, at minimum:
⎯ Name
⎯ Address
⎯ Date of Birth
⎯ Start Date
⎯ Copy of Original Identity Document, such as ID Card, Birth Certificate, Passport,
Driver’s License, Doctor’s Certificate, etc.
Comply with all local laws concerning adolescent workers.
Requirements
Factories must understand and be in compliance with local laws for adolescent workers
including, but not limited to, types of work, working conditions, working days, working hours,
and overtime hours.
Follow local laws concerning legitimate apprenticeship programs. Do not allow informal
apprenticeship programs.
Best Practices
Take extra care in verifying and documenting the age of adolescent workers.
Have a system in place to track the age of all workers between the minimum legal adolescent
working age and the adult legal working age.
Have a system in place for clearly identifying and monitoring adolescent workers and their
work stations, as well as identifying stations that are inappropriate for adolescent workers for
legal and safety reasons.
Verify that all workers engaged in high-risk activities such as working with hazardous
substances, lifting heavy loads, working at high levels, etc. are above the legal age required
for such work.
Train adolescent workers to ensure that they fully understand factory rules and, in particular,
legal restrictions concerning adolescent workers.
8
Country of Origin
“We will not knowingly work with business partners who use deceptive practices to deliberately
misrepresent country of origin in order to evade quota or other import restrictions or duties on any
products that will be sold in our stores.”
Maintain production records and follow U.S Customs regulations regarding

country of origin.
Requirements
Vendors: Verify factories are not involved in illegal transshipment practices. Illegal
transshipment is defined as claiming a false country of origin to circumvent quota and/or
other restrictions applicable to the shipment. Please note that illegal transshipment is a zero
tolerance compliance violation for Target.
Maintain production documents by client, by order, and by style for 5 years from the date of
importation. Records for the last year should be kept on site at the factory. The documents
kept on site must include, but are not limited to, the following:
⎯ Purchase and receipt records for bulk materials.
⎯ Purchase and receipt records for accessories.
⎯ Daily production records (including piece rate data) for each worker.
If requested, provide documentation in a timely manner.
Keep commercial records for all orders, whether single-country or multi-country production.
Vendors: Make certain that all sub-contracted factories producing Target owned brand are
registered with Target Global Compliance.
Keep up to date on all local trade, industrial, and/or export regulations.
Understand U.S. Customs rules and regulations regarding Country of Origin.
For additional information, vendors can visit the Customs Compliance section of Partners
Online (www.partnersonline.com).
8
Additional Expectations
Provide Target Global Compliance with full, unimpeded access to the factory,
workers, and records, on an unannounced basis.
Requirements
Display the name of the factory visibly on the outside of the factory building.
Allow Target Global Compliance or our designated third party auditors to conduct worker and
management interviews.
Allow Target Global Compliance or our designated third party auditors full access to payroll
records, production records, and other documentation required to conduct the audit, upon
request.
Allow Target Global Compliance or our designated third party auditors full access to all areas
of the Registered factory premises and dormitory (if applicable), regardless of whether or not
Target production is taking place or if only certain areas are typically used for Target
production.
Treat all Target Global Compliance auditors or our designated third party auditors with
respect. Following an audit, please feel free to ask clarifying questions about audit findings.
However, ensure that factory staff do not engage in any of the following behaviors:
⎯ Raise voices in an inappropriate manner.
⎯ Threaten or cause physical or other type of harm to Target’s Team Members or
representatives.
⎯ Prevent Target’s Team Members or our representatives from leaving the factory.
⎯ Attempt to alter the audit findings in any way. A “Factory Comments” document is
provided at the close of an audit. Any concerns can be noted in this document.
⎯ Attempt to bribe Target’s Team Members or our representatives.
Please note that engaging in the behaviors described above may result in termination of
Target’s business relationship with the factory.
Vendors: Train all factory management personnel on the terms of the Target Authorization for
Unannounced Compliance Audits (AUCA) agreement and Standards of Vendor Engagement
(SOVE) to ensure that there will be no barriers to an unannounced audit, even if senior
management is not present.
Specify a back-up person to serve as the contact for compliance audits in case the primary
contact is not available at the time of the audit.
8
Appendix A: Use of Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE)
Note: This list includes examples and is not all-inclusive. Additional research required to ensure
compliance with local health & safety regulations.
Work Process or Station Possible Health & Safety Hazard(s) PPE Features Required
Brass Ingot Making • High temperature exposure • Heat-resistant respiratory head
• Smoke & metal fume inhalation gear
• Heat-resistant gloves
Casting • High temperature exposure • Heat-resistant respiratory head
• Smoke, metal fume, & particle inhalation gear
• Heat-resistant gloves
Scraping unit • Eye strain • Protective eye gear & appropriate
• Potential eye and hand damage from scrap lighting
metal • Protective gloves
• Dust inhalation • Respiratory head gear
Welding Units / Electroplating, • Bodily harm from fire sparks • Welding helmets (heat-resistant)
Engraving, & Coloring / • Eye damage • Welding handshields (heat-
Lacquering, Blasting, & Power • Non-ionizing radiation resistant)
coating • Goggles (heat-resistant)
• Welding spectacles (heat-resistant)
Polishing Units • Dust & metal particle inhalation • Respiratory mask
• Eye damage • Goggles
Fabric Cutting • Cuts to hands • Steel wire mesh gloves
• Respiratory damage from lint & fluff • Dust mask
Sewing • Respiratory damage from fabric lint & dust • Dust mask
Pressing/Ironing • Electrocution • Rubber shoes
• Rubber mats
Laundry/Wet Processing • Burns from handling hot materials • Rubber shoes
• Water & heat-resistant gloves
• Water & heat-resistant apron
Chemical Handling • Damage to skin, eyes, body, and respiratory • Rubber boots
systems • Acid-resistant aprons
• Chemical-resistant gloves
• Goggles
• Chemical cartridge mask
Spot Cleaning • Respiratory & skin damage • Chemical cartridge mask
• Chemical-resistant gloves
Computerized embroidery • Hearing damage • Ear plugs
Sandblasting • Eye & respiratory damage • Goggles
• Chemical cartridge mask
Knitting • Respiratory damage • Dust mask
Handling glue, solvents, primers • Respiratory damage • Chemical cartridge mask
Kitchen/Canteen • Hygiene • Gloves
• Hair net
Noise levels at 85 decibels or higher require the use of ear plugs.
8
Appendix B: Resources
Better Factories Cambodia (www.betterfactories.org)
Business for Social Responsibility (www.bsr.org)
International Labour Organization (www.ilo.org)
U.S. Customs & Border Protection (http://www.cbp.gov/)
U.S. Department of Labor: Occupational Safety & Health Adminstration

(www.osha.gov)
U.S Departmentof State: Bureau of Democracy, Human Rights, & Labor

(http://www.state.gov/g/drl/rls/hrrpt/)
World Bank Links to Organizations Working on Corporate Social

Responsibility
(http://web.worldbank.org/WBSITE/EXTERNAL/WBI/WBIPROGRAMS/CGCSRL
P/0,,contentMDK:20481228~pagePK:64156158~piPK:64152884~theSitePK:4608
61,00.html)
8
INTERNATIONAL
SUPPLY CHAIN
SECURITY –
C-TPAT
International Supply Chain Security/C-TPAT 1 of 36

© 2008 Target. These materials are for the sole use of designated employees and business partners of Target. Reproduction,
electronic transmission, third party use or other disclosure is strictly forbidden.
INTERNATIONAL SUPPLY CHAIN SECURITY / C-TPAT
Overview
To better ensure the security of goods entering our supply chain, the Customs-Trade
Partnership Against Terrorism (or C-TPAT) was developed by the U.S. Bureau of Customs
and Border Protection, which is a division of the Department of Homeland Security. All
members of the international supply chain are involved with C-TPAT, including: importers,
ocean carriers, customs brokers, warehouse operators and manufacturers.
C-TPAT is important to Target and our factories because:

o Compliant companies have lower container exam rates than non-compliant
companies.
o Offers businesses an opportunity to play an active role in enhancing the security of
global trade.
o Allows Target to protect our Brand and Assets and supports Target’s goal of speed-
to-market.
Table of Contents
1. C-TPAT Audit and Compliance Program
2. C-TPAT Factory Security Requirements
Objectives
• Understand the Customs-Trade Partnership Against Terrorism (C-TPAT) Program
• Understand Target’s C-TPAT Audit and Compliance Program
• Understand the factory security requirements for Target’s C-TPAT Program
Resources
• Security Training and Threat Awareness Program
• Security Questionnaire Best Methods
• Container Load Plan
• Seven Point Inspection Checklist
• Glossary
• Toll Free Hotline
• Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
• Contact: InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com

Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
1. Target’s C-TPAT Audit and Compliance Process
• The International Supply Chain Security Team has partnered with our TCPS Team to
implement a C-TPAT security audit program to measure factory compliance with our C-
TPAT program.
o The short audit was incorporated into the DUPRO/FRI. The TCPS QA Inspectors
will be responsible for completing the audits during the DUPRO/FRI inspections.
The short audit reviews 6 basic security questions that allow the International Supply
Chain Security team to identify a facility and evaluate some very basic security
questions.
o The medium audit was incorporated into the Factory Evaluation process. The
Manufacturing Technician (MT) or other assigned TCPS team member will be
responsible for completing the audits during the new or annual Factory Evaluation.
The Global Compliance team is also completing the medium audit during their Global
Compliance factory audits. The medium audit reviews 23 security questions that
allow the International Supply Chain Security team to gather enough information to
determine if the facility is meeting our C-TPAT program requirements.
Note: The C-TPAT security audit program is a completely separate audit program from
Global Compliance that is managed by the International Supply Chain Security team.
o The long audit is being completed by the International Supply Chain Security team.
The long audit reviews 56 questions and will be used for facilities that are in
countries that are deemed higher risk and for facilities that provide inaccurate
information on their facility security evaluations.
• Compliance Program
o One of the main requirements of the US Customs C-TPAT program is for Target to
have visibility to all points of the international supply chain. Effective January 15,
2008 the International Supply Chain Security team will be implementing a
compliance program for C-TPAT. This will ensure all vendor partners are meeting
the visibility requirements necessary in order for Target to be C-TPAT compliant.
▪ Two ways to be non-compliant:
o Producing in a factory without factory information in Business Partner
Management (BPM)
o Incorrect Importer of Record information in Business Partner Management
(BPM)
Note: Non-compliant chargebacks will be processed by the Claims Dept.
2. C-TPAT Factory Security Requirements
Physical Security - Cargo handling and storage facilities must have physical barriers and
deterrents that guard against unauthorized access. Facilities should incorporate the
following C-TPAT physical security standards throughout their facility:
• Fencing
o A perimeter fence of barrier must enclose the areas around cargo handling and
storage facilities. All fences and barriers must be at least 7-8 feet tall.
o All fencing must be inspected on a regular basis for integrity and damage. An
inspection log must be kept for all daily inspections that include, but is not limited to
the following:
▪ Time and date of fence/barrier inspection
▪ Individual’s full name that completed the inspection
▪ Individual inspection check points that were inspected
▪ Documentation of any damage
▪ Document damage repair date
Example: Showing adequate perimeter fencing
• Gates and Gate Houses

o Gates through which vehicles and/or personnel enter or exit must be manned and/or
monitored 24 hours a day by security or management.
o The number of gates should be kept to the minimum necessary for proper access
and safety.
Example: Showing proper gate and gate house

• Parking
o Private passenger vehicles must be prohibited from parking in or adjacent to cargo
handling and storage areas.
o All private passenger vehicles should be parked outside of the fence or barrier when
possible. If private passenger vehicles need to be parked inside the facility, they
must have some type of identifying sticker, park in a designated parking area and be
logged into a personal vehicle log book at the gate.
o The log book should contain the following information:
▪ Name
▪ Employee Number
▪ Car Make/License Plate Number
▪ In/Out Time
Example: Showing proper employee parking procedure
• Building Structure
o Buildings must be constructed of materials that resist unlawful entry.
o The facility must be inspected on a regular basis for integrity and damage. All issues
that are found during the inspection must be reported to management and fixed
immediately.
o The facility must keep a log of these daily inspections that includes:
▪ Name of individual performing the inspection
▪ Date and time of inspection
▪ Documentation of any damage found to the structure
▪ Document damage repair date
Example: Showing proper building structure

• Locking Devices and Key Controls
o All external and internal windows, gates and fences must be secured with locking
devices.
o Management or security personnel must control the issuance of all locks and keys.
o A key log is required to document keys/locks within the facility and should contain the
following information:
▪ Lock number and area assigned to
▪ Key number assigned to each individual lock
▪ Individual name(s) assigned with the key(s)
▪ Date and time the individual received the key(s)
▪ Date and time the individual returned the key(s)
o All extra keys and locks must be stored in a locked cabinet or drawer.
Example: Showing proper locking of gates

• Lighting
o Adequate lighting must be provided inside and outside the facility including the
following areas: entrances and exits, cargo handling and storage areas, fence lines
and parking areas.
o We want all of our facilities to have adequate lighting for the protection and safety of
your facilities, employees and Target’s product.
Example: Showing adequate outside lighting

• Alarm Systems and Video Surveillance Camera
o Alarm systems and Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) should be utilized to monitor
premises and prevent unauthorized access to cargo handling and storage areas.
o CCTV and alarm systems are not mandatory for any facilities at this time. Target
would like all vendors/facilities to consider installing CCTV at the entrance/exit gate
(s) and the container loading area. If you already have CCTV or are planning to add
CCTV to your factory, it will improve your overall facility security status in the eyes of
Target. Target will be able to use this information to inform US Customs that our
facilities are going above and beyond the call of duty, when it comes to security.
Example: Showing CCTV and alarm systems
Camera System, CCTV Motion Detector
Physical Access Controls - Access controls prevent unauthorized entry to facilities, maintain
control of employees and visitors, and protect company assets. Access controls must
include the positive identification of employees, visitors and vendors at all points of entry.
• Employees
o An employee identification system must be in place for positive identification and
access control purposes.
o All employees must use their employee identification to gain access to the facility.
The identification must also be displayed at all times, while the employee is working
in the facility.
o Company management or security personnel must adequately control the issuance
and removal of employee, visitor and vendor identification badges. Written
procedures for the issuance, removal and changing of access devices (e.g. keys, key
cards, etc.) must be documented.
o Employees should only be given access to those areas needed for the performance
of their duties.

Example: Employees gaining access to facility with proper ID badge / ID badge
• Visitors
o Visitors must present photo identification for documentation purposes upon arrival.
o All visitors must be escorted and visibly display temporary identification.
o The visitor will be required to sign into a log that contains the following information:
▪ Date/Time of arrival
▪ Full Name
▪ Company representing
▪ Identification number
▪ Individual they are visiting/Reason for visit
▪ Make, color and license of vehicle
Note: All Target team members that visit your factories, must present identification and
display temporary identification while they are in your factories.
Example: Visitor identification / Visitor correctly showing visitor identification

upon arrival to factory

• Deliveries (including mail)
o Proper vendor identification and/or photo identification must be presented for
documentation purposes upon arrival by all vendors. Arriving packages and mail
should be periodically screened before being delivered.
o Security personnel, management or receptionist should document all deliveries in a
delivery log, to include the following information:
▪ Individual’s full name
▪ Date/Time of arrival
▪ Company representing
▪ Vehicle license number
▪ Purpose of visit
• Challenging and Removing Unauthorized Persons

o Written procedures must be in place to identify, challenge and address
unauthorized/unidentified persons.
o Challenging Unauthorized Individuals Procedure
▪ All employees will be responsible for challenging unauthorized individuals
found in the facility.
▪ The unauthorized individual should be asked if they have proper
identification/visitor’s badge, and what their business is in the facility, e.g.
who are they there to see, etc.
▪ The unauthorized individual should be removed form the area by escort to the
guard/reception desk where the situations can be resolved.
▪ If the facility employee feels that there is a threat, they should notify security
personnel or management and monitor where the individual is within the
facility, so security personnel or management can apprehend the
unauthorized individual
▪ Security personnel or management should fill out an incident report including
the following information:
o Who was the individual?
o Where did the incident take place?
o What was the individual doing in the unauthorized area?
o When did the incident take place?
o How was the incident resolved?
Note: A copy of all incident reports must be sent to Vendor and Target’s International
supply Chain Security team via email to: InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com
Container Security - Container integrity must be maintained to protect against the

introduction of unauthorized material and/or persons. At point of container stuffing, written
procedures must be in place to properly seal and maintain the integrity of the shipping
containers.
• Container Inspection
o Written procedures must be in place to verify the physical integrity of the container
structure prior to stuffing, to include the reliability of the locking mechanisms of the
doors.
o A seven point-inspection must be implemented in all facilities to verify the integrity of
all shipping containers. All facilities should utilize a seven point-inspection checklist
for all containers. Target has developed a checklist that facilities can utilize. (see
resource)
1. Front Wall – Ensure all corner block and vents are visible. Use a string
or measuring tape to determine the length of the container.
2/3. Left/Right Side – Look for unusual repairs to structural beams. Use a
tool to tap the side walls. There should be a hollow sound.
4. Floor – Ensure the floor of the container is flat and look for unusual
repairs in the floor.

5. Ceiling/Roof – Ensure ventilation holes are visible, not covered or absent.
Use a tool to tap the ceiling/roof, there should be a hollow sound.
6. Inside/Outside Doors – Ensure container has secure and reliable locking

mechanisms. Look for loose bolts and different color bonding material on
or around the bolts.
7. Outside/Undercarriage – The undercarriage should be inspected prior to

entering your facility. Make sure all support beams are visible underneath
the container.

• Container Storage
o All facilities should store full and empty containers within the fence or barrier of their
facility. If containers must be stored outside of the fence/barrier, they must be
secured with a seal and be monitored by security personnel at all times.
• Container Seals
o A high security seal must be affixed to all loaded containers bound for the U.S.
o Written procedures must stipulate how seals are to be controlled and affixed to
loaded containers
o This must include written procedures for recognizing and reporting compromised
seals and/or containers to Target’s overseas consolidator or the appropriate foreign
authority
o Only designated employees should distribute container seals for integrity purposes
o All seals should be kept in a locked closet or drawer until they are ready to be used
to seal the container
o All seals should be recorded in a log book, which allows them to be checked in and
out of the facility. The Container Load Plan can be utilized as a seal log (see
resource) or a seal log must be maintained with the following components:
▪ Date/Time container is sealed
▪ Seal number
▪ Container number
▪ Employee name and identification that completed the container sealing process
Example: Steamship Line Seal

Example: High Security Seals
Personnel Security
• Pre-Employment Verification and Background Checks/Investigations
o Consistent with foreign, federal, state, and local regulations, pre-employment
verifications, background checks and investigations should be conducted for
prospective employees.
▪ Application verifications should include: education, prior employment and
personal reference checks
▪ Background check information should include: criminal and drug checks
▪ Once employed, periodic checks and reinvestigations should be performed
based on cause, and/or the sensitivity of the employee’s position.
o Personnel Termination Procedures
▪ Companies must have written procedures in place to remove identification,
facility, and system access for terminated employees.
▪ Management must collect all employee identification, including keys, access
badges, and ensure that all systems access has been removed for terminated
employees. All of this information should be documented in a log that is kept in
the employees personnel file.

Procedural Security
• Documentation Processing
o Written procedures must be in place to ensure that all information used in the
clearing of merchandise/cargo, is legible, complete, accurate, and protected against
the exchange, loss or introduction of incorrect information. Documentation control
must include safeguarding computer access and information.
o All documentation should be stored in a secure area for a minimum of five years.
• Manifesting Procedures
o To help ensure the integrity of cargo received from abroad, vendors/factories must
put written procedures in place to ensure that the information provided to the
overseas consolidator for the 24 hour manifest requirements is reported accurately
and timely.
• Shipping and Receiving
o Factories must ensure that their cargo is accurately described and the weights,
labels, marks and piece count are correct.
o Cargo that is departing from their facilities must be verified against the purchase
order or packing list, prior to departure from the factory.
o Drivers delivering or receiving cargo must be positively identified before cargo is
received or delivered.
▪ Driver Identification Process
o Security personnel should check and validate all truck/container drivers’
identification, prior to allowing entrance to their facilities.
o A truck / container check in/checkout log should be kept for all trailers or
containers that enter or exit the facility. This should contain the following
information:
▪ Individual’s full name
▪ Vehicle license number
▪ Container/Trailer number
▪ Seal number
• Cargo Discrepancies
o All shortages, overages, and other significant discrepancies must be resolved and/or
investigated appropriately.
o All discrepancies should be reported to the overseas consolidator.
o If illegal or suspicious activities are detected it is the facility’s responsibility to contact
the overseas consolidator and the appropriate law enforcement agency for
resolution.
Information Technology Security

• Password Protection
o Automated systems must use individually assigned accounts that require a periodic
change of password.
▪ Passwords must be changed every 90 days at a minimum and cannot be reused.
o Information Technology security policies, procedures and standards must be
documented and provided to employees in the form of training.
• Accountability
o A system must be in place to identify the abuse of information technology, including
improper access, tampering or the altering of business data.
o This system must identify internet abuse, virus attacks, and inappropriate systems
access.
o All system violators must be subject to appropriate disciplinary actions for abuse.
Security Training and Threat Awareness
• Threat awareness program should be established in all facilities (see resource)
• A threat awareness program must be established, documented and maintained by
security personnel and/or management to recognize and foster awareness of the threat
posed by terrorists at each point in the supply chain.
• Employees must be made aware of the procedures the company has in place to address
a situation and how to report it.
• Additional training should be provided to employees in the shipping and receiving areas,
as well as those receiving and opening mail.
• Additionally, specific training should be offered to assist employees in maintaining cargo
integrity, recognizing internal conspiracies, and protecting access controls.

Security Training and Threat Awareness
• A threat awareness program should be documented, established and maintained by

security personnel and/or management to recognize and foster awareness of the threat
posed by terrorists at each point in the supply chain.
• Employees must be made aware of the procedures the company has in place to address
a situation and how to report it.
• Additional training should be provided to employees in the shipping and receiving areas,
as well as those receiving and opening mail.
• Additionally, specific training should be offered to assist employees in maintaining cargo
integrity, recognizing internal conspiracies, and protecting access controls.
Security Training and Threat Awareness Program Procedure
• All companies should have a documented and established Threat Awareness Program
that is maintained by security personnel and/or management.
• This program should be designed to foster awareness of the potential threat posed by
terrorists at each point of the supply chain.
• This program should include, but not be limited to the following:
o Access Control – The checking of all employees, visitors, vendors, truck/container
driver’s identification or badges upon entering and exiting the facility. Seal verification
on all containers entering and exiting the facility.
o Physical Security – Periodic checks of the perimeter fencing to insure integrity, all
lights are working and coverage is adequate enough to eliminate shadows, CCTV
cameras are working and coverage is adequate on all access points and high value
areas, all alarms are in working order, all communication devices, e.g. radios,
telephones, etc, are in working order.
o Personnel Security – Ensuring all employees possess and display a valid
identification badge, all visitors and vendors are properly signed in and out of the
facility, and are properly escorted when in the facility. All employers will have a
background check conducted on their employees, in accordance to local, State and
Federal laws, prior to hiring.
o Shipping and Receiving - Ensure that the proper process of signing in and out of
containers is being implemented and followed, that all front gate security personnel
are aware of what is an acceptable seal, and how to respond/report all
discrepancies, tamper evident, issues found, know how to identify and respond to
shipping documents that are not correct, and recognize and challenge unauthorized
individuals.
o All companies will make sure all employees are aware of the policy and procedures
the company has in place to address the response to a situation and how to report it,
including the notification to Target by calling the Integrity Hotline at 011- 704-556-
7046.
o Additional training will be given to employees working in the shipping and receiving
areas, and employees that receive and open incoming mail, to include the
identification and recognition of properly marked cartons, documentation, identifying
suspicious packages, etc, and procedures in place on how to respond and report
these situation.
o Specific training should be given to all employees assisting them in maintaining
cargo integrity, recognizing internal conspiracies, and protecting the integrity of
access controls.

Security Questionnaire Best Methods
The following best methods (bolded) can be used at a guideline when filling out the Facility
Security Evaluation in the Business Partner Management (BPM) too. If you have answered
yes to the all of the questions in bold, the answer to the evaluation question is yes. If you
answered no to any part of bold questions the answer to the evaluation question is no.
Please send questions or concerns about C-TPAT to

InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com.
Container/Trailer
# Question Answer
1. Do you have Target merchandise that is factory loaded? Yes / No
Is the ocean liner container loaded at your facility?
2. Do you have Target merchandise that is CFS (Container Freight Station)? Yes / No
Is the Target merchandise trucked to a consolidator or Container Freight Station before being loaded
into the ocean liner container?
3. (If yes for CFS) Do you ship all Target merchandise in an enclosed mode of transportation? Yes / No
Is the merchandise enclosed and locked while being transported to the Container Freight Station?
4. Is a high security seal affixed to each container/trailer that meets ISO/PAS (17712) standards? Yes / No
Is a bolt seal, a cable seal or a bar seals attached to each container that is loaded with cargo at your
facility? (For more information you can reference ISO/PAS 17712 standard at www.iso.org.)
5. Do you have written procedures in place on how seals are controlled and affixed to containers/trailers? Yes / No
Do you have written procedures in place that includes at a minimum:
• How to view the seal and container locking mechanisms for tampering?
• How to verify seal number against shipping documentation?
• How to test the seal to make sure that it is attached properly to the container
• Twist seal to make sure that the seal does not unscrew?
Do you currently have a seal log that includes at a minimum: (Please reference the container load plan
on Partners Online.)
• Date/Time container is sealed?
• Seal number?
• Container number?
• Employee name and identification that completed the container sealing process?
6. Do you have written procedures in place for recognizing and reporting compromised seals to Target? Yes / No
Do you have a written procedure in place to recognize and report compromised seals to Target’s
overseas consolidator that includes:
• Who reported the compromised seal?
• Where was the container located when the compromised seal was identified?
• Who reported the compromised seal to Target’s overseas consolidator?
• How the situation was resolved?
7. Is the container/trailer sealed at the factory immediately after loading? Yes / No
Does the facility seal all containers/trailers immediately after loading?
8. Do you have written procedures in place for designated employees to distribute container/trailer seals? Yes / No

Is a manager, supervisor, team lead or security personnel designated to distribute seals?
9. Do you have a container/trailer seal log? Yes / No

Do you have a seal log procedure that includes at a minimum:
Date/Time container is sealed?
• Seal number?
• Employee name and identification that completed the container sealing process?
The container load plan, found on Partners Online, can be used as a log.
10. Are containers/trailers stored in a secure area to prevent unauthorized access? Yes / No
Are all full and empty containers stored within the fence or barrier of the facility? If the containers
must be stored outside of the fence or barrier, are they secured with a seal and monitored by
security personnel at all times?
Are containers stored door to door/end to end, or by another meaningful method (e.g., backed
against structure high enough to keep doors from opening) to prevent tampering/pilferage?
11. Do you have written procedures in place to report unauthorized entry into containers/trailers and storage areas? Yes / No
Are there written procedures in place for reporting and neutralizing unauthorized entry into
container or container storage area?
Do the procedures include:

• An explanation of how the subject should be asked if they have proper identification to be in the
container storage area and what their business is in the container storage area?
• How the subject should be removed from the area by escort to the guard/reception desk where
the situation can be handled?
• What to do if the employee feels that there is a threat, how to notify security and monitor where
the individual is so security can apprehend them?
• How the guard, or manager, should fill out an incident report recording including:
o Who was the individual?
o Where did the incident take place?
o What was the individual doing in the unauthorized area?
o When did the incident take place?
o How was the situation resolved?
• How to send a copy of all incident reports to the International Supply Chain Security Team via
email to InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com.
12. Do you have written procedures in place to verify physical integrity of the container/trailer by using the seven Yes / No
point inspection prior to stuffing?
Do you have a written procedure in place to verify the physical integrity of the container/trailer by using
the seven point inspection prior to stuffing?
Does the procedure include at a minimum:

• Date/Time container is inspected?
• Employee name and identification that completed the container inspection process?
• Does the inspection include – reliability of the locking mechanisms of the doors?
• The seven point inspection checklist includes front wall, left side, right side, floor, ceiling/roof,
inside/outside doors, and outside/undercarriage. It can be found on Partners Online.
Physical Security

# Question Answer
13. Does a security fence or physical barrier surround your facility? Yes / No
Does the facility have a fence or barrier of at least 8 feet high (2.43 meters) surrounding the facility?
14. Are written procedures in place to regularly inspect the fence/physical barrier for integrity and damage? Yes / No
Does the facility perform the fence/physical barrier for integrity and damage on a daily basis?
Does the facility have a written procedure and log to include at a minimum:
• Name of individual performing inspection?
• Date and time of inspection?
• Document the damage?
• Have damage fixed immediately?
• Document completion date?
15. Does interior fencing segregating domestic, international, high value, and hazardous cargo? Yes / No
Is there a separate, secured area for the storage of domestic, international, high value, and hazardous
cargo?
16. Are all gates through which vehicles and personnel enter/exit manned and/or monitored by security personnel? Yes / No
Does the facility have security personnel or management that man or monitor all entry/exits gates 24
hours a day?
Do all security guards receive the specific training for their position within the facility?
Is all security guard training documented in their personnel file?
Do the security guards wear uniforms at all times?
Are there post orders in each gate house that instruct the security personnel how to do their jobs and
handle threat situations?
17. Do you have employee/visitor parking areas segregated from all cargo handling and storage areas? Yes / No
Are employee/visitor parking areas segregated from cargo handling and storage areas, so there is •
limited access to tamper with cargo handling and storage areas?
Do all employees/visitors park outside of the fence or physical barrier?
If vehicles must part inside the facility:

• Do they park in an area that is segregated
• Do they have some type of identifying sticker?
• Are all vehicles logged into a log book with the following information at a minimum:
• Name?
• Employee Number?
• Car Make/License?
• In/Out Time?
18. Are buildings constructed of materials that resist unlawful entry? Yes / No
Are all buildings constructed materials to resist unlawful entry such as bricks, cement, and/or steel?
19. (If yes) Is the structure integrity maintained by periodic inspection and repair? Yes / No
Is there a written procedure documenting how to perform the building inspection?
Are the inspections performed daily?
Is there a log to track the inspections that includes:

• Name of individual performing inspection?
• Date and time of inspection?
• Document the damage?
• Have damage fixed immediately?
• Document completion date?
20. Do you have external and internal windows, gates, and fences secured with locking devices? Yes / No

Do all windows, gates and fences have locking devices?
21. Does a management or security personnel control issuance of all locks and keys? Yes / No
Does management or security personnel control issuance of all locks and keys?
Is there a log to track the issuance of all locks and keys that includes the following information:
• Lock number and area assigned to
• Key number assigned with the lock
• Individual name(s) assigned with the key(s)
• Date and time the individual received the key
• Date and time the individual returned the key
Are all extra keys and locks stored in a locked cabinet or drawer?
When a key is lost or stolen, is it reported to management or security immediately?
Are the locks re-keyed or replaced immediately when a key is lost or stolen?
22. Does lighting illuminate the building entrances and exits areas? Yes / No
Does the facility have lighting that illuminates and eliminates all shadows for the buildings entrances
and exits areas?
Is the lighting inspected on a daily basis?
Are lights that are burnt out replaced immediately?

23. Does lighting illuminate the cargo handling and storage areas? Yes / No
Does the facility have lighting that illuminates and eliminates all shadows for the cargo handling and
storage areas?

24. Does outside lighting illuminate the fence line? Yes / No
Does the facility have outside lighting that illuminates and eliminates all shadows for the fence line?

25. Does lighting illuminate the parking area? Yes / No
Does the facility have lighting that illuminates and eliminates all shadows for the parking areas?

26. Is an alarm used to monitor premises and prevent unauthorized access to cargo handling facilities and storage Yes / No
areas?
Does the facility have an alarm system to monitor the premises and prevent unauthorized access to
cargo handling facilities and storage areas?
Examples: motion detector or contact alarms

27. Is video surveillance or a closed circuit camera system used to monitor premises and prevent unauthorized Yes / No
access to cargo handling facilities and storage areas?
Does the facility have video surveillance or a closed circuit camera system to monitor the premises,
cargo handling and storage areas?
If yes, are all videos kept for a minimum of 30 days?
Physical Access Controls

# Question Answer
28. Is a system in place to identify employees? Yes / No
Is there an employee access control system in place?
Are all employees required to wear a company issued form of photo identification when in the facility?
Does this identification display a clear picture of the employee’s face? This identification could include
employee’s hair and eye color, height, and any other description to help verify the identity of the
employee.
Does the identification have a distinctive employee number that will be associated to the employee while
they are working for the company?
Is the identification be used to gain entry into the facility, and authorization into designated working
areas, e.g. shipping, receiving, high value, etc?
29. Does management or security personnel control issuance and removal of employee, visitor and vendor Yes / No
identification badges?
Are all employee, visitor and vendor identification badges issued and removed by Human Recourses,
management or security personnel?
30. Are procedures in place and documented for issuance, removal and change of access devices (key, key cards, Yes / No
etc.)?
Does the facility have written procedures for the issuance, removal and change of access devices (keys,
key cards etc.)?
Is a log of employee badges kept that includes the following at a minimum:

• Date/Time of issuance, removal and/or change?
• The person for issuance, removal and/or change?
• Employee name and identification that completed the issuance, removal and/or change?
Once a person ends their employment with the company, does management or security personnel should
collect all access devices, including keys, access badges/company identification, etc?
Is this procedure documented to include documentation showing that the former employee did return
these items, verified with their signature and the person that collected the items?
31. Are employees only given access to those secure areas needed for the performance of their duties? Yes / No
When giving employees access to different areas of the facility, is access only given to the areas that are
absolutely necessary for the employee to perform their job?
32. Do visitors present photo identification for documentation purposes prior to entry? Yes / No
Do all visitors present photo identification to security, management or a receptionist upon arrival at the
facility?
Does the facility have a visitors’ log that includes the following information:
• Date and Time of Arrival?
• Name/Phone Number?
• Company Representing?
• Individual they are visiting?
• Reason for Visit?

• Picture ID Number?
• Make, color and license of car?
Once the visitor is ready to leave the facility, are they required to sign out with the time they are leaving,
and return their visitor’s badge?
Do all Target team members that visit your facility present identification and display temporary
identification while they are in your facility?
33. Are all visitors escorted and visibly display temporary identification? Yes / No
Are visitors escorted by the employee, security or management the entire time they are in the facility?
Are visitors given a temporary identification badge that is issued by security, management or a
receptionist?
Do visitors visibly display the temporary badge?

34. Is proper vendor identification and/or photo identification presented for documentation purposes prior to entry by Yes / No
all vendors?
Does security personnel, management or a receptionist ensure all vendors delivery persons show proper
vendor identification and/or photo identification?
Does security personnel, management or a receptionist put the following information into a visitor log
book?
• Name/Phone Number?
• Vehicle license number?
• Purpose of visit?
35. Are arriving packages and mail periodically screened before being distributed? Yes / No
Is the arriving mail and packages periodically screened when they are received before distributing?
Is additional training given to employees working in the shipping and receiving areas?
Is additional training given to employees that receive and open incoming mail?
• Does this training include:

• The identification and recognition of properly marked cartons?
• Proper documentation?
• Identifying suspicious packages, etc?
• Procedures in place on how to respond and report these situations?
36. Are procedures in place to identify, challenge, and address unauthorized or unidentified persons? Yes / No
Are there written procedures in place to identify, challenge, and address unauthorized or unidentified
persons?
Are these procedures trained to all employees?
Are employees trained on Target’s incident response plan?
Do the procedures include the following information:

• How to identify an unauthorized individual?
• What do I do if I identify and unauthorized individual?
• Who do I call if I feel threatened?
• How do I fill out an incident report?
• When do I call the local authorities?
Personnel Security
# Question Answer
37. Is application information, such as employment history and references verified prior to employment? Yes / No

Does the facility verify application information, such as education, employment history, and references
prior to employment?
Is the pre-employment information documented in the employee’s personnel file?

38. Once employed, are periodic checks performed based on cause, or sensitivity of employees position? Yes / No
Does the facility perform periodic checks based on suspicions or cause once the employee is hired?
39. Consistent with local law, does the factory have background checks conducted on prospective employees? Yes / No
Is a background check performed on prospective employees?
Is a criminal background check performed on all prospective employees?
Is a drug screening performed on all prospective employees?

40. Are procedures in place to remove identification, facility and system access for terminated employees? Yes / No
Do you have a written procedure in place for the removal of identification, facility and security access for
terminated employees?
Does this written and documented procedure include a log book that documents that all employee
identification and system access was removed?
Does this log include the following information:
• Date/Time of removal?
• Terminated employees name?
• Record identification of terminated employee’s and/or system access device?
• Escort terminated employee away from facility?
• Employee name and identification that completed the termination?
• Former employee’s signature/date?
• List of what access was removed and what actual physical items were obtained from the
employee?
• Signature of the management or security personnel that colleted and removed the employee
identification and system access?
Are these log records maintained in the terminated employees personnel file for a minimum of five years?
Procedural Security
# Question Answer
41. Do you have procedures in place to ensure all documents used in customs clearing of United States cargo is Yes / No
legible, complete, accurate, and protected against exchange, loss or introduction of wrong information?
Does the facilities have written procedures in place to ensure that all information used in the clearing of
merchandise/cargo, is legible, complete, accurate, and protected against the exchange, loss or
introduction of incorrect information?
Is the documentation stored in a secure storage room or drawer?
Is the documentation stored for a minimum of five years?
Is the documentation delivered to the overseas providers in a closed, sealed envelope?
Is it logged in the delivery log book?
Does the delivery log book contain the following information:

• Date/Time?
• Courier’s Name?
• Identification Number?
• Envelope Information or Dept/PO?

• Signature of Courier?
42. Do you have procedures in place to ensure that the information provided to the overseas consolidator for the 24 Yes / No
hour manifest requirement is reported accurately and timely?
Are there written procedures in place to support the 24 hour manifest requirement?
On CY (factory load) activity:
• Is the shipping information provided to Target’s designated consolidator four (4) days prior to the
cancel date of the PO?
On CFS (consolidation) activity:
• Is the cargo submitted with the required shipping information to Target Corporation designated
consolidator five (5) days prior to the PO cancellation date or earlier where necessary?
43. Are drivers delivering or receiving cargo positively identified before cargo is received or released? Yes / No
Does security personnel, management or receptionist insure all vendors/delivery persons present proper
vendor identification and photo identification for documentation purposes?
Does security personnel, management or receptionist input the following information into a vendor sign
in log:

• Individual’s full name/Phone Number?
• Identification number?
• Vehicle license number?
• Purpose of visit?
Is a visitor’s badge issued (see visitor procedures) if they need to enter the facility?
Is the individual escorted at all times while in the facility?

44. Is cargo accurately described, and weights, labels, marks and piece count indicated and verified against the Yes / No
purchase or delivery orders?
Does the facility validate that each carton is accurately described, and the weights, labels, marks and
piece count are correct and verified throughout the packing and loading process?
Does the facility use the purchase order/packing list to verify the correct carton count by item prior to the
cargo being loaded into the container/trailer?
Once completed the loading does a manager/supervisor sign and date the purchase order/packing list to
validate that the load was complete and correct?
Is the signed purchase order/packing list kept with the documents and saved for a minimum of five
years?
45. Are all shortages, overages and other significant discrepancies resolved and/or investigated? Yes / No
Are all shortages, overages, and other significant discrepancies or anomalies resolved and/or
investigated appropriately by the facility?
If a discrepancy is found during the loading process and can not be determined as a paperwork error, is
the whole container unloaded to verify the carton counts and quantity to resolve the discrepancy?

Does the facility keep a log of who was loading and unloading the container during the time of the
discrepancy?
Are all discrepancies or anomalies reported to the overseas consolidator?
IT Security
# Question Answer
46. Do you have an IT system? (If no, go to Security Training & Threat Awareness Section) (If yes, answer the Yes / No
following questions)
Does the facility have a computer system in place?
47. Does documentation control include safeguarding of computer access information? Yes / No
Does the facility have a system in place to identify the abuse of information technology, including
improper access, tampering or the altering of business data?
If yes, does the system identify internet abuse, virus attacks, and inappropriate systems access?
Is this system monitored on a daily basis by IT personnel?

48. Do automated systems use individually assigned accounts that require periodic change of password? Yes / No
Do all automated systems use individually assigned passwords that require a periodic change of
password at a minimum of every 90 days?
49. Are IT security policies, procedures and standards in place and provided to employees in the form of training? Yes / No
Are all employees trained on the documented information technology security policies, procedures and
standards?
Does this training include the following issues at a minimum:

• Virus Threats?
• Data Integrity?
• Web Access?
• Password Protection?
Is this training documented and kept in each employees personnel file?

50. Is a system in place to ID abuse of IT including improper access, tampering, or altering of business data? Yes / No
Does the facility have a system in place to identify the abuse of information technology, including
improper access, tampering or the altering of business data?
Is this system monitored on a daily basis by the information technology department or management?
Does this system identify internet abuse, virus attacks, and inappropriate systems access?
51. Are all system violators subject to appropriate disciplinary actions? Yes / No
Is the appropriate disciplinary action taken with system violators?
Is the appropriate disciplinary action documented for each type of violation in the employees personnel
file?
Security Training & Threat Awareness

# Question Answer
52. Is a threat awareness program established and maintained by security personnel to recognize and foster Yes / No
awareness of the threat posed by terrorists at each point in the supply chain?
Does the facility have a documented and established Threat Awareness Program that is maintained by
security personnel and/or management?
Is this program designed to foster awareness of the potential threat posed by terrorists at each point of

the supply chain?
Does this program include at a minimum:
Access Control
• Does the facility check all employees, visitors, vendors, truck/container driver’s identification or
badges upon entering and exiting the facility?
• Are seals verified on all containers entering and exiting the facility?
Physical Security
• Are periodic checks performed to ensure:
• The integrity of perimeter fencing?
• All lights are working and coverage is adequate enough to eliminate shadows?
• All CCTV cameras are working and coverage is adequate on all access points and high
value areas?
• All alarms are in working order,
• All communication devices, e.g. radios, telephones, etc, are in working order?
Personnel Security
• Does the facility ensure all employees possess and display a valid identification badge?
• Do all visitors and vendors properly sign in and out of the facility?
• Are all visitors and vendors properly escorted when in the facility?
• Do all employees have a background check conducted prior to employment, in accordance to
local, State and Federal laws, prior to hiring?
Shipping and Receiving

• Does the facility ensure:
• The proper process of signing in and out of containers is being implemented and followed?
• The proper process of signing in and out of containers is being implemented and followed?
• That all front gate security personnel are aware of:

• What is an acceptable seal? and
• How to respond/report all discrepancies?
• How to respond/report all tamper evident issues found?
• Know how to identify and respond to shipping documents that are not correct?
• Recognize and challenge unauthorized individuals?
53. Is Target notified if illegal or suspicious activity is detected? Yes / No

Is Target notified by using the Target Corporation’s Integrity Hotline, (001) 704-556-7046, if illegal or
suspicious activity is detected?
54. Does the facility have Target Corporation’s Integrity Hotline information displayed throughout? Yes / No
Is Target’s toll-free Integrity Hotline telephone number, (001) 704-556-7046, posted throughout the
facility?
Is the number used to report suspicious activity such as terrorist threats, attempted infiltration of a
person/weapon into the supply chain, and any media requests regarding our security measures or the
Target Corporation?
55. Is additional training provided to employees in shipping and receiving areas, as well as those receiving and Yes / No
opening mail?
Is additional training given to employees working in the shipping and receiving areas?
Is additional training given to employees that receive and open incoming mail?
• Does this training include:

• The identification and recognition of properly marked cartons?

• Proper documentation?
• Identifying suspicious packages, etc?
• Procedures in place on how to respond and report these situations?
56. Is specific training offered to assist employees in maintaining cargo integrity, recognizing internal conspiracies, Yes / No
and protecting access controls?
Is specific training given to all employees assisting them in:
• Maintaining cargo integrity?
• Recognizing internal conspiracies?
• Protecting the integrity of access controls?

Container Load Plan
CONTAINER LOAD PLAN

Seal
Factory/Vendor: Container No. Number(s)
Consignee: Container Delivery Date: CY or CFS?
Carrier: Port of Loading: Port of Discharge:
Initial Inspection of container Remarks/Comments:

External condition of the container/externo OK/Bien
Roof condition of the container/techo: OK/Bien
Wall condition of the container/paderes: OK/Bien
Floor condition of the container/piso: OK/Bien
Door condition of the container/puerta: OK/Bien
Other/otros: OK/Bien
Total Total Total

ROW: DPCI PO# Style # CTNS VCP Pcs/Items Kilos/Item Cbms/Item
Grand
Total
Shipment Release/Inspection Certification (TSS Vendors Only)
Date of Inspection and Inspector:
Employee Who Sealed

Container Employee ID
Time Container
Date Container Sealed Sealed

Seven Point Inspection Checklist
Container Seven Point Inspection

***Must complete at least two checks in each section***
Front Wall Checks Completed

• Ensure interior corner blocks are visible and not false, and
front wall is made of corrugated material.
• Use a 40’ chain with a marker in the middle to take an interior
measurement from the front wall to the rear door of both 40-
foot and 20-foot containers. The 40-foot container should
measure 39’5” or 12.01 meters. The 20-foot container should
measure 19’4”or 5.89 meters.
• Ensure ventilation holes are visible, not covered or absent.
• Use a tool to tap the front wall, there should be a hollow
sound.
Left Side Checks Completed
• Look for unusual repairs to structural beams
• Look for repairs on the walls that are visible on the inside and
outside of the container.
• Use tool to tap on the sides, there should be a hollow sound.
Right Side Checks Completed

• Look for unusual repairs to structural beams
• Look for repairs on the walls that are visible on the inside and outside of the
container.
• Use tool to tap on the sides, there should be a hollow sound.
Floor Checks Completed

• Measure the height of the container from floor to ceiling. A 40-foot and 20-foot container
should measure7’10” or 2.38 meters.
• Ensure that the floor of the container is flat. There should not be different floor heights in
the container.
• Look for unusual repairs in the floor.
Ceiling/Roof Checks Completed

• The construction of false ceilings/roofs can be either internal or external.
• Observe the distance between the top of the corner block and the top of the roof, e.g.,
normally the roof is slightly below or flush with the top of the corner blocks.
• Ensure that the ventilation holes are visible, not covered or absent.
• Look for repairs on the ceiling/roof that are visible on the inside and outside of the
container.
• Use a tool to tap on the ceiling/roof, there should be a hollow sound.
Inside/Outside Doors Checks Completed

• Ensure that the container door has secure and reliable locking mechanisms.
• Observe the rivet type and color, they should not be different colors or have colored
putty surrounding the rivets.
• Ensure that there are not solid plates, where there are usually cavities.
Outside/Undercarriage Checks Completed

• The outside/undercarriage of a container should be inspected before it enters the
facility.
• Inspect the underneath of the containers visually or with a mirror to make sure that all
support beams are visible and no foreign objects are mounted to the container.
• Look for repairs on the outside that are visible on the inside of the container.
• Use a tool to tap on the outside/undercarriage, there should be a hollow sound.

Glossary
WORD DEFINITION
Business Partner Management BPM is the tool utilized as the direct source for information regarding
(BPM) Target’s Business Partners. Organizational structure, product and
material capabilities for sourcing decisions and compliance to Target
Corporations regulatory standards.
• Business Partners own the accuracy of the information and are
responsible for maintaining the information.
CBP U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP) is the unified border agency
within the Department of Homeland Security (DHS). CBP's priority
mission is preventing terrorists and terrorist weapons from entering the
United States, while also facilitating the flow of legitimate trade and
travel. The primary tool to facilitate this mission is the Customs-Trade
Partnership Against Terrorism.
CCTV Closed Circuit Television is video surveillance equipment.
CFS Container Freight Station – This is the where less than container load
cargo is delivered for consolidation.
CSD Container Security Device
CSI Container Security Initiative is the extension of the U.S. zone of security
outward so the U.S. borders are the last line of defense, not the first line
of defense. Through CSI, the U.S. will identify and screen high-risk cargo
containers at foreign ports before they set sail for the U.S. to prevent
terrorist threats before they become a reality.
Customs Trade Partnership U.S. Bureau of Customs and Border Protection (CBP) and key importers
Against Terrorism (C-TPAT) developed C-TPAT in 2002 to secure the supply chain from the threat of
terrorism. C-TPAT is a voluntary public-private partnership between the
government and the trade industry.
DHS Department of Homeland Security is the Federal Government
department established to provide the unifying core for the vast national
network of organizations and institutions involved in efforts to secure the
U.S.
Direct Import Business Partners produce product overseas and Target takes
possession of the product overseas. Target is responsible for the
movement and clearance of the product once it reaches the United
States.
International Supply Chain Assets Protection team with the responsibility for Target’s Supply Chain
Security Team Security Initiatives.
High Priority Countries Sourcing countries with a particular security risk. This list changes
throughout the year and is business confidential information.
Importer of Record Name of company responsible for making Customs entry of
merchandise. Customs considers this party responsible for payment of
duties and the truthfulness of all information submitted.
Indirect Import/Domestic Importer Product is produced overseas and Target takes possession of the
product on a domestic basis within the U.S.
Letter of Agreement (LOA) Agreement with vendor to participate in TGT C-TPAT program
Security Factory Evaluation A set of questions to help Target and CBP assess the level of security at
each factory.
Status: Factory Security • Open – The factory importer of record question is answered “yes”,
Evaluation Status (Factory Level) or not a single question on the Factory Security Evaluation has been
answered.
• Not Applicable – The factory importer of record question was
answered “no” and therefore Target’s C-TPAT program does not
apply to this factory.
• Incomplete – The factory importer of record question is answered
“yes”, but as not provided responses to all questions on the Factory
Security Evaluation.
• Satisfactory- The factory has completed the Factory Security
Evaluation and received a satisfactory or passing score.

• Non-satisfactory – The factory has completed the Factory Security
Evaluation and received a non-satisfactory or failing score.
• Pending Audit Review – The factory/vendor modified the non-
satisfactory Factory Security Evaluation in order to become
satisfactory. This status will remain until Target verifies that the
security modifications are fully functional, at which time the factory
will be considered satisfactory.
• Non-Compliant – The factory has failed the C-TPAT Security Audit
Review Process.
• Not Required - BP-Certified – This status is achieved when the
Business Partner that uses this factory is C-TPAT certified in their
own C-TPAT program with the U.S. Customs and Border Protection
and enters the certification information into the Business Partner
Management System.
Status: C-TPAT Status (Business • Inactive – The business partner has not been invited to start the
Partner Level) Target C-TPAT process
• Incomplete – The business partner has started the Target C-TPAT
process, but has not completed all of the security requirements.
• Satisfactory – The business partner is compliant with all Target C-
TPAT security requirements
• Non-satisfactory – The business partner does not comply with all
Target C-TPAT security requirements.
• Pending Audit Review – The business partner has completed their
C-TPAT security requirements and at least one or more of their
factories are pending audit review.
• C-TPAT Certified – This status refers to a vendor who has been C-
TPAT certified by U.S. Bureau of Customs and Border Protection
and has entered their information into the BPM system.
Supply Chain Movement of product from the factory floor to store door.
Target Merchandise Merchandise produced for Target
Target Factory Audit Program Validation process for Target to determine the level of security at each
factory
Target Factory Compliance Program to ensure all vendor partners are meeting the visibility
Program requirements necessary in order for Target to remain C-TPAT compliant.
Terms of Sale Terms of sale for the factory. Terms of sale determine the state of the
goods upon delivery (location, loading, export paperwork, etc.).
Terms of Sale include:
- Ex-Works (EXW)
- Free Carrier (FCA)
- Freight On Board (FOB)
TSS (Target Sourcing Services) Retail service organization owned by Target Corporation that provides
operating services, trend/sales information and assists with Product
Development, Sourcing and Program Management on imported products
from AMC vendors; also known as Product Managers.

Toll Free Hotline Number
We have established a toll-free telephone number that is available for you 24 hours a day, 7
days a week.
This is to be used to report suspicious activity such as terrorist threats, attempted infiltration
of a person/weapon into the supply chain, and any media requests regarding our security
measures or the Target Corporation.
To reach this toll-free number, dial (011)704-556-7046

Frequently Asked Questions for C-TPAT
What is the Customs Trade Partnership Against Terrorism (C-TPAT)?

How does C-TPAT affect Target and our Business Partners?
My facility does not load containers, de we need to meet the container security section?
My facility is not able to store containers within the fence or what is the proper way to secure
unused containers?
Where do I locate the container 7 Point Inspection check list form?
Where do I locate the container Load Plan?
What does CFS mean?
My facility is on a floor other than the first floor of the building, do we need to surround the
building with a fence/physical barrier?
We received results from a Target security audit but we do not know when the audit took
place or what is our next step?
Will my facility be re-audited to see that the corrective actions have taken place?
My facility has made corrections to its security standards, what is our next step?
My facility has undergone a C-PTAT audit conducted by a third party resulting in our facility
meeting C-TPAT standards and we have received a certification number. Where do we
enter this certification number or how does Target capture this 3rd party C-TPAT audit?
Where do I locate the Facility Security Evaluation?
What do I do with my Facility Security Evaluations?
What do I do if I have been C-TPAT Certified and Validated by the U.S. government?
Do I still need to complete the C-TPAT information in BPM if I’m in the process of being
CTPAT Certified and Validated by the U.S. Government?
Who do I contact for more information?
What is the Customs Trade Partnership Against Terrorism (C-TPAT)?

• U.S. Bureau of Customs and Border Protection (CBP) and key importers developed
CTPAT in 2002 to secure the supply chain from the threat of terrorism.
• C-TPAT is a voluntary public-private partnership between the government and the trade
industry.
• In exchange for implementing greater supply chain security processes, companies
receive benefits in the form of fewer container security exams.
• The goal is to have all business partners participate in the C-TPAT initiative,
implementing improved security practices within the supply chain from facility floor to
store floor.
How does C-TPAT affect Target and our Business Partners?
• Target must work together with our business partners to ensure the continued
strengthening of our supply chain reducing the possibility of terrorist infiltration.
• Target must also maintain a high level of compliance with the CBP and C-TPAT
requirements.
My facility does not load containers, de we need to meet the container security
section?
• Yes, the facility must have procedures on how to handle loading containers/trailers.
Product must be secured with a locking device prior to transit, therefore requiring the
mode of transportation to be enclosed.
My facility is not able to store containers within the fence or what is the proper way to
secure unused containers?

• Containers/trailers not in use must be secured with a locking device until loading occurs.
Where do I locate the container 7 Point Inspection check list form?
• Log on to www.partnersonline.com
o Navigate to Guidelines & Info
o Select Requirements & Procedures
o Under the Legal/Compliance heading
o Select Customs-Trade Partnership Against Terrorism (C-TPAT)
o Select Container Security
o Select ctpat_seven_point_inspection
Where do I locate the container Load Plan?
o Navigate to Guidelines & Info
o Select Requirements & Procedures
o Under the Legal/Compliance heading
o Select Customs-Trade Partnership Against Terrorism (C-TPAT)
o Select Container Security
o Select Load_Plan
What does CFS mean?
• A Container Freight Station, or CFS, is a consolidator where multiple facilities send their
finished products. The products are then placed into a container and prepared for export.
My facility is on a floor other than the first floor of the building, do we need to
surround the building with a fence/physical barrier?
• All facilities are to have a physical barrier surrounding the cargo and handling area. If
this is not physically possible or not possible due to property ownership, you must have
heightened access controls in place. Examples are video surveillance, extra guard
service, and access badges. Feel free to contact us to make recommendations, since
there are many different options to take.
We received results from a Target security audit but we do not know when the audit
took place or what is our next step?
• Our short security audit is completed by TCPS QA Inspectors during production
(DUPRO/FRI) audits.
• Our medium security audit is incorporated into the Factory Evaluation and is completed
by Manufacturing Technicians. Global Compliance auditors are also completing during
their Global Compliance factory audits.
• Next step, send a corrective action plan to
InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com.
• If you feel the facility is meeting our security standards, send the actual procedure or
take pictures of the thing corrected. The International Supply Chain Security team will
review and decide whether the facility is meeting our security standards.
Will my facility be re-audited to see that the corrective actions have taken place?
• We do not schedule re-audits, but this does not mean the facility will not receive another
security audit since our security audits are attached with other types of audits.
take pictures of the thing corrected to InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com.
The International Supply Chain Security team will review and decide whether the facility
is meeting our security standards.
My facility has made corrections to its security standards, what is our next step?

take pictures of the thing corrected to InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com.
The International Supply Chain Security team will review and decide whether the facility
is meeting our security standards.
My facility has undergone a C-PTAT audit conducted by a third party resulting in our
facility meeting C-TPAT standards and we have received a certification number.
Where do we enter this certification number or how does Target capture this 3rd party
C-TPAT audit?
• Target does not recognize 3rd party C-TPAT audits. Please do not enter the certification
number into our system since it is not a valid U.S. Customs and Border Protection
certification number.
• You are required to complete the Facility Security Evaluation for Target’s C-TPAT
program.
Where do I locate the Facility Security Evaluation?
o Select ‘My Account’
o Select ‘Business Partner Management’
o Select ‘Profile Assessment’
▪ Select ‘Facility’
▪ Select ‘Add Facility’
▪ Fill out the facility information and answer the questions that proceed
▪ Answer questions on the factory security evaluation if applicable (a few pages in)
▪ Review the Corrective Action Plan if applicable
▪ Proceed to the end to complete all updates.
▪ Repeat if necessary
o C-TPAT – Review Letter from Senior Management and the Letter of Agreement
What do I do with my Facility Security Evaluations?
• All facilities will need to complete an online (electronic) Facility Security Evaluation in
BPM. The electronic Facility Security Evaluation will automatically be part of the facility’s
Profile Assessment.
What do I do if I have been C-TPAT Certified and Validated by the U.S. government?
• If you are participating in the U.S. Customs and Border Protection’s C-TPAT program
and have received an SVI, you will enter your SVI as part of the Profile Assessment’s
General Business Information. Note: You can also find a link to enter this number on the
My Company Profile’s C-TPAT tab.
Do I still need to complete the C-TPAT information in BPM if I’m in the process of
being CTPAT Certified and Validated by the U.S. Government?
• Yes. If you have not yet received your SVI, then you need to complete the C-TPAT
information in BPM. You must enter this information so that your facilities can produce,
store and/or transit products for Target while you are waiting for your U.S. government
SVI.
• Once you receive your SVI, go to the My Company Profile’s C-TPAT tab and use the link
there to enter your SVI.
Who do I contact for more information?
• Please contact International Supply Chain Security at
InternationalSupplyChain.Security@Target.com.

COLOR
Color 1 of 8
© 2008 Target. These materials are for the sole use of designated employees and business partners of Target.
Reproduction, electronic transmission, third party use or other disclosure is strictly forbidden.
COLOR
Overview
Color accuracy and consistency in our stores is important to Target’s overall success as
a retailer. If you are a factory that is managing the Color process on behalf of the
vendor, this document will explain why it is important to understand Target color
specifications and requirements, in order to deliver consistently color-accurate product.
Proper color execution from our mills/factories is crucial to our Target Guest Experience
because our guests base many of their purchase decisions on color:
• What color palette is used

• The quality of the coloring
• Overall product color coordination in the assortment
Proper color execution in these areas conveys Product Quality!
Table of Contents
1. Understanding and Matching color to Archroma Standard (s)
2. Color Submit Process
3. Lighting Requirements
4. Understanding Color Results
Objectives
• Understand the Color Approval Process.
• Know which color standard to match.
• Know the color matching criteria.
Resources
• Archroma Website: www.myarchroma.com
• Target Color Office in Minneapolis: Coloroffice.tgt@target.com
• POL Color Approval Process: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures
> Hardlines or Softlines Product Development > Color Approval Process
• POL Multicolor Submit Requirements: Product Development > Requirements &
Procedures > Hardlines or Softlines Product Development > Color Approval Process
> Submit Requirements for Multicolor Submit
Note: If you do not have access to Partners Online, ensure your vendor has provided
you with the information on POL regarding the Color Approval Process.
Note: Mill/Factory staff and other facility making any color decision must know and
comprehend this information.
Color 2 of 8
1. Understanding and Matching Color to Archroma Standard
• The Archroma Standard is provided by the vendor to the factory

o The Archroma Standard is a set of digital color data that represents the exact
color we want the product to be.
o Archroma makes a physical dyeing that is helpful for visual reference. (It may not
be an exact match to the digital data)
o The data printed on the back of the standard is the same data that is in the
“Finger Print” of the color computer file. If you are using a spectrophotometer to
evaluate color, DO NOT use info that is different than this.
Example: Archroma Textile Standard and Data File (fingerprint)
• All color submits (labdips) and bulk production must match the Archroma standard.
• Making the Final Production Color:
o Approved labdip represents one, not all, acceptable production lots
o Approved labdip must not be used as the production standard
Note: Only the Archroma Color Standard should be used as the color production
standard. If Archroma standard cannot be matched during pre-production color
approval, a “Best Can Do” (BCD) color approval may be granted by the Target Global
Color Office. This exception then becomes the color production standard.
• Dyehouse/Factory should receive One ENTIRE Archroma Color Standard for each
color from the vendor.
Note: DO NOT CUT THE ARCHROMA STANDARD - The whole standard is required
because it includes the digital data and contact info for Archroma. The size of the
swatch is optimized for visual evaluation. Archroma has cotton dye formulas for all
standards and most other fibers also.
Color 3 of 8
2. Color Submit Processes
Single Best Color Submit Process for Solid colored textiles
• Vendor/Factory is responsible to match Target’s digital color specification

• Vendor/Factory and mill may produce as many labdips as necessary until an
acceptable production match is created.
• Vendor/Factory is responsible to only submit one single color that would meet
Target’s color approval specifications.
• Vendor/Factory will pre-screen all their mills’/factories labdips, and reject all
unacceptable lab dips.
• Attach only one sample to a Target Solid Color Submit Form and send to proper
Target Regional Color Office.
• Add the word “Best” followed with labdip name in “Labdip ID” field
o Example: Best – B13805.
o Put temperature, and relative humidity of submit if vendor or dyemill
made its own color measurements in “Comments Field”
o Example: Daeshin – 22C/50% RH
• Single Best Submit Color Process applies to:

o Solid colored textile products using Archroma standards
o Softlines and Soft Home Solid Colors
o Only flat surface or lightly textured textiles
Some examples include: Interlock, Jersey, Rib, Pointelle, Ottoman, Pique,
Drop Needle, French Terry, Flatback Rib, Woven Plainweave, Twill
• Single Best Submit Color Process does NOT apply to:

o Raised surfaces, highly textured, transparent or shiny fabrics.
Some examples include: Thermal, Velour, Terry, Microfleece, Polar
Fleece, Chenille, Corduroy, Satin Fabric, Transparent Mesh, Shiny
Fabric (ex. Dazzle)
Note: These fabrics cannot be approved digitally by Regional Color Offices (RCO).
Please send 4 color submits/labdips to Target Global Color Office (GCO) for approval.
Color Submit Process for Solid Color Plastic
• Vendor/Factory contacts National Plastic Color, Inc. (NPC) to request a color match
with resin type, color name, and timing information. If resin is usable with a pre-
approved color, NPC gives vendor/factory a valid “color number”
• Vendor/Factory submits an email of the Solid Color Submit Form to Target Global
Color Office using that NPC color number as the submit ID. No chip is required.
• Vendor/Factory emails NPC a copy of the same completed Target solid color submit
form.
• Target Global Color Office issues a digital approval by email to vendor.
Note: Vendor/Factory must have a Target specified light box and match under Target
specified light sources to ensure good visual matches. Please register your light box on
www.targetcompliance.com.
Color 4 of 8
• To evaluate the color submit, all required information required on the form:
o Vendor type and name
o Dyehouse ID
o PID or DPCI
o Material type
o Labdip ID
o Brand
o Set Date
o Division
o Department #
o Fabric construction
o Fiber content
o Dyestuffs in use, etc.
o Correct e-mail address for results
Multi-Color Submit Process
Vendor will notify mill/factory of requirements

• The entire strike-off is reviewed for print lay-out, registration, and color
placement by the designer
• Each separate color in the product is listed and receives its own comments
from Color Analyst
Example Multi Color Evaluation Submit Form
• There are specific instructions to complete this form. Please make sure you refer to
them and complete the form properly.
• For prints, please include drawdowns or strikeoffs on page 2 of Multicolor Submit
form
• For yarn dyed multicolors, please be sure to submit individual yarn skeins on page 2
of Multicolor Submit form
Color 5 of 8
Note: If you need to submit for a print or plaids, then you would use the multi color
submit form as shown above. This form is also available on POL: Product Development
> Requirements & Procedures > Hardlines or Softlines Product Development > Color
Approval Process > Submit Requirements for Multicolor Submit
3. Lighting Requirements
Requirements for Light Boxes
• Target approved light sources are:

o Primary light (Ultralume 3000)
o Secondary light (D65 Daylight)
• All Vendors/Factories directly involved in either color matching or color match
evaluation must use an approved Light Box that is current in calibration.
• Target recommends the GretagMacbeth Spectralight III Light Box.
o Target and GretagMacbeth have created a website: (www.targetcompliance.com
– password: gretagmacbeth)
o The website allows Target Vendors/Factories to purchase this Light Box, (or a
bundled Light Box/service agreement), at a significant discount.
o Vendors and factories are encouraged to purchase maintenance services with
the Light Box manufacturer. This provides annual certification by manufacturer
for proper operation.
o Lamp replacements are included and managed annually by manufacturer.
o All parties must register themselves and their Light Boxes at the compliance
website (www.targetcompliance.com – pwd gretagmacbeth).
Complete registration process in the link entitled “Register Your Products.”
At the bottom left of the main page or targetcompliace.com website is a link
titled “Register your Products”, located under the registration header. This is
where you will complete the registration process.
Registration will be monitored to ensure fulfillment of this Vendor/factory
obligation.
• Factories may use their existing Light Box only if it is adjusted to meet the Target
standards. This is checked for in the TCPS Factory Evaluations.
Evaluating Colors Under the Light Box
• Select the approved light source according to the Target’s requirements. Work with
our Color Specialists if you have questions.
• The sample and the color standard must be placed inside the Light Box and:
o Aligned side by side touching each other.
o Be in the same direction, with regard to weave, knit and textile, if applicable.
• This will allow for the best visual review of the colors in both the daylight and store
light.
• Factories should report the color difference between production sample and color
standard.
o Terms used to describe the hue (color) difference are: Too Yellow, Too Blue,
Too Green, Too Red
o Terms used to describe the lightness difference are: Too Light or Too Dark
Color 6 of 8
o Terms used to describe the chromatic difference are: Too Bright or Too Dull
• Observe the color difference under primary light and report the difference.
• Change the light source to secondary light, observe the color difference and report
the difference.
• Target uses the following Illuminants for Instrumental evaluation of color submits.
o Primary – UL3000-10 PHL (NIST-defined file available from Datacolor
International).
o Secondary – CIE D65/10 Degree (Internationally recognized
illuminant/observer file defined by the CIE).
o Third – Incan A/10 Degree (This 3rd illuminant should always be considered
when matching Target color).
Note: Target strongly recommends each vendor/factory purchase a light box with both
UL3000 (store lighting) and D65 (daylight) Target recommends XRite Spectralight III
light box with the above lights to preview the submits before sending to the Target color
office.
• The following conditions should be standard for Target color approval process to
ensure consistency in color approvals:
o Opaque Materials
Angle of Illumination - 45°
Angle of view - 0°
Color of Surround – Munsell N7 Grey
o Translucent/Transparent
Angle of Illumination - 45°
Angle of view - 0°
Color of Backing – White or the same backing as specified by design
Color of Surround – Munsell N7 Grey
o Instrumental Measurement
Color Space – CIE L*a*b*
Color Difference Equation – CMC (l:c 2:1)
o Color Approval Tolerances
For labdips, the following numbers determine a color Pass or Rejection:
Illuminant Lab-Dip
UL3000 Submit ≤ 0.8∆ECMC
≤ 0.5∆H
D65 Submit ≤ 1.2∆ECMC
≤ 0.8∆H
o Instrument Set Up
Specular Component Included
UV Excluded – 400nm cut-off
Large/Medium Area View
Note: Target currently uses X-Rite i7 spectrophotometers for color measurement and
only applies the tolerances stated above when reading same surfaces. Target will accept
benchtop spectrophotometers from Datacolor, Minolta, and X-Rite as instruments with
which to evaluate color difference and formulate color match recipes.
Color 7 of 8
4. Understanding Color Results
• There are 3 components of color: Lightness, Chroma and Hue.

o Lightness: The differences from light to dark. How light or
dark a color is, is based on how close it is to white.
o Chroma: The intensity of color. How dull or bright a color
will appear. Chroma refers to how pure a hue is. High means
there is no white or black.
o Hue: Classifications of Red, Yellow, Green, and Blue.
Different hues are caused by different wavelengths. Variations in hue
from standard to sample are expected to be very slight.
Note: Target Color Analysts make comments based on these three components of color.
• Color submissions are analyzed by Target and feedback is given:

o All results are pdf files that are e-mailed to the Vendor and copied to mill/factory
• Level of service is 24-48 hrs upon receipt of color submits
• When color submit is APPROVED:
o Labdip color approval process is complete.
o File the approval in your Standard Inspection Package (SIP).
• If color submit FAILS:
o Determine why it failed by reviewing Analyst’s comments.
o Mill/factory must follow Analyst’s correction comments and re-submit As Soon As
Possible.
Note: Do not re-submit before comments are received.
o If Color Analyst requests additional information, mill/factory must provide it.

o Analyst may recommend that mill/factory work directly with regional third-party
color technical representative (Clariant, Huntsman, Dyestar).
Color 8 of 8
SAMPLE
REQUIREMENTS
AND FIT PROCESS
SOFTLINES
Sample Requirements and Fit Process – Softlines 1 of 29

SAMPLE REQUIREMENTS AND FIT PROCESS - SOFTLINES
Overview
This training document includes an overview of the product development stages and
contents of a packet for easy identification. The purpose and function of important sections
of the packet, like materials & finishes, artwork and specification measurement is
explained. The document also outlines the purpose and function of the vendor packet tool
and lists the various requirements for sample submissions.
Table of Contents
1. Sample Request Packet Contents – related to fit
2. Sample Stages
3. Sample Requirements
4. Vendor Packet
Objectives
• Understand the Target Sample Request Information
• Understand Target’s Fit Process, Standards, and Requirements
Resources
• Sample Requirements and Fit Process Softlines – Vendor Training
• Measurement manual - This is a manual which outlines the method of measure for
each point of measurement. POL: Product Development > Requirements &
Procedures > Softlines Product Development > Method of Measure

1. Sample Request Packet Contents
Target must review samples as part of our development and sourcing process.
• Sample information is located in Target’s Product Lifecycle Management (PLM)

system on Partners Online > POL: Product Development>Product Lifecycle
Management (PLM)
• To access new PLM packets, click ‘New Packets’ under ‘My Work’ in PLM.
o New packets will show up on everyone’s list until someone ‘accepts’ the
packet. Once the packet is accepted, it disappears from this list and can only
be found through a search.
The person accepting the packet should also be the person to receive
evaluations, as evaluation notices are only located within the ‘My Work
list’ of that person.
Example of PLM Worklist Page
• Target expects business partners to review all details in the Sample Request Packet.
• Business Partner is responsible to communicate all relevant details in a packet to the
sample making factory to ensure an approvable sample.
• Sample Request Packet includes:
1. Sketch
2. Materials and Finishes
3. Trim
4. Artwork
5. Impressions
6. Specification Measurements
7. Construction
8. Sloper & Grade

1. Sketch - Detailed sketches illustrating Target’s vision for a garment
Note: Proportion and construction details

2. Materials and Finishes - Information includes yarn for sweaters and more
Note: Fabrication details and finishing requirements

3. Trim - Information includes supplier codes and more
Note – Trim details and supplier information

4. Artwork – Information includes dimensions/pattern, placement directions, etc
Note: Artwork designs that are part of a garment
5. Impressions – include color placement for each component, along with set date listed
for each.

6. Specification Measurements – Includes key measurements for core sample size.

7. Construction - Includes construction information can be located in the ‘Sketch
Assets’ as a technical sketch
Note: Visual communication of construction details
• Construction information also located in ‘Assembly and Construction’ (technical

construction, expression of fit, and more)
Note: Written communication of construction details

Note: If Expression of fit (look and feel of garment) is not located within the
‘Assembly and Construction’ tab, it will be located within the ‘Technical Assets’ tab

8. Sloper & Grade – Includes graded sloper pattern which can be downloaded from
POL to properly execute the sample.
Note: Grading rules for all sizes are included on each sloper

Note: Sloper pages can be downloaded directly from POL. A visual guide of the sloper
including critical measurements of the sloper sample, sketch, photos, mini marker, x/y
grade coordinates, and grade notes is located on POL:
POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Product >
Development > Sloper Pattern Library

2. Sample Stages
There are three stages in the Sample Process:

• Development
• Prototype
• Production
Development
• A Development Sample is the first opportunity for the designer to see their idea
expressed/created in physical garment form.
o It is often not the final version.
o All samples submitted must be approvable for fit.
o The packet can be accessed in PLM under ‘New Packets’
Example of Development Packet
• One of the following decisions is made regarding the Development Sample:

o Sample is dropped from consideration.
o The Designer’s original idea is modified (fabrication, trim, styling), and
changes are built into the Prototype packet.
o Sample moves directly to Prototype Stage.

Prototype
• The Prototype Sample allows the Business Partner to demonstrate their ability to
make the garment as requested, at the cost the Business Partner provided.
o When the Development Sample moves into Prototype stage, PLM is updated to
reflect the new stage.
o All samples submitted must be approvable for fit.
o The packet can be accessed in PLM under ‘New Packets’
o During the prototype stage a fit evaluation is performed on the Prototype Sample.
Example of Prototype Packet
• Comments and/or attachments for Business Partner lists changes from

development, located in the Technical tab.
Example of Comment Section located in the technical tab

• The Prototype Sample Evaluation determines if the fit, balance, construction, and
‘Garment Vendor Sourced TD’ trims of the sample are approvable according to Target
Standards.
o To access PLM evaluations, click on ‘My Work list’ under ‘My Work’ in PLM (an
email notification will not be sent)
The person who accepted the original development or prototype
packet is the person who will receive the evaluation notification in their
‘My Work list’.
• Click on link to view status of evaluation:

o Approved
o Approved Pending Change (approved with updates per prototype evaluation in
PLM).
o Failed (sample does not meet Target requirements and must be resubmitted).
Example of Approved Pending Changes Evaluation Overview

• Fit Evaluations from Target include:
o Digital images
o Measurement evaluation
o Construction evaluation
o Written comments (on digital images and comments).
Digital images
Measurement evaluation

Construction evaluation
Written Comments

o Review the measurements and deviations. Based on requested changes and
deviations, make necessary corrections:
Business Partner: Submitted

Garment measurements
(measured by Business Partner)
Update core: Revised spec
measurement
Eval: Submitted Garment
Core: Requested Size spec measurements
(measured by Target)
Requested Size: if
evaluating a non-core size
o Target expects that all submitted samples are approvable for fit.
o If a Prototype Sample fails for fit, extra measures are taken which include any of
the following:
Business Partner travels to Target Headquarters or to Regional Fitting
Approval Location for training.
Conduct Sample process evaluation.
Conduct Web meeting.
Target Technical Designer, Regional Approving Fit Engineer, or accredited
Business Partner Fit Engineer will perform the required 2nd Prototype
evaluation.
o Re-submit Prototype samples must be created from the 1st prototype
sample pattern, incorporating all corrections noted from the sample
evaluation.
Note: Sample failures may jeopardize meeting the product timing and action which
may negatively impact your future business!

Production
• When the Core Size(s) Prototype Sample is Approved or Approved Pending Change
(APC), the Target Technical Designer, Regional Approving Fit Engineer, or accredited
Business Partner Fit Engineer issues a Production Packet.
• The packet can be accessed in PLM under ‘New Packets’
• The Business Partner must grade the approved core size sample pattern to all
remaining sizes for Production. Use the Target approved grade rules and Grading
Best Methods provided with the sloper pattern on POL.
Example of Production Packet
Note: The Business Partner is responsible to communicate all relevant details in a

packet to the sample making factory to ensure an approvable sample.

3. Sample Requirements
Due Date
• Samples must be received at Target by due date (timing varies by
calendar). The due date for your samples can be found in your
PLM packet.
Example of Due Date for Garment Request in a Prototype Packet
o Construction Standards
All samples must meet or exceed Minimum Construction Standards.
Safety, Minimum construction standards, Stripe-Plaid Match Guidelines, and
Interlining Procedures are located on POL:
POL: Product Development > Requirements and Procedures > Softlines Product
Development > Construction Standards

Sample Tag
• All samples must have a fully completed Target sample tag attached to the sample.
• List the location where the sample was made, sample room name and country of
origin.
Sample tag placement, instructions and a downloadable PDF file are located on
POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Product
Development > Owned Brand Process > Sample Tag Information

Example of downloadable Sample Tag
NOTE: List the

location where the
sample was made,
(Sample room
name, Country of
Origin).

• Development samples are to be made of actual or similar fabric.
• Prototype samples must be made of production quality fabric and wash/finish.
Example of Back Side of Sample Tag
NOTE: If Development sample is

made of similar fabric or wash/finish:
• Mark the sample tag with the
fabric or wash/finish of the
submitted sample.
• Attach a production quality
swatch and information to the
sample tag.

• If, due to timing, you must submit a sample that is not approvable for fit, mark the
sample tag clearly “Not for Fit.” It is the Business Partner’s responsibility to quickly
follow-up with a fittable sample. This should only happen in exception cases.

Mannequin
• It is a Target requirement that all Business Partners purchase the approved Target
mannequins for all necessary core size(s).
Information on How to order Approved Target Mannequins is located on POL: Product

Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Product Development >
Certified Mannequins/Core Body Charts
• Samples submitted must:

o Be pre-fit on the approved Target mannequin and be approvable
o Execute the desired Proportion/Expression of Fit
o Be within tolerance of the spec requested
o Execute the requested construction
o Include requested ‘Garment Vendor Sourced TD’ trims
o Have digital photos taken by Business Partner
Examples of samples pre-fit on Target Approved Mannequins
PID 213620, Development Sample
Reviewed by xxxxxx (BP name)

(May add comments, if necessary)

Key attribute of fit that will be evaluated: Balance – Tops
Key attribute of fit that will be evaluated: Balance – Bottoms

Key attribute of fit that will be evaluated: Correct Pattern Shapes
Key attribute of fit that will be evaluated: Indications of Restricted Body Movement
• Pre-fit your sample checking for: Garment cut off grain

Key attribute of fit that will be evaluated: Garment cut off grain
o Evaluation from Business Partner includes:

Measurement/Construction evaluation entered in PLM
o Digital photos of submitted sample of front/side/back view taken, saved as
a Power Point, and uploaded into PLM
4. Vendor Packet
• Vendor Packet is a tool used for programs in which the Business Partners design all or
parts of the garment for Target.
Detailed instructions for vendor packet process are located on POL: Product
Development > Requirements and Procedures > Softlines Product Development >
Vendor Packet > Helpful Hints > Vendor Packet PLM Process
Sample Evaluation
• The Target fit evaluation and production specification will also be recorded in the
Vendor Packet format.
• To access Vendor Packet Evaluations, click on ‘New Packets’ under ‘My Worklist’ in
PLM. The New Packet includes the Evaluation.

Global Resources
• Assistance with Samples

o Target has dedicated Trainers worldwide who are there to demonstrate and
instruct the Business Partner on the fit process and sample requirements.
Hong Kong (also covers Taiwan and Shanghai)
Korea (also covers Thailand, Bangladesh, India, Singapore, and Indonesia)
Guatemala (also covers Central America)
United States
• Target has Approving Fit Engineers worldwide who provide assistance to business
partners.
• Regional Approving Fit Engineers (can pre-screen garments, approve garments and
assist vendors):
o Korea
o Hong Kong
o Taiwan
o India-New Delhi
o Thailand
o Singapore
o Guatemala
o China-Shanghai
Partners Online contains contact information for Target Offices worldwide, POL: Product
Development > Requirements and Procedures > Softlines Product Development >
Communication Contacts

FABRIC
DEVELOPMENT
Fabric 1 of 5
FABRIC
Cut and Sew Factories Only (Not Mills)
Overview
Fit, Shrinkage and Durability are the key attributes that influence the buying decision of a
Target guest/customer. In order to ensure that you are consistently meeting Target’s
expectations on quality, it is important to understand Target’s Fabric Standards and
Testing Process. Additionally, you are responsible for the washing process applied to the
product and it is important to understand the performance and testing standards for
garment wet and dry processing.
Table of Contents
1. Fabric Standards
2. Fabric Testing Requirements
3. Fabric Development Testing Requirements
4. Garment Wet & Dry Processes
a. Expectations
b. Testing
Objectives
• Review Target’s fabric testing expectations for cut and sew factories
• Understand Target’s fabric standards and requirements for cut and sew factories
• Understand Target’s garment wet and dry processing expectations for cut and sew
factories
Resources
• Question Contacts
o TSS Vendors/Factories - Fabric Sourcing Regional Team
o Non-TSS Vendors/Factories - SLPDD.Process@Target.com
o General Inquiries - Fabic.standards@target.com
Wash Development Process found on POL: Product Development > Wash

Development Process
Fabric Standards are available on POL: Product Development > Requirements and
Procedures > Softlines Quality Assurance > Adult or Children’s Apparel > Product
Testing > Fabric Performance Standards for Mills & Garment Performance Standards.
Requirements for wash development samples available on POL: Product Development

> Wash Development Process > Simple Silhouettes
Fabric 2 of 5
1. Fabric Standards
• Target’s Fabric Standards for fabric quality and performance are important because:
o Fit, Durability, and Appearance are the key parameters Target’s guests look for
when they buy garments from a Target store.
o It is essential that its suppliers meet Target’s fabric quality standards consistently
in order to meet and exceed guest expectations.
• The key fabric performance criteria are provided on POL by fiber content and
construction and are very important standards to meet:
o Fabric Dimensional Stability (Shrinkage) – All fabric types
o Strength (Tensile/Tear) – Woven fabrics
o Strength (Burst) – Knit fabrics
o Skewing (or Torque) of the fabric after wash – Mainly Knit fabric types
o Visual appearance (Pilling) of the fabric after wash – All fabric types
Fabric Standards are available on POL: Product Development > Requirements and
Procedures > Softlines Quality Assurance > Adult or Children’s Apparel > Product
Testing > Fabric Performance Standards for Mills & Garment Performance Standards.
Note: Target expects all its Vendors/Factories and their Raw Material Suppliers to be
aware of Target’s Fabric Standards and quality expectations while developing/sourcing
fabric and to begin testing during development with their internal labs.
o Refer to the Softlines Manual online to verify the standard for the fabric being
developed.
o Include all testing information in PLM when submitting their fabrics.
2. Fabric Testing Requirements
• Testing Criteria being used for Target Programs:

o Dimensional Stability (Fabric Shrinkage and/or Growth) (LxW)
(AATCC135)
o Appearance After Care (CPSD-SL-31055 Mod)
o Pilling ( ASTM D3512 Visual after 3 Home Launderings)
o Skewness ( AATCC 179)
o Bursting Strength ( ASTM D3786)
o Tensile & Tear Strength
o Stretch and Recovery (ASTM D2594 Fabrics with Spandex Only)
o Flammability for Light Weight fabric (Title 16 CFR 1610)
o Flammability for Children’s sleepwear fabric (Title 16 CFR 1615)
o Colorfastness Properties ( All tests that apply)
o Formaldehyde (CPSD-AN-00018)
o PH Value ( AATCC 81)
o Fiber Content ( AATCC 20/20A)
o Fabric Construction ( ASTM 3887)
o Weight (ASTM 3776)
Note: Additional testing will be required for fabrics with performance attributes/finishes
(e.g. Stain Repellency, Wrinkle Resistance, Moisture Management etc.).
Fabric 3 of 5
Examples of why it is important that fabrics are tested before cutting begins:
Shrinkage
Size 8 – Before washing
Shrinkage
Size 8 – After washing
Skew (caused by improper knitting/finishing process)
Fabric 4 of 5
3. Fabric Development Testing Requirements
• Fabric Development Testing:

o A pre-requisite for fabric approval at Target.
o Needs to be conducted for all new fabrics submitted to Target for consideration.
All information regarding the physical performance properties should be included in
PLM development packet received from vendor.
o Requires that a third party testing lab verifies the construction and performance
characteristics of all fabric samples submitted to Target.
o A way to collect important information regarding the fabric counter sample.
o Ensures that all products being presented to design will perform to Target’s fabric
performance standards.
4. Garment Wet & Dry Process
• Wash development requests are communicated via PLM development packet in the
form of:
o Generic Wash Recipe – request based on standardized wash recipe applied to a
fabric requirement.
o Target Reference Formula - a request for wash & finish development applied to a
fabric specification; this can be based on a Digital Photo, Inspiration Sample or a
Design Concept. Target Reference Formula is a recommended reference recipe to
achieve the effect as close as possible to the design vision.
• Requirements for wash development samples:
o If the request is received without a garment packet, Vendor/Factory prepares 4
sets of Simple Silhouettes / Leg panels per wash for the wash trials.
o If the request is received in a garment packet, Vendor/Factory prepares 4 sets of
garments for the primary wash.
o Additional wash options received in a garment packet are prepared in the form of
Simple Silhouettes. ( 4 sets)
Information found on POL: Product Development > Wash Development Process >
Simple Silhouettes
• Key steps that a vendor/factory performs upon receipt of a wash development

request
o Vendor/Factory conducts wash trials with Target Generic Wash Recipe or Target
Reference Formula
o Vendor/Factory submits one set of wash submits to the Regional Office and two
sets to the Target Headquarters.
o Vendor/Factory receives wash approval or reject notification from Target.
o Vendor/Factory performs internal testing on approved washes (Wash Development
Test Form is available on POL)
o If the wash development does not meet Target Standards, TSS vendors are
expected to consult with the Regional Office and Non-TSS Vendors should consult
with Target Headquarters to ensure that the wash can be modified to pass testing
without compromising the aesthetic.
Fabric 5 of 5
TRIMS
SOFTLINES
Trims 1 of 6
TRIMS - SOFTLINES
Overview
This information will help explain the difference between Target Sourced Trims and
Garment Vendor Sourced Trims and what the process is for both procedures. It will
also explain the differences between labels and Department/Class/Item (DPCI) labels.
Table of Contents
1. Trim Definitions
2. Target Sourced Trim Process
3. Garment Vendor Sourced Trim Process
4. Label Requirements
Objectives
• Understand Target’s definition of a Trim
• Understand the differences between Target Sourced Trim and Garment Vendor
Sourced Trim processes
• Understand where to find Trims label placement information
Resources
• Question Contacts:
o Trim Development and General Trim Questions - Trim.development@target.com
o Trim Quality issues or Trim Matrix Questions - Trim.standards@target.com
Trims 2 of 6
1. Trim Definition
• Trim includes any item permanently affixed to a garment. Trims are “sewn” into
garments and are not removed after point of sale.
• Permanently affixed trims include trims that are “sewn onto” the garment such as
main brand labels, care labels, zippers, zipper pulls, hardware and buttons. These
could also include appliqués, embroideries, laces, ribbons, or patches.
• Execution of a trim is completed through only one of two options, Target Sourced
trims or Garment Vendor Sourced trims.
• What are branded trims?
o Branded trims are any trim items that contain a copyright brand on the trim item.
All branded trims receive a Target code. Branded trims are always Target
Sourced and would include main brand labels, zippers, zipper pulls, and logo
buttons.
2. Target Sourced Trim Processes
• Target Sourced Branded Trim Process

Target’s design team or marketing/creative team will initiate the creation of a trim in
order to meet specific garment needs. Target Sourced will be noted on the Trim
Asset page located within the PLM Packet.
1. The trim items are assigned a Target code.
Branded trim development is put into work by the Softlines Trim team and is
developed with an approved matrix supplier.
The Vendor/Factory does not have the option of sourcing from their own
supplier and could result in a trim non-compliance chargeback.
2. The Trim Development team will develop the color, quality and initial pricing
standards for all branded trims.
3. The Trim Development team will release branded trim items to approved supplier
matrix.
Trim Development must be coordinated with the Softlines calendar.
If trim timing is an issue, the trim development team, along with Target
Standards team may give initial development and first production order to an
approved matrix supplier.
After the initial timing issue is resolved, the branded trim item will then be
released to the balance of the approved matrix suppliers.
When developing a trim, the cost for the trim item is “price tested” with the
approved trim suppliers.
The Vendor/Factory is responsible for negotiation of the trim costs with the
approved trim supplier upon ordering their trims.
Trims 3 of 6
Example of Target Sourced Trim Asset Found in PLM Packet
• Target Sourced Non-Branded Trim Process

The Trim Development team will research and develop non-branded trim items that
have limited availability, limited supplier base, non - branded original development, or
is the same trim across multiple garment vendors-dual sourced.
1. Preferred non-branded items will be developed based on color, quality and initial
price testing.
These items must be purchased from the original matrix supplier in order to
maintain the same quality.
The Vendor/Factory does not have the option of sourcing from their own
supplier and could result in a trim non-compliance chargeback.
2. Trim Development must be coordinated with the Softlines calendar.
3. When developing a trim, the cost for the trim item is “price tested” with the
approved trim suppliers.
The Vendor/Factory is responsible for negotiation of the trim costs with the
approved trim supplier upon ordering their trims.
If after trim price has been negotiated directly with the supplier and a pricing
challenge still exists, the Vendor/Factory is responsible to alert either Target
Headquarters Trim Team (DI) or Hong Kong Fabric and Trim Team (TSS) of
the pricing challenge.
• Target’s Sourced Softlines Trim Responsibilities
o Vendor/Factory is responsible for working directly with the authorized matrix
supplier and for managing all requirements for ordering trims including:
Purchase of all Target sourced trims-both branded and “select” non branded
Estimates
Meeting schedules for delivery dates
Negotiating trim price for bulk production
Trim color approval
Trims 4 of 6
• Target’s Sourced Softlines Trim Supplier Matrix Information
o An authorized matrix (list) of suppliers that have been approved by Target to
produce trims for Target Sourced trims. For Softlines, these are the ONLY
suppliers that trims will be accepted from.
o Vendors are required to supply the factory with Target Sourced trims-both
branded and non branded “select” trims that are purchased from the authorized
matrix suppliers.
Use any one of the suppliers on the appropriate, authorized supplier matrix.
List of suppliers is found on POL: Guidelines & Info > Requirements & Procedures >
Product Packaging > Packaging and Trim requirements > Packaging Quality Assurance
> Softlines Matrix Suppliers
3. Garment Vendor Sourced Trim Process
Vendor/Factory has the ability to source trims through their own suppliers when it states
“Garment Vendor Sourced” on the Trim Asset page located within the PLM Packet.
• Garment Vendor Sourced suppliers must meet trim quality standards. These
requirements are posted on POL under the trim standards section.
• Approvals are required when no supplier options are given or Garment Vendor
chooses to not use one of the listed suppliers.
o Trim is approved through Target Development Manager/Development
coordinator in pre-commit stage.
o Trim is approved through TSS BA post pre-commit stage.
o For Garment Vendor Sourced TD Asset only, Trims must be approved in
garment form by the Target Technical Designer
Example of Garment Vendor Sourced Trim Asset Found in PLM Packet
Trims 5 of 6
4. Label Requirements
• Label Placement and DPCI Label

o The PLM packet will include a visual image that shows correct label placement.
• Trim Labels
o Care labels, size labels, and country of origin labels will be assigned a Target
code. Vendor will receive this code information with the costing packet.
o These labels must be purchased from the approved Branded Main Label Matrix
supplier that supplies the main label.
o All label information will be provided in the PLM packet, which should be
provided to the factory by the vendor. This includes the main label, care label
and/or country of origin label information.
• DPCI Label Requirements:
o The DPCI is vendor managed and does not have to be ordered from an
approved matrix main label supplier.
o The DPCI is required for all Target Softlines owned brand products.
o The DPCI is a white ground with black letters.
o The DPCI must be smaller than the label it goes underneath (label cannot show
from underneath the other labels).
o The layout is four rows listing out the DPCI as follows:
Dept number: # # #
Class number: # #
Item number: # # # #
Factory ID number: # # # # # # # #
o Factory identification number
Factory ID needs to be included on the DPCI label.
Factory ID is not the same as the vendor ID.
Factory ID is found within the BPM system (If you do have access to POL,
ask your vendor to provide this information).
This factory ID information can be found on POL: My Account > Business Partner
Management > Click the next button on the confidentiality page > Click the yes button if
the initial validation page is displaying the correct GMS vendor information > My
Company Profile > Brand and Compliance > Factory Group ID (is where you will find the
factory number)
Trims 6 of 6
SAMPLE
REQUIREMENTS
HARDLINES/
SOFT HOME
Sample Requirements- Hardline/ Soft Home 1 of 8

SAMPLE REQUIREMENTS – HARDLINES/SOFTHOME
Overview
This information will help you understand your role when submitting samples per
Target’s Sample Requirement process. Included are examples of the required sample
attachments and where to locate the templates on Partners Online (POL).
The Quick Reference Guide is an overview that can be posted within your factory to help
you easily understand the differences between the Red, Yellow and Green Seal
processes. The guide will also help Vendor/Factory understand the critical timing and the
sample retention (length of time required to keep each sample) requirements.
Table of Contents
1. Sample Submission and Approval Process
2. Sample Attachment Examples
3. Sample Seal Quick Reference Guide
Objectives
• Understand the Target sample submission process for red, yellow and green seal
approval(s)
• Know which sample attachment (e.g. hangtags, stickers, etc.) to use and where to
find template information
Resources
• POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development > Material
Development Process > Forms Index
• POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development > Sample Submission
Process Hardlines > Hardlines Sample Management Process Training Presentation
• POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development > Sample
Submission Process Hardlines > Sample Seal Quick Reference Guide

1. Sample Submission and Approval Process
HQ Request HQ Review HQ Send

Sample from Sample in Feedback to
Business CFTM Business
Partner Partner
HQ Request
revised
sample from Business Partner Award
Business
Partner, if HQ approves RED TCPS (During HQ receives
needed SEAL sample or PPR) or Non-TSS YELLOW SEAL
Business Partner Sample
components for
approves yellow approved for
Pre-Production seal sample Production,
Exception Only
HQ requests &
Receives
GREEN SEAL
Production
Sample,
Exception Only
2. Sample Attachment Examples
Vendor completes appropriate sample attachment from POL as required for any
samples being sent to HQ and overseas. This includes: Hangtag, Sticker or Mini
Sticker.
• POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development > Material
Development Process > Forms Index
• POL: Product Development / Requirements & Procedures / Hardliners Product
Development / Sample Submission Process

Hangtags
• Download the template and copies must be printed on card stock.
• You can not use basic paper.
• Use the preferred supplier, SML, to print the sample tags
• Use appropriate sized hangtag for product
Example: Hangtag used for textiles, furniture, luggage
Stickers
• Use appropriate sized sticker for product
Example: Sticker used for Hard Goods (lamps, dinnerware)
Example: Mini Sticker used on extremely small items (ornaments)

Forms
• Must be attached to the product
• All samples require an attached Materials Development Form (MDF) or Fabric
Development Form (FDF)
Example FDF: Used for Fabric Development
Example MDF: Used for Material Development

4. Sample Seal Quick Reference Guide
Sample Seal Quick Reference

Signature/
Responsible for
Sample Seal Definition Sample Requirements Approval Timing Seal Approval Sample Submission Process Retention
Reviewing
on Sample
TSS: Total of 2 samples:

● Approval needs to be given TSS: TSS: ● 1 submitted to HQ for
for all components of the • Buyer • Buyer approval
product • Designer ● 1 submitted simultaneously to
● Approval can be given in • Technical Local MR with side-by-side
sample form or by • Fabric photos
component • DDT ● MR responsible for indicating
● Approval only needs to be approval on Business Partner
given on one colorway sample and returning to
● Elements that need to be Business Partner
approved (when applicable):
Approved no later than 3
● Aesthetics Non-TSS: Non-TSS: Non-TSS: Total of 2 samples: HQ:
weeks after Program ● 2 submitted to HQ and signed
Sample or all ● Technical Specifications • Buyer • Buyer For the life of the
Award
Red Seal components approved ● Materials • Designer for approval program *
for pre-production with ● Trims • Technical ● 1 approved sample returned to
Approval Exceptions: The CFT Business Partner
awarded Business ● Print/Pattern • Fabric All Business
needs to verify due dates
Partner. ● Finish • DDT Partners:
against production timing
● Shade Bands 2 years after last
ship date
Note: No changes can be
requested after Red Seal External Design Programs:
Approval without consequence ● 1 additional sample is sent to
HQ
Other minimum requirements of ● HQ sends sample to External
the product at this stage: Designer
● Color: Visually Correct
● Packaging: Mock-Up
TSS: TSS: TSS: Total of 2 samples:

• TCPS (Field) • TCPS (Field) ● 1 approved sample submitted
Pre-Production to HQ for reference
Sample with ● 1 retained in SIP by
● All sample requirements are
production Business Partner
met or exceeded as
components.
compared to the Red Seal HQ:
Sample approved for Non-TSS: Total of 2 samples:
● All sample requirements Non-TSS: Non-TSS: For the life of the
Production. ● 1 sample submitted
Yellow Seal meet Technical Specification At Pre-Production Meeting • Business • N/A program *
(3-10 days prior to Partner to HQ for reference
Sample If the Red Seal ● 1 sample retained by
production start) Refers to the All Business
Approval is a sample Business Partner
Other minimum requirements of reference Partners:
with all production
the product at this stage: sample sent to 2 years after last
components, that
● Color: Lab Dip/Color Submit HQ. Non-TSS External Design Programs: ship date
sample can become
Approved Business ● 1 additional sample is sent to
the Yellow Seal
● Packaging: Mock-Up Partners will HQ
Sample
not apply a ● HQ sends sample to External
yellow seal to Designer
the Pre-
Production Sample:
If requested, TCPS TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: Total of 2 samples:
● All sample requirements are
pulls sample at Dupro ● TCPS pulls samples at • TCPS (Field) • TCPS (Field) ● 1 approved sample submitted HQ:
met or exceeded as
** Dupro • Buyer to HQ for reference For the life of the
compared to Red and Yellow
Seal Samples ● Green Seal Sample • Designer ● 1 retained by Business Partner program *
When to request: must be • Technical from Dupro or Final Inspection
● All sample requirements
1) New Business
Green Seal meet Technical Specification requested before • Fabric
Partner production • DDT TSS/QAI
Sample 2) New Product start Business
Other minimum requirements for
Category Partners:
the product at this stage:
3) Quality Concerns 2 years after last
● Color: Correct
with Red/Yellow Non-TSS: Non-TSS: Non-TSS: ship date
● Packaging: Final Non-TSS:
4) Multi-Sourced • N/A • N/A ● N/A
● N/A
Program
* Once samples have been approved at multiple stages (Red, Yellow and Green), Target has the discretion to only retain the most recently sealed sample.
** Green Seal Approval occurs in TCPS inspected factories when the Buyer or PM requests TCPS to approve the Production Sample. Headquarters may request final Production Samples to be
pulled by TSS or Non-TSS Business Partners for reference. Production Samples that are not pulled by TCPS are referred to as Production Samples, not Green Seal Samples.
If product is multi-sourced, each factory of production must submit a Red, Yellow and Green Seal Sample.
Note: See next page for exceptions for Towels

POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development > Sample Submission Process
Hardlines > Sample Seal Quick Reference Guide
Signature/Seal
Responsible for
Sample Seal Definition Sample Requirements Approval Timing Approval on Sample Submission Process Retention
Reviewing
Sample
TSS:
• Buyer • Responsible for
• Designer revewing &
• Technical providing
• Fabric feedback: TSS: Total of 3 samples:
• Print Designer Buyer, • 3 sets of samples submitted to HQ for
Designer, Tech approval (Bath, Hand, Wash, Mat) in a
Designer and light, medium, and dark color from each
Fabric Engineer factory.
• Red Seal will be applied to all 3 sets
Non-TSS: using a red zip tie with serial number. All
• Buyer pieces of the set will be tied together with
• Designer • Final Arbiter zip seal. There will be three full sets of
• Technical and Signature: product of each color when completed.
• Fabric Buyer, TSS: Total of 3 samples:
● Approval needs to be given • Print Designer Reivewed by: • Red Seal approval and approved serial
for all components of the Tech Designer or numbers will be logged through
product Fabric Engineer Grovesite by Technical Designer in
● Approval can be given in Grovesite discussion threads.
sample form or by • 2 sets of samples that have been Red
component Sealed and recorded in Grovesite will be
● Approval needs to be given sent by TSS PC to TSS local office
in light, medium, and dark • MR will retain 1 set of samples for
colorway record in TSS local office and sent 1 set
● Elements that need to be of samples to vendor factory for
approved (when applicable): reference.
Sample or all components ● Aesthetics HL - Approved no later • The Red Seal sample is valid for one HQ:
approved for pre-production with ● HL - Technical than 3 weeks after factory only. Life of program
awarded Business Partner. Specifications Program Award HL - Technical
Red Seal Approval This process has been ● Materials Retains
established for replenished towel ● Trims Exceptions: The CFT
programs that have multiple ● Print/Pattern needs to verify due dates
colorways of the same ● Finish against production timing All Business
construction. ● Shade Bands Partners:
Retained in SIP
Note: No changes can be Non-TSS: Total of 2 samples:
requested after Red Seal • 2 Samples of each piece (Bath, Hand,
Approval without Wash, Mat) in a light, medium, and dark
consequence color for each factory of production
• The red seal will be applied to both sets
Other minimum requirements of using a red zip tie with a serial number.
the product at this stage: All pieces of the set will be tied together.
● Color: Visually Correct There will be two full sets when
● Packaging: Mock-Up completed.
• The red seal approval will be
communicated and serial numbers will
be logged through Grovesite by
Technical Designer.
• One set of samples will be returned to
the Business Partner by Technical team.
• Red seal sample is valid for one factory
only.
External Design Programs (TOB,

Shabby, Waverly, Sammy):
● 1 additional sample is sent to
HQ
● HQ sends sample to External
Designer
TSS
• Buyer
• Designer
● Approval needs to be given
• Technical
for all components of the
• Fabric
product
● Approval needs to be given
in light, medium, and dark No signature
colorway needed or
● Elements that need to be retained. TSS
HQ: TSS retains one
Towels ONLY - Before pre-production can begin, approved (when applicable): Product Manager Vendor submits one casepack of each
Reviewed in Minneapolis full set of program in
vendor must complete color- ● Aesthetics will communicate light, medium, and dark color of program
prior to Pre-Production light, medium, and
Mini Bulk correct 'mini-bulk' run in light, ● HL - Technical feedback of mini- and sends to TSS Minneapolis team to
meeting. dark color for life of
medium, and dark colorway Specifications bulk review to review with CFT group.
program
● Materials TSS local office,
● Print/Pattern TSS regional
office, and TCPS
Other minimum requirements of
the product at this stage:
● Color: Correct color
● Packaging: Mock up
EXCEPTION ONLY
TSS: TSS: TSS: Total of 3 sets of samples:
• TCPS (Field) • TCPS (Field) ● 1 full sets of light, medium, and dark
• MR approved sample submitted
to HQ for reference and comment
through Grovesite discussion threads
EXCEPTION ONLY ● 1 retained in SIP by
● All sample requirements are Non-TSS:
met or exceeded as • Business Non-TSS: Business Partner and 1 full set
retained at TSS overseas office HQ:
compared to the Red Seal Partner • N/A
Pre-Production Sample with TSS retains one full
and Mini Bulk
production components. set of program in light,
● All sample requirements Refers to the Non-TSS: Total of 2 samples:
Sample approved for Production At Pre-Production Meeting medium, and dark
meet Technical Specification reference ● 1 sample submitted
Yellow Seal Sample with comments submitted by (3-10 days prior to color for the life of the
sample sent to to HQ for reference
TSS Minneapolis. production start) program *
HQ. Non-TSS ● 1 sample retained by
Other minimum requirements of Business Business Partner
If the Red Seal Approval is a All Business
the product at this stage: Partners will not
sample with all production Partners:
● Color: Lab Dip/Color Submit apply a yellow
components, that sample can Retained in SIP
Approved seal to the Pre-
become the Yellow Seal Sample External Design Programs:
● Packaging: Mock-Up Production
● 1 additional sample is sent to
sample at the
HQ
factory.
● HQ sends sample to External
Designer
** Green Seal Approval occurs in TCPS inspected factories when the Buyer or PM requests TCPS to approve the Production Sample. Headquarters may request final Production Samples to be pulled by TSS or Non-TSS Business Partners for reference. Production Samples that
are not pulled by TCPS are referred to as Production Samples, not Green Seal Samples.

Signature/Seal
Responsible for
Sample Seal Definition Sample Requirements Approval Timing Approval on Sample Submission Process Retention
Reviewing
Sample
TSS/QAI:
● Inspection Sample - A sample ● All sample requirements are • TCPS (Field)
TCPS pulls from production to met or exceeded as
approve for shipment compared to Red and Yellow
● Shipment Sample - Represent Seal Samples
All Business
items selected from actual ● All sample requirements Non-TSS:
Partners:
Shipment Sample production to be refered in the meet Technical Specification • Business
N/A N/A One shipment sample
event of claims or issues that Partner
retained for 2 years
may arise at a later date Other minimum requirements
after the last ship date
● Final Production Sample - A for the product at this stage:
sample requested by ● Color: Correct
headquarters to be sent from ● Packaging: Final
final production
TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: TSS/QAI: Total of 2 samples:

● All sample requirements are ● TCPS pulls samples at • TCPS (Field) • TCPS (Field) ● 1 approved sample submitted HQ:
Production Sample:
met or exceeded as Dupro to HQ for reference For the life of the
If requested, TCPS pulls sample
compared to Red and Yellow ● Green Seal Sample ● 1 retained by Business Partner program *
at Dupro **
Seal Samples must be from Dupro or Final Inspection
● All sample requirements requested before
When to request:
meet Technical Specification production
Green Seal Sample 1) New Business Partner
2) New Product Category start
Other minimum requirements
3) Quality Concerns with
for the product at this stage:
Red/Yellow
● Color: Correct
4) Multi-Sourced Program Non-TSS: Non-TSS: Non-TSS:
● Packaging: Final Non-TSS:
• N/A • N/A ● N/A
● N/A
** Green Seal Approval occurs in TCPS inspected factories when the Buyer or PM requests TCPS to approve the Production Sample. Headquarters may request final Production Samples to be pulled by TSS or Non-TSS Business Partners for reference. Production Samples that
are not pulled by TCPS are referred to as Production Samples, not Green Seal Samples.
Exceptions for Towels Only

Red Seal Approval
• TSS Vendors
o Three sets of samples of each piece (Bath, Hand, Wash, Mat) are submitted to HQ for
approval in a light, medium, and dark color from each factory
o Red Seal will be applied to all 3 sets using a red zip tie with serial number
o All pieces of the set will be tied together with zip seal
o Two sets of samples that have been Red Sealed and recorded in Grovesite will be sent
by TSS HQ to TSS Local Office
o TSS Local Office MR will retain 1 set of samples for record in TSS Local Office and send
1 set of samples to the Vendor
o A Red Seal sample must be kept by each factory of production in the SIP
• Non-TSS Vendors
o Two sets of samples of each piece (Bath, Hand, Wash, Mat) are submitted to HQ for
approval in a light, medium, and dark color from each factory
o Red seal will be applied to both sets using a red zip tie with a serial number
o All pieces of the set will be tied together
o Red seal approval will be communicated and serial numbers will be logged through
Grovesite by the Technical Designer
o One set of samples will be returned to the vendor by Technical team
o A Red Seal sample must be kept by each factory of production in the SIP
Note: If an external designer is involved, an extra set of samples must be sent to HQ (e.g.
Waverly, Thomas O’Brian, etc).
Yellow Seal Approval
• TSS Vendors - One full set of light, medium, and dark approved samples submitted to TSS
HQ for reference and comment through Grovesite discussion threads. One set retained in
SIP by Factory and 1 full set retained at TSS Local Office
• Non-TSS Vendors - One sample submitted to HQ for reference and 1 sample retained by the
Vendor/Factory in the SIP
• Mini Bulk - Vendor submits one casepack of each light, medium, and dark color of the
program and sends to TSS HQ for review

PRODUCT
DESIGN AND
DEVELOPMENT
TECHNICAL –
HARDLINES/SOFT
HOME
PD&D Technical Hardgoods/Soft Home 1 of 23

TECHNICAL – HARDLINES/SOFT HOME
Overview
This information will provide you with the tools needed to read and understand the technical
(specification) information provided by your vendor in order to execute quality product for
Target.
Table of Contents
1. Vendor and Factory Roles and Responsibilities
2. Target Design Strategies (Product Objectives)
3. How to Read and Understand an Objective – Hardlines and Soft Home
4. Vendor Generated Specification
5. Product Standards - Hardlines and Soft Home
6. Manufacturing Tolerances - Hardlines
7. Measurement Tolerances – SoftHome only
8. Multiple Components - SoftHome only
9. Sample Evaluation - SoftHome only
Objectives
• How to read and understand an objective packet
• Understanding Target’s product expectations
• Being responsible for producing quality product for Target
Resources
• Vendor Generated Spec found on POL: Product Development > Requirements and
Procedures > Hardlines Product Development > Vendor Generated Specifications >
Templates by category will follow
• www.Grovesite.com
• Grovesite.help@Target.com – email assistance
• Question Contacts -
o Utilize information in Key Contact List as found in each online objective
o HLTechdev@target.com for questions on process or for Technical Designer information
o HLTrimdev@target.com for questions on process or for Trim Information
o HLFabric.dev@target.com for question on fabric process or for Fabric information

Vendor to Factory
• Understand Target specifications and standards

• Communicate with your Factory
• Provide specification information along with deadlines and other details
Factory
• Understand Target objectives, specifications and standards

• Provide open communication to Vendor and Target.
Note: You are the manufacturing expert. If you have recommendations on how to improve the
design or manufacturing techniques or have other options that do not change the quality provide
your ideas.
• Factory will supply sample to vendor

o Should communicate to the Vendor any ideas for improving the design idea or other
options that may be considered.
o Should communicate to Vendor any concerns with the product’s functionality or potential
mass-production issues.
o The development sample does not need to be color correct, but should be as close to
color correct as possible during initial and final sample reviews.
2. Target Design Strategies
• Vendor is responsible to share product objectives with their factories as appropriate
• Product Objectives vary based on Target’s Design Strategy:

o Internal Design – Target designs product and writes specifications.
o Design Assist – Vendor assists Target with design ideas and concepts for product.
o Vendor Design – Vendor designs product entirely.
Note: The timing of the objective (when it would be sent) and level of information will vary
based on the type of objective required and routed. The type of product objective received
depends on the Vendor’s Design capabilities.
Internal Design Objectives
• Used when the product is fully designed by Target or is a repeat product.

• Used when Target is writing the specification and has a clearly defined product.
• Target objective packet may include:
o Design
o Color
o Artwork (if applicable)
o Print weave (if applicable)
o Materials

o Color Separated File (if applicable)
o Trims
o Measurements
o Assembly and Construction
o Label placement
o Recommended Care
o Protocol information
• Make sure a sample tag is attached and filled out completely before submitting. You can
get sample tags from your vendor which are available on POL: Product Development >
Requirements & Procedures > Hardlines Product Development > Sample Submission
Process – Hardlines > Sample Label Templates
Note: The information available in each objective should enable the vendor to execute
sample/samples and advise vendor of Target’s business needs for the program.
• Vendor to provide factory with business needs of the program.
Design Assist Objectives
• May include Trend Boards, Brand Concept Boards, images of products that we feel relate to
the brand, color direction, print direction, and appropriate product standard to be following (if
established)
• Purpose is to communicate mood and inspiration.
• Objective Packet will include:
o Design page
o Color
o Materials (if specified)
o Reference to specific product standard on POL
• Factory may be asked to submit material/fabric samples, print strike-offs, product samples.
o Send raw material information, sample, and photo-quotes based on direction from
Buyers or TSS Product Managers.
o Submit a Material Development Form and two 20”x20” (50cm x 50cm) material swatches
with the product objectives.
Vendor Design
• Vendor designs product entirely

• Mood boards may be provided

3. How to Read and Understand an Objective – Hardlines and Soft Home
Objective Filename
• Target understands communication must be clear to ensure the vendor and Target are
referring to the same products, so Target has a numbering system used for all objectives.
This is the filename used within Grovesite.
Season/year
Brand
Department
Hardlines Area
Product Number
Objective pages
• The objectives are made up of a series of detail pages that are used by the Designers to
communicate inspiration or design information.
o The single Objective Packet may contain one or many pages depending on the level of
detail required to convey the sampling needs.
o Refer to your table of contents for exactly which detail pages will be in your objective.
Design Pages
• Design Detail Page (also called coded D) may include:

o Photos for Design Inspiration
o Line Art Sketches
o Product Feature Callouts
o Style Variation Options for Costing

Design & Product Objectives Pages
• Every page of the Objective Packet contains high-level information relevant to the program.
The level of detail will vary depending on the type and timing of the Objective. Each
objective will be labeled as follows:
1. Status of the packet:

Preliminary: identifies when packet is first issued.
Revision number: identifies a revision has been done and revision # of this packet.
Final Revised number: identifies a revision has been done to the Final packet and
the revision # of this final packet.
2. Product ID (as reviewed above).
3. Target Department number, Brand, and Collection (if this is applicable).
4. Set Date
5. Product Description
6. Product Category: internally used information in Target to group products.
7. Target Copyright: states that packet is property of Target and cannot be shared.
8. Template Owner: identifies appropriate person to contact for questions on a specific
page.
9. Template Page Information
o Title of the page
o Template Code
o Page number
1 2 3
4
5 6
7 8 9

Overview page (also coded page O) may include:
• Colors represented for the objective.

o All relevant colors for the program represented in the objectives packet. This will not
typically be the entire palette for the program as we are only providing color reference on
an as-need basis. Please understand that the color represented in the packet is not
accurate to standard and should NOT be used to match. Please contact Archroma to
order color standards for accurate representation of color.
• Key materials desired for the objective.
o May be communicated as a listing of all desired materials, specific photo images of like
materials or actual technical detail specific to a desired material. The representation will
depend on the type of packet you are receiving. Where actual materials are known, you
will get detail and specific information.
• Visual depiction of the product, if available. If not, then mood or trend inspiration will be
included.
o Internally Designed - There will be a full-color rendering of the product or products
represented by the packet if issued as a fully designed product.
o Design Assist - If the objective is being used to communicate the mood and inspiration
for a given collection, this spot may contain copies of trend boards or design photos. If
that packet is used for inspiration it is important to know that we are not requesting direct
interpretation of the items shown, but are showing them for the purposes of idea
generation. Our expectation would be that the vendors design team would draw on the
inspiration to design new and unique items for Target.
Example of Internally Designed Objective Page

Design page (also coded page D) may include:
• Provides inspiration and design inspiration
Example of a Design Assist Objective Page

General Information page (also coded G) may include:
• Table of contents identifies all pages and number of pages in the packet.
• Key contacts identify all Target team members associated with the program for the objective
packet.
• Change log identifies what page was revised, when it was revised, and who made the
revision.
Example of a General Information Page
Note: It is the vendor’s responsibility to check for any updates or changes upon receipt of the
email notification of a change.

Artwork Page (also coded page A) may include:
• Icon and Font Information

• Color Variations: Target could request a vendor to sample different colorways of a style.
• Graphic Information
• Embellishment or Special Design Treatment Information
Example of an Artwork Page

Patterns and Weaves Page (also coded page PW) may include:
• Details about a print including color or scale information.

• Woven fabrications for pattern weave information.
Note: Full-scale Computer Aided Design (CAD) color separation or weave simulation
information will be available on Grovesite.
Example of a Patterns and Weaves Page

Technical Detail Page (coded as page M) may include:
• Some objectives may include various technical detail pages that will outline specific
technical information about the product.
• Details on materials or substrates used in the design of the item.
• Various finishes to the product for sampling options.
Example of a Technical Detail Page

Trim Information Page (also coded page T) may include:
• Details on materials or materials used in the trim and/or embellishment of an item.
Example of a Trim Information Page

Measurements and Technical Drawing Page (also coded page MS) may include:
• Key measurements, details and placements for the item

• Detailed drawings from multiple angles to show 3-dimensional measurements
• Tolerance information for production
• Product Component information (if applicable)
Example of a Measurements and Technical Drawing Page

Construction Diagrams Page (also coded page C) may include:
• Specific detail that will aide in the assembly of the item.
Example of a Construction Diagrams Page

Label Information Page (also coded page L) may include:
• Placement for label or brand marking

• Recommend care instructions, if applicable
• Visual drawing or photograph of the label or brand marking
Example of a Label Information Page
• Target Owned Brand Labels must be ordered through one of Target Hardlines Authorized
Label Suppliers:
o Avery Dennison
o R-Pac
o Shore to Shore
o SML
POL: Additional information can be located on POL: Product Development/requirements &

procedures > Hardlines Product Development > HL Label Information > Hardlines Branded Trim
Suppliers

4. Vendor Generated Specification - applies only to the following categories:
• Grills, Outdoor furniture
• Table top, Furniture
• Luggage, Backpacks
• Bedding, Towels, Pillows, Soft Window, Table Linens
• Airbeds
If the objective is Design Assist or Vendor Design, the vendor needs to provide a Vendor
Generated Specification
• What is a Vendor Generated Specification?

o A Vendor Generated Specification is a specification that the vendor completes on a
Target provided template. Enables Target and business partners to have clear quality
expectations of the product.
o Templates are created by the Technical Development Team
o A Vendor Generated Specification can be used for Design Assist High, Design Assist
Low and Vendor Designed products
o Technical Design will validate the VGS in categories that have technical support
o If VGS is sent to the factory by the vendor it should be included in the SIP
• Why are we implementing Vendor Generated Specifications?

o Ensures the product that ships to Target is exactly the intended quality and design
o Ensures TCPS has a specification to audit against and audit is completed based on
Target/Vendor agreement
o Allows merchants to compare apples to apples in a negotiation event, or understand
quality differences that are driving cost differences
o Centralized location of templates on POL
5. Product Standards - Hardlines and Soft Home
The Technical Development Team has created Product Standards to be utilized by Business
Partners to communicate our quality expectations for Target owned brand product. We are
implementing these standards to ensure that you understand our quality expectations
throughout the lifecycle of the product. These guidelines will ensure that Target owned brand
products will deliver the quality and value our guests expect.
Note: Vendors are responsible to send the appropriate Product Standards to factories.
• Product Standards currently posted to POL:

o Soft Home- All categories
o HardGoods
Tabletop
Stationery
Lighting
Domestics/ Bath Furniture
Toys
Luggage
Pets

Patio
Automotive
This information is located on POL: Product Development > Hardlines Product Development >
Product Standards
Example of a Soft Home Product Standard

Example of a Hardgoods Product Standard
Created: 3/30/07
Hardlines-Product Standards-Tabletop
Any deviations to the requirements listed must be approved by the Target Technical Designer
Lacquered Foil Polypropylene Tabletop Accessories
● All products must pass lab testing for appropriate testing protocols, and follow Quality assurance audit processes
● Vendors should request advance copies of test protocols from BV. It is the vendor's responsibility to ensure that the products they sell to Target Corporation
comply with all United States federal, state and local laws, regulations and ordinances. A satisfactory lab test result does not constitute a certification that a
vendor's products meets all legal requirements. It is the vendor's responsibility to manufacture their items to comply with all applicable laws and industry
standards, and in conformance with the requirements found on Partners Online. Target reserves the right to amend its protocols at any time.
● All products must meet or exceed all applicable rules and regulations.
General Requirement
This Product Standard applies to all tabletop accessories using the Lacquered-Foil Polypropylene material/technique.
The lacquer coating and substrate must be constructed to withstand general ‘Tabletop Decorative Use’ and 'Hand Washing’ Only.
Good Better
Body Polypropylene with Calcium Carbonate
Glue Water-based (Lead Free)
Paint Lead Free Paint
Material Quality
Foil Copper, Aluminum, Zinc, or Composite
Lacquer Water-based PU (Polyurethane)
· ‘LEAD FREE’ is defined as meeting FDA regulation & passing Cal Prop 65 requirement for lead content.
· Minimum 3 Coats of Lacquer · Minimum 4 Coats of Lacquer
· Body Strength must pass a minimum 8 lb. force of ASTM Flex Test. · Body Strength must pass a minimum 13 lb. force of ASTM Flex Test.
· Surface Hardness must pass a minimum rating of 67 on the ASTM · Surface Hardness must pass a minimum rating of 73 on the ASTM Rockwell
Rockwell ‘Shore D’ Scale. ‘Shore D’ Scale.
· Surface Scratch Resistance must pass a minimum 60 grams of · Surface Scratch Resistance must pass a minimum 150 grams of weight in
Craftsmanship
weight in the BV Scribe Test. the BV Scribe Test.
· Body substrate should be injection molded. Injection mark must be sanded to a smooth finish. Rim edge should be rounded to allow adequate foil and
lacquer coverage.
· All Foil must adhere to and cover the body surface as designed.
· There should not be any chipping or flaking of Lacquer or foil where the body substrate is exposed.
Type Size Minimum Weight Type Size Minimum Weight

12.5” Dia - Round 13” Dia - Round
Charger 327g Charger 400g
11.5” x11.5” - Square 12” x12” - Square
Small Bowl 5” Dia. Per Design Small Bowl 5.25” Dia. Per Design
Measurements
Large Bowl 8.5” Dia Per Design Large Bowl 9” Dia Per Design
Tray Per Design Per Design Tray Per Design Per Design
· Size specifications represent 'MINIMUM' requirements. Actual capacity or weight are based on design direction and/or existing mold shapes.
· Use charger weight as a bench mark. (The rest of the pieces should be porportional.)
Copyright 2007 Target Corporation. This document and the contents within are the property of Target Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively "Target"). They are for the sole use of designated employees of
Target as well as certain authorized business partners and shall not be reproduced, disseminated, or disclosed in any form to any party whatsoever without the express written consent of Target.
6. Measurement Tolerances (Soft Home)
Below is an example of the Measurement Tolerances that have been established for Target’s
Soft Home products. The products you produce must measure within the tolerance of the
given measurements provided on the spec in order to ship to Target.
Note: Tolerances are found on the measurement page(s) (coded page MS) of a Target objective or
On a separate tab in the Vendor Generated Spec Template document

Measurement Protocol
TARGET CORP TEST PROTOCOL FOR
Product Measurement Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance for Multiple Set

Description Point for Product Crib/Children Component
Washed Variations
Styles
BEDDING
Pillow Case Woven Length/Width +/- 1” +3/4”/- ½”
or Knit
Pillowcase Set Length/Width **½”
Sham- Woven, Length/Width +/- 1” +1” /- 1 1/2”
Quilted or Knit
Overlap +1 1/2”/ -1/2” +1 1/2”/ -1/2”
Flange +/- 3/8” +/- 1/2”

Pillow Pockets on Length/Width **½”
Sham Sets
Flat Sheet- Twin or Length +4”/ -2” +4”/ -2”
Full-Woven or Knit
Width +3”/ -2” +3”/ -2”
Flat Sheet- Queen Length/Width +4”/ -2” +4”/ -2”
or King-Woven or
Knit
Fitted Sheet- Length- corner to +2”/ -1” +2”/ -1” +1”/- 1/2”
Woven or Knit corner
Width- corner to +2”/ -1” +2”/ -1” +1”/- 1/2”
corner
Pocket Depth +1”/ -1/2” +1”/ -1/2” +1/2”/ -0
Comforter Length/ Width +/- 2”
Duvet Cover- Length/ Width +/- 2”
Woven or Knit
Opening Point +2” / -1”
Note: Component Variation – all items within the set must measure within the listed
measurement variation of one another. This keeps the item within a set close in measurement.
7. Manufacturing Tolerances (Hardgoods)

Due to the wide variety of hardgoods products and the materials used manufacturing tolerances
for hardgoods are established by the factory, however it is expected that you provide Target
visibility to them upon request and when creating your Vendor Generated Spec.

8. Multiple Components (Soft Home only)
The grid below clarifies what the components are that make up the appropriate size sets.
9. Sample Evaluation (Soft Home)
• Target’s expectation is that before any sample is submitted to Target HQ for review, it is
evaluated against the specification or product standards (if no spec provided).
• Sample Evaluation must be attached to sample tag in order to be evaluated for soft home
product.
• Benefits of Sample Evaluation:
o Improves accuracy of first round samples
o Allows for communication of any deviations or options
o If providing options, include representative samples
• Vendor/Factory to evaluate sample prior to submission to Target. Samples should not be
sent to Target for evaluation if they are out of tolerance.

Enter product
measurements
and deviation
from spec
Enter
construction
deviations or
options next to
the technique
Methods of Measure
Found on POL: Product Development >Requirements and Procedures >Hardlines Product

Development >Methods of Measure
The Methods of Measurement Manual
In order to accurately and consistently evaluate the product, Target has established Methods of
Measure. It is expected that you follow these methods no matter if the product is designed
internally or through the assistance of the vendors.

This manual specifies the Target Corporation standard method of measurement used by Target
Corporation for all size ranges and categories of Softhome products. These methods provide a
tool for both Target and the Vendor/Factory to understand how we measure in order to evaluate
product consistently.
Exact descriptions for each point may not always work for every situation. In these cases, the
Technical Designer adds information to comment boxes for a particular point for which they
require additional description or clarification. Information in comment boxes overrides
descriptions of the measurement listed.
• Internally design products we will provide the measurement code on the measurement table
found on the MS page.
• Design Assist product provide the measurement code on the Vendor Generated
specification.
Example:

PACKAGING
Packaging 1 of 8
PACKAGING
Overview
Target packaging requirements are globally managed by the International Packaging
Management Group (IPMG) process and matrix of printers.
If you are a factory that is managing the packaging process on behalf of the vendor, this
will provide information about utilizing an IPMG and what your responsibility will be in the
packaging development process.
Table of Contents
1. International Packaging Management Group (IPMG) Overview
2. Packaging Development Process
Objectives
• Understand the importance of working closely with IPMG Resources
• Understand the packaging process needs at a factory level
Resources
• Question Contacts:
o Target Packaging Operations (TPO) at Packaging.Questions@Target.com
o IPMG Representatives
POL: Guidelines & Information > Requirements & Procedures > Product Packaging >
Target Packaging Process
Packaging 2 of 8
1. International Packaging Management Group (IPMG) Overview
• IPMG’s are a select group of Target approved globally integrated Packaging

Producers and Project managers.
• IPMG’s provide the following services:

o Global packaging development and production
o Expertise of Target specification guidelines for paper, ink and process
o Press checks
o Shipping logistics
o Inventory control
o Package engineering
o Material expertise
o Rapid prototyping
o Development of specifications
o Dielines
o Style guides
o Materials
IPMG Representatives - Hardlines
Packaging 3 of 8
IPMG Representatives – Softlines
IPMG Representatives - Vinyl Bags
Packaging 4 of 8
2. Packaging Development Process
Contact local IPMG Representatives
• IPMG’s are a valuable resource as you move through the Target Packaging process.
Contact the IPMG as early as possible.
Negotiate initial costs
• Listed below are suggestions for successfully working with and managing the
IPMG’s:
o Bid your packaging program with more than one IPMG provider.
Do not be satisfied with only one or two IPMG bids.
o Provide the IPMG with the completed Target Packaging Assortment Grid (PAG).
This will enable them to quickly create accurate packaging bids.
o Utilize your entire annual packaging volume to negotiate lower packaging prices.
IPMG’s are much more cost competitive when bidding on your entire
packaging volume.
Note: You may choose to include packaging for your other customers.
o Negotiate IPMG’s against each other to achieve your packaging goals.

If one IPMG provides better service and another provides better costs, drive
each IPMG to provide you with both service and price.
o Organize your packaging deliveries into reasonable and maximized order

quantities.
Packaging costs can be lowered when frequency of delivery is driven through
larger orders and fewer packaging production runs.
o Clearly define your factory fulfillment requirements and delivery locations.
o Clearly define and negotiate your goals for payment terms.
o Clearly define the period of time you expect the IPMG to guarantee packaging
costs.
Ensure they are tied to the length of time Target is asking you to guarantee
your product costs.
Packaging 5 of 8
Target Packaging Vendor/IPMG Production Agreement
• Ask your selected IPMG to provide you with a signed Target Packaging
Vendor/IPMG Production Agreement prior to packaging production.
o The Production Agreement is a Target form used to document that the IPMG and
product Vendor have agreed upon packaging costs, delivery times and delivery
quantities.
o Target retains visibility to these completed forms, and therefore is your insurance
policy to hold the IPMG accountable to your negotiated costs, delivery times and
quantities.
Example: Target Packaging Vendor/IPMG Production Agreement
Packaging 6 of 8
Create Dielines
• Work with IPMG to create the dieline

• Verify that your product fits properly in the IPMG provided package sample
• Sign-off on fit & trim package samples
Finalize Production Schedule and Production Agreement
Make sure to update and finalize packaging production details on the Vendor/IPMG
Production Agreement prior to the IPMG beginning package production.
• Often, total number of skus, production quantities, delivery timing, etc. change over
the course of developing dielines and package mockups with your selected IPMG.
• If problems arise, this is Target’s way of supporting what you’ve agreed to with your
selected IPMG.
Pre-Press Process
Note: The Pre-Press Process is managed by a separate matrix
• For Target Managed Programs, Target works directly with the designated prepress
suppliers to produce the Keyline.
• For Vendor Managed Programs, the vendor works with designated prepress matrix
suppliers to produce the Keyline.
• The Keyline is a file showing how the dieline will look with artwork applied to it. It is
identical to a dieline but includes all of the artwork. This is also referred to as a layout
or layout proof.
• Benefits of having a Keyline/Pre-Press matrix is to support:
o Packaging consistency for all items from the vendor
o Packaging quality that enhances the product image
Example: Final released Keyline to IPMG for printing
Packaging 7 of 8
IPMG Representatives – PrePress/Keyline
Writing Purchase Orders to IPMG’s
• You must provide the order to the IPMG with 14 days notice prior to production start.
o This enables the IPMG to source raw materials, schedule press time and make
sure Keyline files are accurate.
o Standard packaging production Level of Service is14 days from receipt of PO,
correct dieline and prepress files.
Validate Packaging
• Check delivered packaging for product fit and trim within 48 hours of shipment
receipt.
o Pull samples randomly and verify dieline and package fit to product.
o Notify the IPMG immediately if fit or trim issues are identified.
Packaging 8 of 8
FACTORY
EVALUATION
Factory Evaluation 1 of 12
FACTORY EVALUATION
Overview
A Factory Evaluation assesses the factory’s ability to meet Target’s requirements and
expectations.
Annually Target requires that all Target Sourcing Services (TSS) and Quality Assurance
Initiative (QAI) factories are evaluated for compliance with Target standards. TCPS may
conduct more frequent evaluations, when determined to be necessary. These
evaluations are conducted by Target Compliance and Production Services (TCPS) field
team.
Notes:
• Factory Evaluations are conducted per factory location, not Vendor/Factory
relationship.
• At TCPS discretion, Factory Evaluations may be done by a Target Approved
External Business Partner.
Table of Contents
1. Factory Evaluation Purpose
2. Preparing for a Factory Evaluation
3. Factory Evaluation Components
4. Factory Evaluation Process
5. Recommended Factory Testing Equipment, Capabilities and Processes
Objectives
• Understand Target’s Factory Evaluation process and why it is important
• Know when to do a Factory Self Evaluation
• Know expectations of the Factory Evaluation Corrective Action Plan (CAP)
• Know the equipment and processes that should be used for testing products
Resources
POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Quality Assurance
(Softlines or Hardgoods) > Factory Evaluation/Business Partner Management (BPM)
1. Purpose of the Factory Evaluation
• Validate quality & manufacturing processes according to Target’s standards and

requirements, and if applicable, provide an agenda for improvement action with
follow-up by TCPS.
• Document capabilities and capacities to be used as a tool to determine proper order

placement decisions. This includes:
o Quality Capabilities – what are the documented quality programs and how are
they being used at the factory?
o Product Capabilities – what are the product types and materials used?
o Production Capabilities – what type of equipment is used to produce the product?
o Capacity Capabilities – what percent of the factory including equipment and
workers are fully utilized and what percent is available for more production.
• Factory Evaluation results and corrective action plans will be shared with all Vendors
that have the factory listed as a Factory Partner in BPM will be copied.
2. Preparing for a Factory Evaluation
The documents listed below need to be gathered by the factory prior to the TCPS
Factory Evaluation. The evaluator will review all documents while completing the factory
evaluation. Preparing these documents prior to the Factory Evaluation will allow for an
efficient Factory Evaluation.
Factory Documents for Evaluator Review Purpose Only:
• Completed Factory Self-Evaluation

• Quality Assurance Manual Document
• Quality Assurance Inspection Reports
o Incoming Materials
o In-Process Materials
o Packing
o Final Inspection Reports from last 2 months
• Major Machine List
• Machine Maintenance (including Preventive Maintenance) Schedule and Records
• Product Specification, if applicable
• Raw Material Incoming and Outgoing Records
• Employee Training Program and Record
• Pre-Production Meeting Process and Record
• Suppliers Approval Process, Record, Material Specification and Purchase Order
• In-House Lab Test Manual and Report
• Defect Statistical Report and Shipping Document from last 2 months
• Factory Organization Chart
• Factory Business License
• Observed Quality Level (OQL) measurement
• Delivery Performance Record
• Metal Detection Records, for applicable products
3. Factory Evaluation Components
• Overview Information
o Factory General Information
o Evaluation Date
o Factory Contact Information
o Factory Capabilities
o Key Factory Personnel
• Factory Information
o Vendor Information
o Major Customers
o Employee Information and Expertise
o Number of Employees
• Capabilities
Hardgoods Softhome / Softlines
o Product Types Produced o Factory Processes
o Other Materials Used o Subcontractors
o Factory Processes o Product Capacities
o Finishing Processes o Embroidery Equipment
o Sample Lead Times o Laundry Equipment
o Outsourced or Subcontracted o Printing Equipment
Factories o Sewing Equipment
o Internal Testing o Other Specialized Equipment
o Product Capabilities
o Material Capabilities
• Document and Process Controls
o Process & Quality Controls
o Quality System – ensure controls in place to control non-conforming products.
o Document Control
o Performance Measures
• Training
o Training
o Quality Systems
o Equipment
• Evaluation
Hardgoods Softhome / Softlines
o Inspection Area o Inspection Area
o Materials Management o Materials Management
o Laboratory o Laboratory
o Sample Development o Sample Development
o Sewing/Production Area o Sewing/Production Area
o Packaging/Finishing o Packaging/Finishing
o Tools/Maintenance o Tools/Maintenance
o C-TPAT o C-TPAT
o Global Compliance o Global Compliance
o Metal Detection
o Patterns/Markers – Softlines Only
o Spreading/Cutting
o Screenprint/Embroidery
o Laundry and Pressing
• Score Summary for all section – Driven by TCPS Only
• Corrective Action Plan Details – Driven by TCPS Only
4. Factory Evaluation Process
• At least annually, based on the anniversary date of the previous evaluation unless
decided otherwise, Target requires that all facilities manufacturing owned brand
product are evaluated for compliance with Target standards. These evaluations are
conducted by TCPS field team or approved External Business Partners. The
evaluation standards are based on existing regulatory standards where applicable
and industry best practices.
Note: TCPS may conduct more frequent evaluations, when determined to be necessary.
• Factory Evaluation Scoring has changed, TCPS will inform the factory of its FE
score.
Example: Factory Evaluation Scores
Grade Score
Green 90-100
Green 80-89
Yellow 70-79
Yellow 60-69
Red 0-59
• Certain questions within the Factory Evaluation process will Auto Fail the evaluation.
Questions that will auto fail an evaluation drive fundamental quality expectations
related to safety and consistent quality execution such as:
o Appropriate machinery to produce the products
o Adequate needle detection and policy
o Specific QA processes
o Record keeping
o US Safety and Regulatory requirements
Note: All auto fail issues will have a Corrective Action Plan (CAP)
• TCPS will provide a Corrective Action Plan (CAP), if applicable, to key factory
personnel (empowered to make change). The factory must review and act upon the
corrective and preventative improvement actions listed in order to reduce the risk of
shipping bad product, missing delivery dates, improper record keeping, etc. TCPS
will follow-up with factory on assigned due dates to ensure improvements and
corrective actions are being completed.
• The CAP includes:
o Issue – Description of the problem or issue identified for correction
o Action - TCPS will list specific corrective action for each issue and include
recommendations for prevention
Note: When items are corrected, it should be a permanent fix that can be controlled and
measured to ensure the same issues do not surface in the future.
Example: Factory Evaluation Corrective Action Plan (CAP)
5. Recommended Factory Testing Equipment, Capabilities and Processes
; = indicates Critical Testing Equipment or Process needed
Target recommends that Vendor/Factories should have the ability to monitor product
quality through the manufacturing lifecycle. The equipment/capabilities and processes
listed below are general directions to enable you to monitor product quality. Other
equipment or processes may be required depending on product type. Contact your
Field TCPS offices if you need further assistance in determining what equipment would
be beneficial to your business.
Product Recommended Testing Equipment, Capabilities and Processes

Candles Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Candle Burning Life Test
• Tip Resistance
• Light Box with UL 3000 Light Source
Processes
• Demonstrate people have been tested for color vision
• Drop Test (Packaged Product)
; Procedure to ensure lead free solder (California PROP 65)
; Procedure to ensure product meets US lead content requirement
Ceramics Testing Equipment/Capabilities

; Thermal Expansion
• Moisture Resistance / Absorption
• Base Durability
• Impact Durability
• Shrinkage (wet / dry)
• Crazing
• Chemical Resistance (FDA extractives for lead and cadmium)
• Chip / Scratch Resistance
• Extreme Temperature
• Leak Test
• Rockwell Hardness Test
Processes
; Procedure to ensure meets US extraction of interior Cadmium &
Lead requirement
; Procedure to ensure product meets US lead content requirements
; Procedure to ensure product meets CA Prop 65 requirements
; Demonstrate people have been tested for color vision
Cosmetics Testing Equipment/Capabilities
• Chemical / physical / analytical testing (pH, Solids, actives,
viscosity, etc)
• Microbiology laboratory
Processes
• 3rd party GMP Audit and CAPA (less than 1 year old)
• GMP Training of staff
• Lot control and tracking of raw materials and finished goods
• Recall Program
Electronics Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Impact Durability
; Tip Resistance
; Strain Relief
; Hi Pot Test
; Voltage Test
; Performance Test
; Drop Test (Packaged Product)
; Multi-meters
• Line Testing
• Power Consumption Test
• Insulation Test
• Operation Testing
Processes
Food Testing Equipment/Capabilities
• Microbiology (Yeats/mold/salmonella, etc.)

• Nutrition Analysis/Nutrition Label Verification
• Chemical/Physical/Analytical Testing pH, Viscosity, % solids, & ash,
etc.
• Finished Product Metal Detection
Processes
• Sensory evaluation (taste, mouth feel, texture, appearance)
• HACCP Plan & Process Document
• 3rd party Food Safety Audit (less than 1 year old) with CAPA
• GMP (Good Manufacturing Practices) Program
• Sanitation Program
• Pest Control Program
• Microbiological environmental monitoring
• Glass / Brittle Plastic Policy
• Allergen Control
• Product traceability & Recall Program
Furniture Metal Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Corrosion Resistance
; Micron Test – surface coating testing
; Water PH Test – only if plating and anodizing capabilities
; Plating Chemical Depletion Test – only if plating and anodizing
capabilities
; Adhesion Test – only if capable of painting
; Tilt Test
; Impact Test
; Moisture Content Test on Wood - only if using wood
; Pull Test on Components / Legs
; Static Loading Test
• Stain Resistance
Processes
Furniture Wood Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Lacquer Build/Thickness/Gloss Tests
; Glue Joint Test
; Tilt Test
; Impact Test
; Moisture Content Test on Wood
; Pull Test on Components / Legs
; Static Loading Test
; Stain Resistance
Processes
; Drying Room
Glass Testing Equipment/Capabilities

• Tip Resistance
• Thermal Shock Test
Processes
Luggage Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Lifetest on Rollers, Handles, Zippers
; Seam Strength Test
; Metal Detection (Needle Policy)
; Water Proofing
• Colorfastness to Light, Crocking, etc.
• Flammability Testing
Processes
Metal Testing Equipment/Capabilities

; Corrosion Resistance (outdoor or food use items)
; Sharp Edges
; Sharp Points
• Plating Thickness
• Water PH Test
• Plating Chemical Depletion Test
• Adhesion Test
• Tip Resistance
• Non-Stick Coating Durability
Processes
Other General Testing Equipment/Capabilities

Hardgoods • Moisture Content (wood)
• Impact Durability Test
• Tip Resistance
• Any other equipment listed in other categories
Processes
Paper Testing Equipment/Capabilities
; Colorfastness (wet and dry crocking)
; Water Absorption
• Sutherland Rub Test
• Bursting Strength
• GSM Thickness (gram/SQ. MTR)
• Edge Crush Test
• Color Reflection
Processes
Toys Testing Equipment/Capabilities

; Moisture Content (wood)
; Metal Detection / Needle Policy (Plush/Textiles)
; Small Parts Cylinder
; Torque and Tension
• Drop Test
• Chew/Bite Test (if applicable)
• Impact Test (if applicable)
• Flexure Test (if applicable)
• Rattle Gauge Test (if applicable)
• Sharp Points
• Sharp Edge
• Small Ball (if applicable)
• Compression test
• Hardness Test (PVC Only)
Processes
Wood Testing Equipment/Capabilities
• Moisture Content
• Tip Resistance
Processes
Plastics Testing Equipment/Capabilities

; Impact Durability
; Melt Index Test
• Tip Resistance
• Tensile & Elongation Properties (pull test)
• Flexural Properties
• Heat Deflection Temperature Test
• Vicat Softening Point
• Rockwell Hardness Test
Processes
; Procedure to obtain proper FSSE (plastic food safety)
documentation
Softhome and Testing Equipment/Capabilities
Softlines ; Light Box with UL 3000 Light Source - with current calibration and
certification plan for both UL3000 and D65 Light sources
; AATCC Crockmeter or substitute used to conduct AATCC 8
; U.S. Specification Topload Washer
; U.S. Specification Topload Dryer
; Scale accurate to 0.000g
; Circular fabric punch or standard ruler / guide / template for cutting
fabrics for weight
Woven Products
; Tensile Tester (Instron Type)
; Tear Tester (Elmendorf Type)
Knit Products
; Burst Tester (Mullen Type)
Processes
; Demonstrate use for color matching / shade sorting / comparison to
shade bands
; Demonstrate people have been tested for color vision
; Documented Methods for AATCC 135 / 150 a.k.a. shrinkage
; Documented Methods for evaluating color loss / color change
(AATCC Grey Scale for Color Change)
; Documented Method for checking fabric weight
; Needle Detection / Needle Policy
; Production Control (traceability process) – Bundle Integrity
Woven Products
; Show Test Method and ability to conduct seam strength / seam
slippage
; Demonstrate Ability to Count Ends and Picks (Fabric Count)
; AATCC Smoothness Appearance Replicas for Seams and Fabric
; Crease Retention Replicas
; ASTM Photographic Standards for Random Tumble Pilling
Knit Products
; ASTM Photographic Standards for Random Tumble Pilling
PRODUCTION
PLANNING
Production Planning 1 of 7
PRODUCTION PLANNING
Overview
Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR) is the process and document for tracking
Timing & Action (T & A) and pre-production activities to prepare and deliver awarded
programs according to plan and schedule.
A Vendor Timing and Action form is used to verify that the vendor/factory can execute
the required timing.
Table of Contents
1. Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR)
2. Vendor Timing and Action (VTA)
3. Factory Production
Objectives
• Clear understanding of Target’s expectations for Pre-Production Planning.
• How to use the Pre-Production Planning Requirements Document (PPR).
• Identify potential production issue(s) and prepare solutions prior to production
starting.
• Understand the VTA and adhering to timing.
Resources
POL: Guidelines and Info > Product Development/Quality Assurance > Quality
Assurance (Softlines or Hardgoods) > Forms (Pre-Production Planning Requirements)
1. Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR)
PPR is the process and document for tracking pre-production activities to prepare and
deliver awarded programs according to plan and schedule. The PPR facilitates and
documents Target’s:
Note: Non-TSS Vendors/Factories should be holding Production Planning meetings. A

different tool may be used, but it is recommended to use the PPR process below. All
Factories should be tracking their own Quality Plan to help manage product quality from
development to pre-production to full production. This includes factory managed timing
and actions from the receipt of raw materials to the actual production, along with
documenting internal testing plans and inspection processes.
• Expectations for the Vendor/Factory managing the program awarded

• Requirements for Quality and Standards for products prior to production
• Proactive approach to prevention and resolution of issues before production begins
• Use of the PPR is required for TSS Vendors/Factories to ensure proper execution of
pre-production planning according to Target requirements.
Example: Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR) Document
• The first page of the PPR document is the ‘Process’ tab, that describes the Best
Method for conducting these meetings, as well as roles and responsibilities.
• The second tab on ‘PPR’ document is the actual grid that needs to be filled out as
part of the meetings.
o The discussion topics guide the discussion that you should have during the
meeting.
o Any issue or action needed based on the discussion will be recorded in the
document indicating expected resolution date and who is responsible for
follow up
o Required in SIP: Indicates if information is required for the SIP file.
(Refer to the Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) Factory Education section)
Vendor/Factory Pre-Production Responsibilities
Note: This applies to all Vendors/Factories
• Open communication between vendor, factory and Target

• Responsible for preparing documents according to the PPR
• Requests product testing protocol(s) from Target’s approved 3rd party testing labs
and brings to meeting to review
• Confirms an understanding of all of the information and details needed to accurately
manufacture the products according to Target’s expectations and standards
including US State and Federal requirements
• Raise concerns and help find solutions
• Must review and confirm all elements of the production T&A
• Understand the required testing performance standards
Note: Some examples of why production could be delayed:

o Pre-Production sample(s) not approved by TCPS
o Satisfactory testing reports are not available
o Incomplete SIP File
o Product and/or production issues
Pre-Production Planning consists of two meetings: Placement and Pre-Production
Placement Meeting
Note: For non-TSS it is vendor’s responsibility to hold the Placement Meeting
• The objective of the Placement Meeting is to provide an overview and clarity on

program placement
• The meeting is conducted within 7 to 10 days after confirmation or program award
• This meeting usually takes place in the local TSS Office that is managing the
program for Target or at the factory of production
• Review any special instructions or requirements for the program
• Confirm that Factory has the capacity and capability to produce the item ordered
according to Target’s: standards, product testing requirements and product
specifications
• Understand Standard Inspection Package (SIP) requirements
• Vendors/Factories should raise key issues and help to develop solutions
Example: Placement meeting attendees
TSS Sourcing Vendor

Market Representative
Representative
TCPS MT and/or Vendor/Factory

Quality Inspector QA Management
Pre-Production Meeting
Note: For non-TSS it is vendor’s responsibility to hold the Pre-Production Meeting
• The objective of the Pre-Production Meeting is to ensure that the Vendor/Factory

correctly understands all production, final order fulfillment details, any open issues
have been resolved and that the factory producing the product is ready for
production.
• The meeting must take place 3-10 days prior to production start
• This meeting should take place at the factory of production
• Vendors/Factories should confirm complete understanding of Target’s expectation of
quality and standards including US State and Federal requirements
• Communicate any concerns, discrepancies, missing or incomplete information that
has not be resolved before production starts
• Confirm complete understanding of order quantity, delivery dates and all required
documents
• Confirm production schedule against the VTA to ensure an on-time shipment
• TCPS will review Factory’s Pre-Production samples against Red seal samples
• Each factory producing the product must make pre-production samples (full set size
run, if applicable) in the actual bulk fabric/trims and/or raw material. These will be
reviewed by TCPS for specification, construction, color and workmanship and if
approved, a yellow seal will be attached to the core size sample.
• Confirm SIP phase 1 completeness
TSS Sourcing Vendor

Market Representative
Representative
TCPS MT and/or Vendor/Factory

Quality Inspector QA Management
Note: Factory should include a cross-section of management or supervisory personnel.

Example includes supervisor in charge of the machine or section of production for the
product being discussed.
Note: Vendors/Factories should perform their own internal Pre-Production Planning

meetings before TSS meetings. This will help you:
• Have a clear understanding of Target’s expectations, needed documentation and
requirements
• Help define questions or concerns that must be raised during the meetings
• Identify potential issue(s), prepare solutions or corrective action plans in advance
Standard Inspection Packet
• As you go through the Pre-Production Planning process, you will start to build a
Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) to be used during production.
• The SIP is required for all Target Vendors/Factories and is a very important tool
for both the Factory and TCPS because it contains all the necessary documents and
information for production and product inspections.
• Many topics discussed during Placement and Pre-Production meetings require
documents that will make up the SIP.
• The third tab on ‘PPR’ document is the Sip Check list
Example: SIP Checklist Document
(Refer to the Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) Factory Education section for full details)
2. Vendor Timing and Action (VTA) Overview
Note: This applies to all Vendors/Factories
• Vendor/Factory should collaborate to manage the VTA throughout the entire lifecycle
of the production.
• Vendors Manage the VTA and may review all extension requests and verify if the
Factory can confirm delivery, without issue OR a delivery extension is needed.
• If you are unable to meet any timing, contact your vendor.
• A Vendor Timing and Action form is used to verify that the vendor/factory can
execute the required timing. The level of detail requested may vary. The VTA will
most likely include the following information:
o Target Department and Class
o The program name
o Vendor
o Country of Origin
o FOB point
o Fabric mill
o Confirmed FOB and ELC cost
o Due dates for color and strike-off approvals
o In-store dates for each order (including sets, ads and new-store’s)
o Due dates for projections for each delivery, if applicable
o Planned delivery flow of the program
o Sample due dates
o Packaging due dates
o Due dates for greige (raw material) confirmations
o Due dates for color and size breakdowns
o Vendor’s detailed production plan by purchase order, including knit or weave
dates, dye dates and cut dates
o Due dates for MTL compliance testing
o Contact information as applicable
Note: Unique styling or fabrications may vary from the PD&D calendar timing and
actions.
Factory should ensure that the following dates are accurate:

• Testing timeline relevant to the product you are producing and product timeline
• Pre-Production Planning meetings
• Delivery schedule (DUPRO/FRI timing)
3. Factory Production
To ensure continued successful production, you, the factory, need to ensure you have
key process controls in place to identify issues and correct them. Refer to the following
references for more details:
• Factory Evaluations – Refer to the Factory Evaluation Factory Education section
• Product Testing – Refer to the Product Testing Factory Education section
• Product Inspections - Refer to the Product Inspections Factory Education section
• SIP - Refer to the Standard Inspection Packet Factory Education section
PRODUCT
TESTING
Product Testing 1 of 22
PRODUCT TESTING
Overview
Target requires product testing in order to prevent costly product problems for both
Target and the factory. All Product Testing is performed to verify Target’s expectations
regarding:
• Product Safety & Regulatory Requirements
• Product labeling & packaging requirements
• Product end-use(s) and performance according to the test protocol(s)
Table of Contents
1. Owned Brand Product Testing Requirements
2. Product Safety and Regulatory References
3. Product Labeling, Warnings and Transit Testing
4. Product Test Protocols
5. Product Testing Documents
6. Product Test Submission Process
7. Target Approved Test Labs
8. Multi Stage Testing
a. Production Fabric Testing (SH/SL only)
b. Pre-Production Product Testing
c. Top of Production Testing
d. On-Going Random Production Testing
Objectives
• Understand Target’s Product Testing Requirements
• Understand factory responsibilities to follow Target and U.S. Product Safety and
Regulatory References
• Understand Vendor/Factory responsibilities to conform to Target Multi-Stage Testing
requirements
• Know how to perform Target’s Transit/Drop Test for applicable Hardgoods
merchandise
Resources
• POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Hardlines Quality
Assurance > Hardgoods A, B, C or Softhome > Product Testing
• POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Quality
Assurance > Softlines > Product Testing
Assurance > Softhome > Multi Stage Testing > Appendix of Softhome Protocols
1. Owned Brand Product Testing Requirements
• Product Testing is required for

o All See. Spot. Save. Products
o Products where Target owns the trademark
o The brand is exclusive to Target
o The brand licensed product where Target is exclusive retailer
o Target has driven the product design
o Target driven product standards or technical development
o There is no distinguishing brand name used in retail packaging
o The Vendor label is without National / Regional recognition
• Product Testing is required annually (1x per year) per awarded product
o Pre-Production Testing is completed before production starts
o Annual renewal date is due 1 year from previous test report issue date
• Product Testing is required per product per factory
o Factory name and ID is required on the Testing Documentation
Notes:
• It is the Vendor’s responsibility to ensure that the products they sell to Target
Corporation comply with all United States federal, state, and local laws, regulations,
and ordinances. A satisfactory Lab test result does not constitute a certification that a
Vendor’s product meets all legal requirements.
• It is the Vendor’s/Factory’s responsibility to manufacture their items to comply with all
applicable laws and in conformance with the purchase order terms and conditions on
Partners Online.
2. Product Safety & Regulatory References
The Vendor is responsible to ensure their product complies with all U.S. regulations.
Products that do not comply with these requirements are banned from sale in the United
States. They cannot enter the country and may be seized by US Customs until
compliant. Products that violate any US regulations will be subject to withdrawal from
Target stores & supply chain, product recall, US government agency disposition,
chargebacks, fees and fine.
Product Safety & Regulatory References includes, but not limited to:
• Consumer Products Safety Act - This protects consumers from injury and death from
unsafe products.
• California Proposition 65 - Warn consumers of risks associated with hazardous
chemicals contained in consumer products. Although this is a state regulation,
Target applies it to all products.
• Federal Hazardous Substances Act
• Flammability Fabrics Act
• Poison Prevention Packaging Act
• Federal Food, Drug & Cosmetics Act
(Refer to Product Safety Recall and Regulatory Reference section)
3. Product Labeling, Warnings and Transit Testing
• All Target products are tested for Labeling, Packaging and Warning requirements per
Target’s Packaging / Labeling Protocol (9067) and/or Product Specific Protocols.
Product Labeling
• Vendors are ultimately responsible for ensuring all factories are in compliance with
all applicable labeling requirements for their products.
• The labeling protocol is Target's interpretation of the Fair Packaging & Labeling Act
(FPLA) and Uniform Packaging & Labeling Regulation (UPLR) as well as Target-
specific labeling requirements.
o FPLA is Fair Packaging and Labeling Act. It is that all consumer products must
be labeled to disclose contents, identity, name and place of business in order to
prevent fraud or deception AND to allow the consumer to make to reasonable
comparisons between products.
o UPLR is Uniform Packaging and Labeling Regulation. UPLR adds to the FPLA
to include appropriate metric labeling.
• In addition to Target’s interpretation of FPLA / UPLR, Target also has specific

requirements that may go above and beyond government requirements. Target’s
goal to is to ensure consistent and clear labeling that best represents the Target
brand for the guest.
• Verify Claims - Target requires the Vendor/Factory to verify their label claims. The
3rd party test lab will ensure that if the retail packaging makes a claim on
performance, that claim can be validated. This includes any marketing copy.
Example: Product Claims and Verification

• Corrosion Resistant – The product will be tested for corrosion per a salt spray test
and results will be assessed.
• Anti-Bacterial or Anti-Microbial – Must meet EPA Pesticide Regulation requirements.
• Instructions that apply to the Target Labeling protocol (9067)
o Product Name / Description must be shown on the Principle Display Panel (PDP)
including open stock.
• Principal Display Panel (PDP) is the side of the packaging that is displayed to
the guest when shelved. For hangtags it is the side where both Product
Name / Description and Net Quantity/Count appear.
Distribution Statement
Product Name / Description Country of Origin
Net Quantity / Count 200 08 1423
Distributed by Target Corporation
Minneapolis, MN 55403
Made in China
2007 Target Brands, Inc.
• Declaration of Responsibility, Distribution Statement and Country Of Origin (COO)

must be shown on package or hangtag. This includes:
o DPCI No.
o Distributed by Target Corporation
o Minneapolis, MN 55403
o 2007 Target Brands, Inc.
o Made in China
• Net Quantity / Count Weights & Measurements shall be represented in both standard
units and metric units. Can be expressed as:
o Weight
o area (L x W)
o volume
o piece count
o quantity
o Piece count and quantity
• May be abbreviated but do not use symbols. For example you cannot put an
apostrophe instead of feet or a period for inches. Metrics have to be in parentheses.
• "Rule of 1000." Use metric numbers that make sense and are easy to envision.
Bookshelf is 48 in, use 48 in = 121.9 cm, NOT 48 in = 1219 mm
Examples
• Garden Hose ‘25 ft’ and ‘300 cm’ describes Length of the hose.
• Drinking Glass ‘32 fl oz’ and ‘950 ml’ describes Volume.
• Pencil ‘10 pencils’ describes Quantity or Count.
• Glassware Set ‘4 - 32 fl oz and ‘950 ml’ both quantity (4) AND Volume (32 fl oz).
Product Warnings
• Proper warnings and instructions on safe use should always be included when
necessary.
• Work with your Vendor and Testing Lab for any warnings that are applicable to your
product.
Example: Product Warning
Retail, Casepack & Carton Packaging Test Requirements

In addition to testing the actual product, Target also requires analytical and physical
testing of the retail and casepack packaging.
Analytical testing includes testing for hazardous materials used in the packaging. For
example, many states in the US have strict requirements concerning the use of heavy
metals in packaging. Vendor should use the same caution when producing product as
producing packaging materials to ensure meets all US regulations.
Transit Packaging Test Requirements

Physical or performance testing of the retail and casepack packaging is referred to as
Transit Testing. By testing the carton quality and packaging method, Target is able to
reduce breakages of the product.
• Fragile items are those items that will break or deform if dropped onto a concrete
surface from 30” (76.2cm).
• In addition to the above definition of fragile, product will require transit testing if it also
meets any one of the material, surface finish, construction or packing criteria listed
below:
Product is made from one or If the SURFACE of the Product is CONSTRUCTED
more of the following product is or PACKAGED using one or
MATERIALS more of the following
methods
• Glass • Painted • Welds
• Crystal • Stained • Hinges
• Ceramic • Varnished • Joints
• Earthenware • Lacquered • Packed KD (Knocked-
• Stoneware • Glazed Down in multiple parts)
• Terra Cotta • Polished
• Soapstone
• Marble
• Slate
• Wax
• Wood – Solid and
Composite
• Fiberglass
• Capiz/Shells
The Transit testing is divided into two phases, Vibration test and Drop test.
• Vibration Test - Simulates physical stresses that could occur to the product during
transportation by a repetitive shaking movement.
• Drop Test - Packaged item is dropped repeatedly on flat sides, corners, and edges of
the carton to simulate accidental drops that can occur during handling.
• Complete internal factory drop test prior to sending packaged product (shipping
carton) to the testing lab.
o In-house testing allows you to test package (shipping carton) and identify issues
prior to sending to approved testing party lab.
• Instruction for submitting samples to testing lab for Vibration and Drop Test:
o Submit one casepack of product – use factory production sample.
o Casepack of product should be placed in a larger box with protective packaging
so that the contents do not incur damage during shipment to the testing lab.
o The protective overpack should be clearly marked with the statement “Test Inner
Package”.
o Mark the outside of the package that is to be tested with the statement “Test this
Carton” and mark the carton with DPCI, product description and style number (if
known)
o Complete and attach the Target Transit Package Test Request Form, one for
each DPCI.
POL: Guidelines & Info > Requirements & Procedures > Product Packaging > Hardlines
Casepack Testing Requirements
• Test results will be completed within 7 working days and either fax or e-mailed the
test report to the contact on the Test Request Form.
• Packages for items that fail testing must be redesigned and submitted to the same
lab for testing.
• Vendor must note the old test report number on the new Test Request Form and
note what package improvements were made.
• Drop Height Guidelines are listed in the tables below for Target Merchandising
Departments 002, 055, 065, 070, 072, 074, 083 Ceramic items, 084, 097, 200, 236,
249 and Target.com items:
Packaged Product Weight Drop Height
0 to 20.99 lbs (0 to 9.52 kg) 30 in (0.762 m)

21 to 40.99 lbs (9.53 to 18.59 kg) 24 in (0.610 m)
41 to 60.99 lbs (18.60 to 27.66 kg) 18 in (0.457 m)
61 to 100.99 lbs (27.67 to 45.81 kg) 12 in (0.305 m)
101 to 150 lbs (45.82 to 68.04 kg) 8 in (0.203 m)
• Drop Height Guidelines for all other departments:

Packaged Product Weight Drop Height
0 to 20.99 lbs (0 to 9.52 kg) 18 in (0.457 m)

21 to 40.99 lbs (9.53 to 18.59 kg) 16 in (0.406 m)
41 to 60.99 lbs (18.60 to 27.66 kg) 14 in (0.356 m)
61 to 80.99 lbs (27.67 to 36.73 kg) 12 in (0.305 m)
81 to 100.99 lbs (36.74 to 45.81 kg) 10 in (0.254 m)
101 to 200.99 lbs (45.81 to 91.17 kg) 8 in (0.203 m)
• During the Placement Meeting, the Vendor/Factory verifies if the product requires
Transit testing and determines the number of tests needed
o Approval for grouping can only come from TCPS HQ
• Factory includes a satisfactory Transit Test report in the SIP packet
• Factory should perform their internal Drop Tests during their internal inspections
• Equipment needed to perform the Drop test:
o Tape measure (minimum 45 inches long)
o Scale to weigh the carton
o Concrete floor (minimum 2m x 2m)
o Approved Transit Test from the test lab
• To perform the Drop Test, the factory inspector should:
o Pull one carton randomly by DPCI/style from the shipment
o Verify the carton is not damaged and packing method is identical to the packing
send to the testing lab
o Complete the 10 step Drop Test sequence by dropping the packaged product on
a flat concrete surface from the height specified.
10 Step Drop Test Sequence
Drop #8
Drop #9 (Flat on medium
(Flat on large face) face)
Drop #5
(Flat on small
Drop #6 face)
(Flat on small face)
Drop #3
(Medium Edge)
Drop #2
(Short Edge)
Drop #1 (Corner by
Drop #7 manufacturer’s joint)
(Flat on medium
face) Drop #4
(Long Edge) Drop #10
(Flat on large face)
• After each Drop Test sequence, inspect carton for any damage, look for:
o Excessive damage, denting breaking of carton
o Leaking of liquids or granular product
o Damage to the casepack so that it fails to provide protection or containment
Rating the Drop Test

In evaluating the appearance of both the carton and the product after the internal Drop
test, the factory inspector will assign one of the following ratings:
• Pass - No problems were detected.
• Fail - As a general rule, the package design will be considered inadequate if any of
the following conditions occur after package testing:
Leaking of liquids or granular product
Excessive scuffing or denting of retail package
Damage to the casepack such that it fails to contain the product
Excessive puncture, tearing or breaking of retail package
Failure of the product to perform as originally intended
Damage that negatively impacts the sale of the item (i.e., chipping of bowl,
excessive scuffing of paint, dents or scratches in wood, etc.)
Detailed Information of the drop test can be found through your Vendor, test protocols
and through the testing labs.
4. Product Test Protocol
• A protocol is a list of various tests and test method to evaluate a single product.
• Target has approximately 2000 individual protocols, each representing a different
product.
• TCPS HQ QA is responsible for the creation, content and revision of protocols. It is
the Vendor/Factory responsibility to obtain a copy of the protocol from the testing lab
to understand Target’s product requirements before production.
Protocols consist of the following distinct elements:
• Supplemental Protocols – E.g. State Regulation, California Proposition 65
• Labeling - Review of product specific Federal and State labeling requirements.
Confirms that product complies with all label claims including instructions. Target
labeling requirements are reviewed.
• Analytical - Test analysis for lead, cadmium, and other hazardous materials.
• Physical Characteristics - Confirmation that any physical claims are accurate
(capacity, weight, length, width, height, material type, etc.).
• Construction Qualities - Review of workmanship (safety concerns, defects, missing
parts).
• Performance End-Use Testing - Confirms product performs as intended.
• Transit Testing (Hardgoods Only) - Must submit appropriate number of casepacks
necessary for product testing.
• Sample Quantity - Identifies the suggested number of units required for testing.
More may be needed depending on the product type, size, etc
• Days to Complete – Identifies the average number of business days to complete
testing.
• Cost - Identifies basic test package price, and the cost for any additional testing
beyond basic package.
• Products will be tested to determine if they meet Target standards based on End-
Use Performance:
o Materials
o Construction
o Function
o Purpose
o Application
Example: Hargoods Product End-Use Performance

Flashlight with a lighter attached. End-Use Performance Testing Required for Protocoal
4045 Protocol 4045 Flashlight AND ALSO REQUIRED Protocol 4084 Utility Lighter.
This pertains to any products that have more than one end use
Example: Hardgoods Product Testing Protocols
Example: Softhome/Softlines Product Testing Protocols
5. Product Testing Documents
Product Testing documents include:

• Group Testing Approval
• Test Report
• Overrides
• Testing Compliance Certificate (TCC)
• Notice of Exclusion (NOE)
Group Testing Approval

• Grouping reduces the number of samples tested while still ensuring the safety and
quality of products being supplied to Target.
• Grouping requests can only be approved by TCPS Minneapolis and must be
submitted and approved PRIOR to submitting for testing.
• Vendor must get approval from TCPS HQ QA for grouping BEFORE submitting
samples for testing
• Grouping is only allowed for similar products meeting the following criteria:
o Produced at the same factory
o Same materials and components used
o Same construction
o Same manufacturing processes
• Grouping will only be approved for products being tested at the same time and forms
MUST be submitted with the product to be tested.
• Vendor downloads Grouping Request Form from Partners Online (POL) inserting all
requested information.
• All grouped items must pass testing before a Testing Compliance Certificate (TCC)
will be issued. Products grouped and not tested will be noted on the TCC.
Example: Grouping Request Form
Test Report
• After the product has been tested, the Vendor/Factory will receive a Test Report with
results from the lab
Example: Test Report
Overrides
• An override is a determination from TCPS HQ QA confirming that although the
testing failed, the product can still be shipped.
• Vendor must request override from TCPS QA HQ
o If granted, Vendor must request to receive the TCC from lab; report will remain
as “Unsatisfactory” with override
o If NOT granted, Vendor must fix and retest
Vendor is fully responsible for and accepts all liability for any issues that arise
due to this consideration. Overrides do not set precedent for future production.
This override does not modify your obligations to Target under Partners Online.
Notes:
• Overrides are not approved for safety or US government regulations.
• Overrides are granted on an exception basis and should not replace satisfactory test
reports.
Testing Compliance Certificate (TCC)
• Official document that states product passed or was overridden for all required
product tests
• Issued by Target approved 3rd party test lab
• Valid for 1 year from issue date
• TCC’s are issued for all HG and for non-TSS SL Vendors
Example: Testing Compliance Certificate (TCC)
Notice of Exclusion (NOE)

Note: Excluded only if the product is National Brand
• Document that states product is excluded from product testing
• Issued by TCPS QA – HQ
• Valid for 1 year from issue date
6. Product Test Submission Process
Vendor is responsible for managing the entire Target testing process. Factories must be
aware of the Target testing process including requirements and timelines.
1. Vendor Obtains the Testing Protocol from 3rd party lab and reviews with the Factory
before production and testing.
• If TSS, review at Placement Meeting
• If Non-TSS, Factory completes review during their internal Pre-Production
process
2. If applicable, Vendor applies for Group Test
3. Vendor Completes the Test Request Form (TRF)
4. Vendor/Factory submits:
• Product Samples
• Test Request Form
• Group Test Form
• Retail Packaging & Labeling
• If applicable, Casepacks for Transit Testing for Hardgoods
5. Test lab will conduct testing per appropriate protocol:
• If product results are Pass:
o Vendor receives “Satisfactory” Test Report
o Vendor receives Testing Compliance Certificate (TCC)
• If product test results are Fail:
o Vendor receives “Unsatisfactory” Test Report
o Vendor must fix failures and re-test
o Review failure with Target TCPS QA - HQ. for possible override
If NO override, Vendor must fix & re-test
If YES override, Vendor must request the release of the TCC after the
override has been processed.
• Testing will be delayed for the following reasons:

o Incomplete or inaccurate forms
o Insufficient number of samples
o Damaged product due to shipping breakage
o Testing will not start if any of the above occur.
Note: TCPS confirms testing documentation is complete before an Inspection Certificate

is issued to release the shipment.
7. Target Approved Test Lab
The current Target approved test lab is Bureau Veritas (BV). Target plans to approve
and use multiple lab companies in the near future. Vendor should advise Factory of the
proximate BV lab to their manufacturing location.
• Softlines: target.reports@us.bureauveritas.com
• Hardlines/Toys: hardlines.reports@us.bureauveritas.com
• Softhome: softhome.reports@us.bureauveritas.com
8. Multi-Stage Testing (MST)
Target’s Multi-Stage Testing Process was created so that products are tested throughout
the entire production run. The intent is to identify potential issues earlier in production
and continually monitor quality throughout shipments. Target requires product testing
BEFORE production and DURING production.
Note: Vendors pay for all testing.
Hardgoods Multi-Stage Testing (MST) refers to the following testing stages:

1. Pre-Production Product Testing
2. Top Of Production Testing (TOP)
3. On-Going Random Testing
Softhome - Multi-Stage Testing (MST) refers to the following testing stages:

1. Production Fabric Testing
2. Pre-Production Testing
3. Top Of Production Testing
4. Ongoing Random Testing
Softlines Multi-Stage Testing (MST) refers to the following testing stages:

Hardgoods Multi-Stage Testing (MST)
Not all Hardgoods products require MST, check with your Vendor for products that
require testing.
• Target requires Pre-Production testing for all products.
• Product grouping is allowed with approval.
• Vendor/Factory submits the sample to Target’s approved test lab.
• Vendor must receive satisfactory test results or override before starting production.
• All satisfactory and unsatisfactory test results with documented override, if
applicable, are kept in the SIP and available for review by TCPS Field team.
2.Top Of Production Testing (TOP)

• Testing occurs during production.
• No grouping, wet paint or component testing allowed.
• TCPS Field team pulls and seals with a black seal, samples from production during
the first Target inspection.
• It is the Vendor’s/Factory’s responsibility to submit the samples to the lab.
• If TOP testing fails - Production must be stopped until the issue is resolved with
TCPS HQ and Field team.
Note: If safety issues are found, further testing will be required and may result in a
product recall. If performance issues are found, further testing will be required and may
result in a market withdrawal.
3.On-Going Random Testing

• On-Going Random testing required only by TCPS instruction.
• Product can be pulled by TCPS at any time during the production lifecycle.
• Follows the same process as TOP testing.
• If On-Going Random testing fails - Production must be stopped until the issue is
resolved with TCPS HQ and Field team.
Softhome - Multi-Stage Testing (MST)
Not all Softhome products require MST, check with your Vendor for details.

• Fabric stage testing is not required for all Softhome products. Verify with your
Vendor which Softhome products require testing.
• All colors / prints / patterns should be submitted.
• Fabric testing must pass or be overridden in all colors, fabrications, prints, or
patterns before proceeding with pre-production testing. Only TCPS HQ can provide
overrides (qasofthome@target.com).
applicable, must be kept in the SIP and available for review by TCPS Field team.
• Must be completed before production begins
• Pre-Production samples are submitted by the Vendor/Factory and must meet the
following requirements:
o Made in each factory of production (e.g. if 2 factories are producing the product,
samples must be submitted from both factories)
o Produced with bulk production fabric
o Produced in a sample room using similar equipment to that used in production
(or) produced using production equipment for a sample run
o Produced to all proper specifications
o Produced using production materials including all sub-components
o All labeling information must be submitted
Mock up labeling and packaging is acceptable for Pre-Production Testing.
• Testing is required for all color ways.
o Solids – All Colors
o Multi-Color Fabrications or Color blocked items – All fabrications
o Yarn dyes - All patterns
o Prints - All prints
• Pre-Production testing must pass or be overridden prior to beginning production for a
given color, print or pattern. Only TCPS HQ can provide overrides
(qasofthome@target.com).
• Product may ship after all pre-production testing has either passed or been
overridden.
• Samples must be from initial bulk production
• Submit samples in the core size using the following color guidelines:
o Solids - 3 colors (light, medium and dark)
o Multi-Color Fabrications or Color blocked items - 3 fabrications representing the most
extreme variation of color blocking or fabrication
o Yarn dyes - 3 patterns having largest number of individual colors
o Prints - 3 prints covering the largest area
• For TSS - Samples may be selected by the TCPS team.
• For Non-TSS – Vendor/Factory should work with their local TCPS team to determine
whether TCPS will select the samples for testing or if the Factory will select the samples.
• If samples are pulled by TCPS:
o They will be pulled at the first DUPRO inspection and black-sealed.
o Samples will be given to the Vendor/Factory to be submitted for testing.
o The Vendor/Factory must record the black seal serial numbers in their test
request form when submitting samples to the testing lab.
• If TCPS allows the factory to pull samples, no seal is required.
• If TOP testing fails, production must be stopped for the color, fabrication, print, or
pattern that failed until the issue is resolved with TCPS HQ
(qasofthome@target.com). Further testing may be required.
• The TCPS team will hold shipments (including shipments already in transit) if TOP
testing is UNSATISFACTORY.
Notes:
• For ongoing programs: Fabric, Pre-production and TOP testing are annual
requirements.
• If safety issues are found, further testing will be required and may result in a product
recall. If performance issues are found, further testing will be required and may

• Frequency of testing is based on product type and occurs after a set number of units
have been produced. To determine the number of units – reference POL: Product
Development > Requirements & Procedures > Hardlines Quality Assurance >
Softhome > Multi Stage Testing > Appendix of Softhome Protocols
• Random testing is not required more than once per month.
• Samples selected for Random testing must meet the same criteria and follow the
same guidelines outlined for Top of Production.
• As with Top of Production testing, Vendor/Factory should work with their local TCPS
team to determine whether TCPS will select the samples for testing or if the Factory
will select the samples.
• If samples are pulled by TCPS, they will be black-sealed as outlined in TOP
• If TCPS allows Factory to pull samples, no seal is required.
• If ongoing random production testing fails, production must be stopped for the color,
fabrication, print, or pattern that failed until the issue is resolved with TCPS HQ
(qasofthome@target.com). Further testing may be required.
• The TCPS team will hold shipments (including shipments already in transit) if
Random testing is UNSATISFACTORY.
Softlines Multi-Stage Testing (MST)
All Softlines products require MST, check with your Vendor for details.

• Fabric stage testing must be complete before production begins.
NOTE: This stage is not applicable to Sweaters or Seamless production. Garments
should be tested at TOP stage in all colors.
• Fabric samples should be submitted by the Vendor.
o All colors should be submitted
o Pull 3 yards per color
o All fabric in all colors/ fabrications/ prints/ patterns must pass testing
• Fabric testing must pass or be overridden in all colors, fabrications, prints, or
patterns before proceeding with pre-production testing. Only TCPS HQ can provide
overrides (qasoftlinesoverride@target.com).
• Must be completed before production begins
• Pre-Production samples are submitted by the Vendor/Factory and must meet the
following requirements:
o Sample must be made in each factory of production (e.g. if 2 factories are
producing the product, both factories must submit samples)
o Produced with bulk production fabric
o Produced in a sample room using the same production class equipment that will
be used in production (or) produced using production equipment for a sample run
o Produced to all proper specifications including any trims or embellishment
o Produced using production materials including all sub-components
o All labeling information must be submitted with pre-production product
o Mock up labeling and packaging is acceptable for Pre-Production Testing.
• Sample quantity submitted for testing can vary due to the size/size range of the
product. Information is available from your Vendor, POL or approved testing lab.
o Solid Colors Submit one color of a garment for testing – lightest color; 3
garments of that color
o Multi-Fabrication or Color Blocked Submit one color for testing. This color should
represent the most extreme variation of color blocking or fabrication in the
garments; 3 garments of that fabrication
o Yarn Dyed Submit one pattern that has the most colored yarns; 3 garments of
that pattern
o Printed Garments Submit one print for garment testing. Print should cover the
largest surface area of the garment; 3 garments of that print
• Vendor/Factory cannot re-test or request overrides for unsatisfactory test results
• Vendor/Factory must resolve issues before proceeding in Production (cutting stage)
• Any failed parameters will be re-tested during TOP stage of testing
NOTE: This stage is not applicable to Sweaters or Seamless production. Garments

should be tested at TOP stage in all colors
• Samples must be from initial bulk production
• All garment colors / fabrications / prints / patterns will be tested.
o Sample quantity submitted for testing can vary due to the size/size range of the
product. Information is available from your Vendor or Testing Lab
o TOP samples in core size should be submitted as soon as possible after
production begins (initial production run).
o Care instructions must be accurate at TOP testing stage.
• For TSS - Samples may be selected by the TCPS team.
• For Non-TSS – Vendor/Factory should work with their local TCPS team to determine
whether TCPS will select the samples for testing or if the Factory will select the
samples.
• If samples are pulled by TCPS:
o They will be pulled at the first DUPRO inspection and black-sealed.
o Black seals (tamper evident product seal) will be attached to samples in such a
way that they cannot be easily removed or replaced.
o One black seal should be used for each group of sample units: e.g. three units of
each color/fabrication/print/pattern.
o Black seal serial numbers will be recorded in the Product Inspection Form (PIF)
o Samples will be given to the Vendor/Factory to be submitted for testing.
o The Vendor/Factory must record the black seal serial numbers in their test
request form when submitting samples to the Testing Lab.
• If TCPS allows the factory to pull samples, no seal is required.
• If TOP testing fails, production must be stopped for the color, fabrication, print, or
pattern that failed and you must contact TCPS HQ (qasoftlinesoverride@target.com)
Further testing may be required.
NOTE: No overrides will be provided for incorrect care or fiber content at TOP.

• The TCPS team will hold shipments (including shipments already in transit) if TOP
testing is UNSATISFACTORY.
Notes:
• For ongoing programs Fabric, Preproduction and TOP testing is an annual
requirement.
• If safety issues are found, further testing will be required and may result in a product
recall. If performance issues are found, further testing will be required and may
• Frequency of testing is based on product type and occurs after a set number of units
have been produced.
• Random testing is not required more than once per month.
• Random Production Samples in core size will be pulled after every 100,000 units of
production of each color/ print/ color way of color blocked items
• Samples selected for Random testing must meet the same criteria and follow the
same guidelines outlined for Top of Production. In addition:
o Only three colors are required to be tested in the Random Production Testing
stage.
o Number of samples required during Random Production testing is indicated on
the Testing Protocols.
o Sample quantity submitted for testing can vary due to the size/size range of the
product. Information is available from your Vendor or Testing Lab
• As with Top of Production testing, Vendor/Factory should work with their local TCPS
team to determine whether TCPS will select the samples for testing or if the Factory
will select the samples.
• If samples are pulled by TCPS, they will be black-sealed as outlined in the TOP
• If TCPS allows Factory to pull samples, no seal is required.
• If ongoing random production testing fails, production must be stopped for the color,
fabrication, print, or pattern that failed until the issue is resolved with TCPS HQ
(qasoftlines@target.com). Further testing may be required.
• The TCPS team will hold shipments (including shipments already in transit) if
Random testing is UNSATISFACTORY.
• Shipment is denied when:

o Any fabric test fails and are not overridden.
o Any Pre-Production test fails.
o Vendor/Factory must proceed to TOP stage and cannot ship until satisfactory
TOP test results are received.
o Any TOP or Ongoing Random tests fail and are not overridden.
PRODUCT
INSPECTIONS
Product Inspections 1 of 50
PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
Overview
To ensure your merchandise is meeting Target’s expectations across the entire
production lifecycle of the program, Target requires the factory to perform factory internal
During Production Inspections (DUPRO) and Final Random Inspections (FRI). These
internal inspections do not replace your internal quality control in any phases of
production, but will support you in achieving Targets’ and US federal requirements.
Table of Contents
1. Objectives of Product Inspections
2. Frequency of Inspections
3. Factory Inspection Process Overview
4. Tools to Conduct an Inspection
5. Booking an Inspection
6. Product Inspection Example – Hardgoods
7. Product Inspection Example – Softhome
8. Product Inspection Example – Softlines
9. Product Inspection Example – Ready To Assemble
Objectives
• Understand why factory internal DUPRO and FRI Inspections are required
• Be aware of the necessary tools to perform factory internal inspections
• Understand how and when to schedule a TCPS Inspection
• Know how to book a TCPS inspection
• Be aware of possible non-compliance charges
Resources
Assurance (Softlines or Hardlines) > Forms.
o Product Inspection form
o Sampling Plans
o Defect Classification Lists
1. Objectives of Product Inspections
• Gives the opportunity:

o To find any issues during production and fix quickly.
o To eliminate defects and maintain high quality product.
• Ensures Target’s quality product expectations are being met through the entire
production lifecycle of the product.
• To achieve satisfactory results on TCPS inspections without having to re-open
cartons or stop production.
• Improved efficiency for factories and vendors by:
o Shipping merchandise according to delivery date.
o Eliminating costs of re-work
o Preventing production from being placed on hold
o Reducing the number of defectives discarded
• Successful implementation of these inspections will lead to better score ratings for
factories and vendors who work with Target
2. Frequency of Inspections
Frequency of Internal Factory inspections and TCPS inspections
TCPS DUPRO AUDIT

FACTORY DUPRO FACTORY DUPRO
BEFORE 20% OF
AUDIT AUDIT
PRODUCTION IS
DONE BEFORE 10% OF DONE BEFORE 50%
COMPLETE- TOP
PRODUCTION IS OF PRODUCTION IS
SAMPLES ARE
COMPLETE COMPLETE
PULLED FOR TESTING
PRODUCTION
BEGINS
2ND TCPS DUPRO AUDIT TCPS FRI WHEN 100% OF

DONE BEFORE 60% OF FACTORY FRI WHEN TCPS FRI WHEN
PRODUCTION IS
PRODUCTION IS 100% PRODUCTION 100% OFAND AT
COMPLETED
COMPLETE –RANDOM COMPLETE
COMPLETE ANDAND A Y
READ PRODUCTION
LEAST 80% PACKED IS IN
SAMPLES ARE PULLED MINIMUM OF 80%
TO SHIP COMPLETE
SHIPPING CARTONSAND WITH
FOR TESTING (when PACKED IN CARTONS APACKED (completed
COMPLETE PACKING
required) packing
LISTlist) FACTORY
SHIPS GOODS
Factory DUPRO (During Production) Inspections

• Factories will conduct their internal DUPRO inspections at 10% and 50% of available
finished goods. Goods do not need to be floor ready in shipping cartons.
• If internal factory DUPRO inspection fails, a corrective action in production line is to
be taken immediately. Once defective units have been either repaired or removed
from production, the factory must perform an additional DUPRO inspection when
20% more production completed.
• Only submit the Vendor Inspection Request Form (VIRF) to TCPS for TCPS DUPRO
inspections if internal factory inspections have a satisfactory result.
• SIP phase 1 is to be complete.
Factory FRI (Final Random Inspection) Inspections

• Factories will conduct their internal FRI when purchase order(s) are 100% produced
and 80% packed in cartons.
• If internal factory FRI inspection failed, all cartons must be re opened and 100% re-
inspected. Corrective Action must be implemented immediately in the case of future
orders. Once defective units have been either repaired or removed from the order,
the factory must perform a RE-FRI inspection.
• Only submit the VIRF to TCPS for TCPS FRI inspection if internal factory inspection
has a satisfactory result and 100% of merchandise is complete and ready to ship
with complete Packing List.
• SIP phase 1 and 2 (including tests results) are complete.
3. Factory Inspection Process Overview
Inspection Flow chart
Inspector determines sample

pull quantities Using the Sampling Plan the Inspector determines the
quantity of units and cartons to pull for the inspection.
This audit is performed during FRI to verify the product is

Inspector conducts Carton
packed as requested (size/color/assortment). Perform
Audit (if applicable) Drop test (if applicable) and that the carton markings and
measurements are correct.
Inspector select samples for

Measurement and Workmanship The Inspectors selects the units for the Measurement (if
Audit
applicable) and Workmanship Audit.
This audit (Softhome and Softlines products) is

Inspector conducts
performed to verify that the product is compliant to
Measurement Audit (if Targets specification, checking all points of measure
applicable) against Target approved specifications.
This audit is performed to verify the quality of the product

Inspector conduct is meeting Target’s expectations. All samples pulled are
Workmanship Audit verified against the elements and documentation of the
SIP (Red and Yellow samples Color standards, Shade
bands, Materials/Fabric, Specification sheet, approved
labels, Packaging and Floor ready requirements, 3rd
party Testing Reports, etc.) and for defects.
• Ready To Assemble (RTA) - Target has implemented a separate procedure for RTA
Furniture due to the characteristics of the product, with a separate Sampling Plan,
Defect Classification List and Product Inspection Form. The inspection is divided into
three phases:
o Carton audit - performed to verify that the product is packed as requested, carton
markings are correct and to perform the drop test.
o Workmanship audit - performed to verify the quality of each component of the
product.
o Assembly audit - performed to verify that all components and hardware can be
assembled and to test the functionality of the assembled product.
4. Tools needed to perform an Inspection

• Product Inspection form
• Sampling Plans
• Defect Classification Lists
• Complete SIP file ( phases 1 & 2)
• Measurement Tape
• Inspection Station
• Calculator
Product Inspection form and Resource document
To record the results of the inspection and any defects or deviations found during each
audit Targets expects factories to complete the Targets Product Inspection form. The
resource document will guide you, step by step, in completing all crucial information
needed on the form.
Example: Product Inspection Form Softlines
Measurement Worksheet and Resource document - SL/SH Only
Where Product is requested a Measurement Audit inspector must use and record the
measurement audit using the Measurement worksheet.
Example: Measurement Worksheet
Note: Target recommends using the Target forms for recording your internal inspections
but not required – if not using the Target form, must be capturing the same information
on a Vendor/Factory form for TCPS to review.
Note: Product Inspections forms and worksheets can be downloaded from

Partnersonline website or you can contact your local TSS office to submit you them.
Sampling Plans
• Target expects factories to use the Target Sampling Plans as a minimum
requirement.
• The inspector during the workmanship audits should pull the exact number of
samples to inspect based upon the sampling plan used
• The Sampling Plan determines the number of units that should be inspected based
on the quantity of goods available.
• The Target Sampling Plan applies to Softlines (AQL 2.5/2.5), Softhome (AQL
2.5/2.5) and Hardgoods (AQL 2.5/4.0) products and is used for all inspections
Note: Ready To Assemble (RTA) products have a separate procedure and Sampling
plan due to the characteristic’s of the product
Workmanship Sampling Plan
• For HG, major defects are calculated using a 2.5 AQL and minor defects are
calculated using a 4.0 AQL.
Major AQL Minor AQL
Lot Size Pull Size (Pass On) (Major) (Pass On) (Minor)
<=3,200 50 3 2.5 4 4.0
3,201 – 10,000 80 4 2.5 6 4.0
> 10,000 125 6 2.5 9 4.0
• For SH/SL major defects are calculated using a 2.5 AQL and minor defects are
calculated using a 2.5 AQL.
Major AQL Minor AQL
Lot Size Pull Size (Pass On) (Major) (Pass On) (Minor)
<=3,200 50 3 2.5 3 2.5
3,201 – 10,000 80 4 2.5 4 2.5
> 10,000 125 6 2.5 6 2.5
• All samples are evaluated for critical, major and minor defects.
o Each defective sample can have multiple defects, critical, major and minor
o Each major and minor defect is measured as one point.
o There is a zero tolerance for critical defects (safety and regulatory).
■ A single critical defect will FAIL the inspection.
o Each defective unit can be counted for critical, major and minor but only once for
each type
o All defects found are recorded on the Product Inspection Form.
o A workmanship audit FAILS if major and or minor defective items are over the
acceptable number and if any critical defects are found.
Measurement Sampling Plan - Used for Softhome and Softlines products only, during
the measurement audit.
Sample Pull Size Accept on AQL 6.5 Accept on AQL 6.5
Major Defects Minor Defects
32 5 5
50 7 7
65 8 8
80 10 10
• Sample pull size is calculated on size/color (DPCI level) available during the audit.
• The total minimum pull is 32 pieces, a minimum of one (1) piece per DPCI. When
pulling the extra units to reach the appropriate pull size the inspector should use a
weighted average and pull samples across all sizes and colors (DPCI).
o If there are more than 32 DPCIs, the pull size will be 50.
o Maximum pull size is 80 pieces
• The inspector evaluates samples pulled against Targets product specifications.
• All points of measure must be recorded on the measurement worksheet.
• Each item in the sample pull will be evaluated for both major and minor defects
• Major defects will equal one point and are defined as a measure out of tolerance that
jumps to the next or prior size.
• Minor defects will equal one point and are defined as a measure out of tolerance that
does NOT jump to the next or prior size.
• Major and minor defects count as one point each.
• Major and minor defects will use separate AQLs to calculate pass/fail of the
inspection.
• All defects must be recorded.
o Each defective unit may have multiple defects.
o Each defective unit can be counted for both major and minor but only once
for each type.
• Defective units can only be counted once for major and once for minor.
• A measurement audit fails if major or minor defective items are over the acceptable
number of defects.
Note: Sampling Plans can be downloaded from Partnersonline website or you can
contact your local TSS office to submit you them to you.
Note: A single unit cannot have more than a 1 point for major and 1 point for minor, even
if multiple points of measure out of tolerance are found.
Defect Classification List
• Inspections are performed using Target’s Defect Classification List (DCL) based on
the product category (Softlines- Softhome – Hardgoods and Ready To Assemble)
• Defects are classified into three types:
o Critical Defects are unacceptable defects that could risk the safety and/or health
of Target guest and are in violation of regulatory procedures.
o Critical Defects include all performance related defects and any deviation from
the product and package specification
o A single critical defect (safety and regulatory) found will fail the inspection
(Critical Defect = Auto Fail)
Example: Critical Defect Code
SR003 Any sharp point or edge on children’s product Critical
o Major Defects are a serious defect that affects appearance, performance,

durability or functionality to such a degree that a guest would not buy the product
if they saw the defect.
o Major Defects include all construction related and appearance related defects
Example: Major Defect Code
V024 Chipped Major
o Minor Defects are a deviation from Target construction specifications and quality
standards that affects appearance, performance, durability or functionality and
reduces its salability at full price.
Example: Minor Defect Code
R041 Darts Poorly Shaped with large bubbles at the end Minor
Note: The Defect Classification List must be downloaded from the POL website or you
can contact your Vendor or local TSS office to obtain a copy. It is also highly
recommended that you use the Target’s DCL when doing your factory internal inspection
to ensure consistency and comparison between your internal and TCPS inspection
results.
Complete SIP Packet (phases 1 & 2)
• The Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) is a formal documentation of production

activities maintained by Vendor/Factory. It is the factory’s responsibility to formally
document results of production data in addition to Target’s requirements and they
must be made available to TCPS for review upon request.
• The SIP contains all needed information to verify if you are achieving all Target
requirements.
• To help Vendors/Factories understand and complete the SIP, Target has created an
SIP Checklist which drives you step by step on completing the requirement.
• It is crucial to have SIP available and on hand during all factory and TCPS
inspections.
• SIP Checklists can be downloaded from Partnersonline website or you can contact
your local TSS office to submit you them.
SH/SL only - Measurement tape

• An accurate measurement tape is an essential tool for conducting the measurement
audit and to verify Product specifications.
• For Softlines, Target recommends the use of a fibreglass measurement tape.
• All Target specifications are in inches, the tape should measure in inches.
• The measurement tape should be checked (monthly or more frequently) to ensure
the tape measure has not stretched and is still precise.
Inspection Station or Room
• The Inspection Station or Room should be:

o Clean
o In a location with sufficient lighting
o Off the production floor and away from foot traffic
o Have enough room around the table for the inspector to place the units to be
inspected and those units that have not been inspected
• The table should be large enough to easily handle the merchandise that is being
inspected
Note: It is recommended that the table is neutral gray (Munsell N7 Grey) for best review
of color consistency.
Calculator - The factory will need a calculator to calculate the percentage of units
to pull.
5. Booking a TCPS Inspection

• Vendor/Factory needs to plan in advance for booking a TCPS inspection.
• Vendor/Factory is requested to use the Vendor Inspection Request Form (VIRF) for
booking an inspection.
• This form is available in POL or can be forward to you by your Vendor or your local
TSS representative.
• All required fields must be completed and sent by email or by fax to your Local TSS
inspection office.
• Appointments should be made at least 7 days prior to Inspection date.
• Inspections take place during business hours. NO Inspection will be conducted on
weekends or national holidays.
• Any cancelled or re-scheduled inspections should be requested at least 3 working
days prior by written notice.
• The Factory must have performed their internal DUPRO and/or FRI with a
satisfactory result and records made available for TCPS inspector to review.
Note: If any booked inspection can not take place, the TCPS team should be notified
immediately.
Note: Charges will be assessed for:

• Being unprepared for a TCPS, Target or 3rd Party inspection.
• Failure to provide access to any TCPS, Target or 3rd party representative exhibiting
proper identification.
• SIP phases not complete according to type of inspection.
• Shipping products to Target without a passed TCPS FRI inspection.
Hardgoods: Example for a Factory FRI Inspection
• Vendor “Tuscany Ceramic” is ready for their internal Final Inspection and has a
Purchase Order of 10,000 Dinner Plates (100% packed in shipping cartons with
complete packing list)
Note: for FRI inspections the minimum requirement is 100% produced and 80%
packed in shipping cartons. For DUPRO the available quantity is based on finished
goods. Goods do not need to be floor ready in shipping cartons.
• The inspector needs to determine the quantity of the sample pull size using the
Target Sampling Plan Hardgoods grid against the available quantity.
Target PO Quantity
• For this Inspection the 80 plates must be pulled from the purchase order/cartons and
inspected.
o No more than 4 Major defects will be accepted (AQL 2.5)

o No more than 6 Minor defects will be accepted (AQL 4.0)
• The 80 plates must be pulled in proportion to color quantities of the Available PO

Quantity
• The inspector will calculate the percentage of plates ordered per color against the
available PO Quantity.
Target PO Quantity
• Calculating the Percentage of plates ordered by Color
o Color Green represents 10% of the total quantity available so the inspector will
pull 10% of the total Sample pull qty (10% of 80= 8 plates) in this color.
o Color Blue represents 50% of the total quantity available so the inspector will pull
50% of the total Sample pull qty (50% of 80= 40 plates) in this color.
o Color Yellow represents 40% of the total available quantity so the inspector will
pull 40% of the total sample pull qty (40% of 80=32 plates) in this color.
Total Sample pull 8 (Green) + 40 (Blue) + 32 (Yellow) = 80 pieces
• The quantity of plates that need to be inspected and the quantity per color, the
inspector must calculate the number of cartons to pull the units from.
• No more than 3 units per carton can be pulled. Inspector must divide the each DPCI
pull per 3 to obtain the number of cartons needed.
Pull 3 cartons (Green) + 14 cartons (Blue) + 11 cartons (Yellow) = 28 cartons
Note: If each carton contains 1 unit, then pull one carton per DPCI quantity. If each
carton contains 2 units, then divide quantity per 2 of the sample pull.
Note: Carton Audit is required during FRI inspections and can be only performed at
DUPRO if the merchandise is available in cartons.
• The inspector now knows that to perform the inspection 28 cartons must be pulled in
order to get the 80 plates (8 plates in Green, 40 plates in Blue and 32 plates in
Yellow).
• Inspector obtains the HG Product Inspection Form and completes it with initial
information and sample quantity as indicated in the Resource Document.
• Inspector pull cartons and verifies, during FRI only, that the total number of cartons
available is the same as indicated in the Packing list.
• Every carton should have an equal opportunity to be pulled during the carton audit.
When selecting cartons, it’s important not to ignore those cartons difficult to reach.
• In the case pictured here, you can see the inspector is placing a sticker on the
cartons to be pulled. He is selecting cartons on the bottom and middle, and not just
selecting the cartons on the top and on the outside (which are easier to be pulled)
• After pulling the 28 cartons for the inspection, select one additional carton and
perform the Drop Test. Before starting the test the inspector verifies carton selected
is not damaged.
• Perform the drop test in accordance with weight and height requirements.
Note: Information on Drop test procedure is available in Partnersonline
• Record on the Product Inspection Form the results of the Drop test (pass or fail)
• Using the quantity of cartons pulled in the previous step (28 cartons) select one
carton at DPCI level.
• Of these 3 cartons inspect shipping cartons using the information on the PO or
packing list as well as the shipping and packing information that is part of the SIP (as
applicable). Using this information check or confirm the following:
o Check for damaged cartons
o Check carton labels and markings
o Check carton measurements
o Check carton weight for two-man lift cartons (place on scale at factory)
o Check case labeling
o Confirm colors, sizes, and quantity of assortment in cartons are correct
o Confirm country of origin matches product labels
o Confirm packing method is according to Floor Ready Requirements or Targets
requirements
• For any defects found during the carton audit must be classified using the DCL and
entered in the Product Inspection Form
Carton inspection results
• PASS – If no errors found, continue with inspection
• FAIL – If one error is found, the carton audit fails.
• When the carton audit fails, the inspection continues but the vendor/factory must re-
inspect 100% of cartons, correct all issues and re conduct a 2nd carton audit and re-
perform the carton audit as before.
• Complete the carton audit inspection results in the Product Inspection Form
• Once carton audit is completed the inspector must select the samples (80) for the
Workmanship Audit from all cartons previously selected (3 units per carton).
Best Practices
• For DUPRO inspection, if merchandise is not in cartons, the inspector should pull
samples in a manner to reach a good representation of the entire lot
• Spread all units divided per color on a table. This way you will be able to verify the
consistency of color.
Currently there is no standardized measurement audit process for Hardgoods defined,

but a measurement audit should be conducted for any Hardgoods product that has
measurements and tolerances indicated on the Vendor or Target Product Specification
or Retail Packaging.
• The workmanship audit reviews all samples (plates) pulled (80) against: spec for
construction, color standards, elements of the SIP, functionality and safety
requirements. The method of workmanship should be consistent for each product
and, if applicable, should cover the entire product both inside and out (if applicable).
The inspector must verify:
Check inside and outside of item for:

• Any construction technique affecting the
performance of the product
• Crooked and/or incorrect shape
• Soil, oil, dirt marks
• Scratches, cracks, chipped parts
Check all working components and functionality of

the product:
• Leakage
• Stability
• Warping
• Moving Parts
• Open and Close
• Intended Function
• Moisture content
Check
• If applicable weight of product against
specifications
• Volume
• Dimensions
• Unit of Measurement
• Quantity of Units
Check all labels-hang tags for:

• Correct position
• Missing or incorrect RN# information, Size,
Country of Origin against test reports/SIP
• Care instructions and warning information against
test reports/SIP
• Distribution Statements
Check/verify Samples against:
• Components of the SIP
• Approved (Red Seal) sample
• Pre-Production (Yellow Seal) sample
• Target specifications and requirements (Minimum
Standards)
Check colors:
• Against approved color standards (if applicable)
for consistency in the sample pull lot.
• Verify finish quality against approved swatches
and approved sealed samples
Check approved trim suppliers and packing method.

• Artwork
• Hang Tags
• Price Labels
• If applicable divide defects per category and keep them in a separate area of the
inspection room. Use stickers to identify defects found on an item.
• All areas of a unit must be evaluated. Don’t stop at the first defect found on a unit.
Complete the workmanship audit based on the product category on the unit and
record, if applicable, multiple defects on the same unit.
Note: This is very important to understand the overall quality level of the product,
helps to identify trends and give a clear picture of the correction action need.
• You must never stop the workmanship audit even if the number of defects exceeds
the acceptable level.
• Once all units are inspected (80), complete the Workmanship Audit section of the
form, entering all defects found and the result of the Workmanship Audit.
Note: All defects found on a component/unit must be noted on the product inspection
form, but only one score point per defect category, Major and Minor, per unit is
calculated.
• Use the Target Sampling Plan to verify if the Workmanship Audit is accepted or
rejected.
o The Workmanship Audit is rated acceptable if the score of the Major and Minor
defective units is less than or equal to the accept level
o The Workmanship Audit is failed if the score of Major or Minor defective units is
greater than the accept level.
Example during the Workmanship audit the following Defects were found:
Three units chipped - 3 Major defects
Four units with variation in color - 3 Major defects
Two units with Pin holes - 2 Major defects-Principal viewing area
Total Major defects found during the workmanship audit 8
Workmanship Audit fails
• Complete the rest of the required information in the Product Inspection Form.
• Insert test #, Test report date and results of 3rd party testing Lab.
• Enter the Inspection Result (Carton Audit + Measurement Audit, if applicable and
Workmanship Audit)
Note: Inspection is rated acceptable only if Carton, Measurement and Workmanship

Audits pass, with satisfactory testing results.
• Sign and date the Product Inspection Form and insert in the SIP. TCPS will request
to verify your internal inspection report before proceeding with their inspection.
If Inspection Passes
• Submit the Vendor Inspection Request Form (VIRF) to your local TCPS office and
prepare for the TCPS inspection.
• If the inspection passed take note of the defects found and implement a corrective
action plan for the future orders. Defective units found during our internal inspection
should be segregated and replaced with acceptable quality.
• Best Practice If the overall inspection passes, the inspectors should recognize a
defect trend in the performed inspection that could affect the results of the TCPS
inspection and/or overall quality of the merchandise. Any defect code or point of
measure found during the inspection that is repetitive, should be considered suspect
and may present a risk to the overall quality. In these cases it is highly
recommended to perform a detailed investigation.
If inspection Fails
• The Factory Inspector must review with Factory QA Management all defective units
found during the inspection, implement a corrective action Plan and insert in the
comment section of the inspection form the corrective action taken.
• Factory should determine and understand:
o Why the inspection failed
o The root causes
o If the problems are correctable
o What is the overall impact on the order in terms of Quantity and On-time delivery
o What can be done to ensure the problem/defects do not re-occur in a future
production
• All cartons must be re opened and 100% re-inspected. Corrective Action must be
implemented immediately in production line in the case of DUPRO and for future
the inspector must perform a 2nd inspection before scheduling a TCPS inspection,
obtaining a satisfactory result.
• All second quality goods should be quarantined, making sure they are isolated and
records should be available for TCPS review.
• If after having gone through all possible options and solutions, the factory is not able
to correct the defect/issue, the production must be stopped. Immediately contact
your local TSS office and provide full detailed information (size, color, quantities &
impact on delivery dates) on the defect/issue that could not be corrected.
Softhome: Example for a Towel Factory FRI Inspection
• Vendor “Happy Towels” is ready for their internal Final Inspection; they have a
Purchase Order of 10,000 towel sets (100% packed in shipping cartons with
complete packing list). Each set contains one Hand towel (20x30), one Wash towel
(13x13) and one Bath towel (30x56)
goods. Goods do not need to be floor ready in shipping cartons
Target Sampling Plan grid Softhome against the available quantity.
Target PO Quantity
Towel
Set of
sets
Towels Green Red Pink White Blue Total
Available Quantity 1000 4000 2000 1000 2000 10.000
• For this Inspection 80 towel sets must be pulled from the purchase order/cartons and
inspected.
o No more than 4 Major defects will be accepted

o No more than 4 Minor defects will be accepted
• The 80 towel sets must be pulled in proportion to colors quantities of the Available
PO Quantity
• The inspector will calculate the percentage of sets ordered per color against the
available PO Quantity.
Target PO Quantity
Towel
Set of
sets
Towels Green Red Pink White Blue Total
% of Total Available Quantity 10% 40% 20% 10% 20% 100%

# of pieces to pull 8 32 16 8 16 80
• Calculating the Percentage of sets ordered by Color
o Colors Green and White represent 10% of the total quantity available so the
inspector will pull 10% of the Sample pull (10% of 80= 8 sets) in these colors.
o Colors Pink and Blue represent 20% of the total quantity available so the
inspector will pull 20% of the Sample pull (20% of 80= 16 sets) in these colors.
o Color Red represents 40% of the total available quantity so the inspector will pull
40% of the sample pull (40% of 80=32 sets) in this color.
• Established the quantity of sets that need to be inspected and the quantity per color,
the inspector must calculate the number of cartons to pull the units from.
• No more than 3 units per carton can be pulled. Inspector must divide the each DPCI
pull per 3 to obtain the number of cartons needed.
Towel
Set sets
of Towels Green Red Pink White Blue Total
% of Total Available Quantity 10% 40% 20% 10% 20% 100%

# of pieces to pull 8 32 16 8 16 80
Number of cartons to pull 3 11 6 3 6 29
Pull 3 cartons (Green) + 3 cartons (White) + 6 cartons (Pink) + 6 cartons (Blue) + 11

cartons (Red) = 29 cartons
• The inspector now knows that to perform the inspection 29 cartons must be pulled
and 80 towels sets (8 towel sets in Green and White, 16 towel sets in Blue and Pink
and 32 towel sets in Red) will be inspected from those cartons.
• Inspector obtains the SH Product Inspection Form and completes it with initial
When selecting Cartons, it’s important not to ignore those cartons difficult to reach.
• Using the quantity of cartons pulled in the previous step (29) select one carton at
DPCI level.
o Confirm packing method is according to Floor Ready Requirements or clients
packing method
• For any defects found during the carton audit must be classified using the DCL and
entered in the inspection form

inspect 100% of cartons for the DPCI that failed and correct all issues and re conduct
a 2nd carton audit on that specific DPCI pulling 10 cartons.
• Complete the carton audit inspection results in the inspection form using the
Resource document
Measurement and Workmanship Audit from all cartons previously selected (3 units
per carton).
Best Practices
• Spread all units divided per size and color on a table. This way you will be able to
verify the consistency of color
• The measurement audit reviews samples against the spec to ensure Points Of
Measure (POM) are within tolerance.
• Use the following Sample Plan for measurement audit to calculate the quantity of
towel sets to measure.
Target Measurement Sample Plan
32 5 5
50 7 7
65 8 8
80 10 10
• The total minimum pull is 32 pieces or a minimum of one (1) piece per DPCI.
Set of Towels Green Red Pink White Blue Total

• The Inspector based on the purchase order quantity, size/color (DPCI level), pulls a
minimum of one set per color per size (5) from the units pulled from the cartons.
• Then to reach the minimum sample pull of 32 the inspector will need to select extra
units. When pulling the extra units to reach the appropriate pull size the inspector
should use a weighted average and pull samples across all sizes and colors (DPCI).
• Using the appropriate method of measure, the inspector evaluates all points of
measure (POM) of each component of the set against the specification sheet and
records the results on the measurement worksheet.
• For Softhome review www.partnersonline.com>Product Development>Requirements
and Procedures>Product Development Quality Assurance>Hardlines Product
Development>Method of Measure.
• For DUPRO – Inspector must evaluate all Points Of Measure (POM) indicated in the
specification sheet/sketches.
• For FRI - The inspector must evaluate the Key Points Of Measure (KPOM) indicated
in the specification sheet/sketches and any POM that faced issues during the Dupro
inspection.
Note: if no KPOM are indicated measure all POM

o If a POM is out of Tolerance this is considered a Minor defect and counts as 1 pt
o If a POM is out of Tolerance and jumps into the next size range this is considered
a Major defect and counts as 1 pt.
• One unit cannot have more than a 1 pt score for minor and 1 pt score for major, but
all POM must be recorded on the measurement worksheet
• After all components of each towel set (Bath, Hand and Wash) have been measured
and recorded in the measurement worksheet, the inspector must calculate if the
measurement audit passes or fails. Use the instructions on the measurement
worksheet to make this determination.
Best Practice - At the same time of the measurement audit, the inspector should
complete the workmanship audit portion of the inspection for the pieces that are being
reviewed.
• Complete the measurement section of the Product Inspection Form with all needed
information and insert the result of the measurement audit. Attach to the Product
Inspection Form to the Measurement worksheet.
• Proceed with the workmanship audit.
Note: Even if the Measurement audit fails, you must to proceed and complete the
Workmanship audit
• The workmanship audit reviews all samples (sets) pulled (80) against: spec for
construction, color standards, elements of the SIP file, functionality and safety
and, if applicable, should cover the entire product both inside and out.
• The inspector must verify:
• Broken and/or skipped stitches
• Crooked and/or incorrect stitch type
• SPI (stitch per inch)
• Drill holes, needle holes
Check all working components:

• Zippers work properly to ensure they are in
proper working condition:
• Buttons fit into button holes
• Snaps open and close correctly

Country of Origin, Fiber Content, (against test
reports)
• Care instructions (against test reports)
• DCPI/Factory ID # label (if applicable).
Check/verify against:
• Target specifications and requirements
(Minimum Standards)
• Weight
Check security of all attachments if applicable:

• All accessories must be exercised/tested to
ensure secure attachment
Note: Target has a zero tolerance policy towards

safety issues (even if acceptable testing results
are available)
Check colors:
• Against approved color standards (if
applicable), Shade bands, first dye lots
approvals for consistency in the sample pull
lot.
• verify hand feel-fabric quality against approved
swatches and approved sealed samples
• Check approved trim suppliers and packing

method.
• Hang Tags
• Price labels
• If product is required to be needle detected

during production (Children’s and all Softhome
products) all units of the sample pull must pass
thru the needle detector.
safety issues. With one unit found contaminated
the inspection fails
Best Practice - If applicable divide defects per category and keep them in a separate
area of the inspection room. Use stickers to identify defects found on an item.
Complete all steps of the workmanship audit on the unit and record, if applicable,
multiple defects on the same unit. This is very important to understand the overall
quality level of the product, helps to identify trends and gives a clear picture of the
correction action need.
• You must never stop the inspection/audit even if the number of points/defects
exceeds the acceptable level.
• Once inspected all units (80), complete the Workmanship Audit section of the
Product Inspection Form, entering all defects found and the result of the
Workmanship Audit.
Note: All defects found on a component/unit must be noted on the inspection form, but
only one score point per defect category per unit is calculated.
rejected.
o The Workmanship Audit is rated acceptable if the score of defective units adds
up to a number less than or equal to the accept level
o The Workmanship Audit is failed if the score of defective units is greater than the
accept level.
One unit with irregular shape - 1 Major defect
Three units with holes - 3 Major defects
Two units with shading issues - 2 Major defects
Two units with soil (oil) marks - 2 Major defects
Total Major defects found during the workmanship audit 8
• Enter the Inspection Result (Carton Audit + Measurement Audit & Workmanship
Audit)

• Submit the Vendor Request Inspection Form (VIRF) to your local TCPS office and
• Even if the inspection passed take note of the defects found and implement a
corrective action plan for the future orders. Defective units found during our internal
inspection should be segregated and replaced with acceptable quality.
If inspection Fails
o The root causes
production
implemented immediately in production line in the case of Dupro and for future
• All second quality goods should be quarantine, making sure they are isolated and
Softlines: Example for a Factory internal FRI Inspection
• Factory “Smart Garment” is ready for their internal Final Inspection; they have a
Purchase Order of 10,000 Men’s Jackets (100% packed in shipping cartons with
complete packing list)
Note: for FRI inspections the minimum requirement is100% produced and 80%
Target Sampling Plan grid Softlines against the available quantity.
Target PO Quantity
Size S M L XL Total
Military Green Quantity 1000 2000 2000 1000 6000
Navy Quantity 1000 1000 1000 1000 4000
PO Quantity 2000 3000 3000 2000 10,000
• For this Inspection 80 pieces must be pulled from the purchase order/cartons and
inspected.
o No more than 4 Major defects will be accepted

o No more than 4 Minor defects will be accepted
• The 80 pieces must be pulled in proportion to Size and Color Quantities from the
Available PO Quantity
• The inspector will calculate the percentage of each size and color against the total
Available PO Quantity (10,000 pieces)
NAVY
Size S M L XL Total
Navy Available PO Quantity 1000 1000 1000 1000 4000
% of Total Available PO Quantity 10% 10% 10% 10% 40%
Navy # of pieces to pull 8 8 8 8 32
• Calculating the Percentage by Size and Color, Navy against PO qty by size
o Sizes S, M, L & XL represent 10% in each size of the total quantity available so
the inspector will pull 10% of the Sample pull (10% of 80= 8 pieces for each
size).
o Total Navy pulled is 32 pieces
Military Green
Size S M L XL Total
Military Green Available PO Quantity 1000 2000 2000 1000 6000
% of Total Available PO Quantity 10% 20% 20% 10% 40%
Military Green # of pieces to pull 8 16 16 8 48
• Calculating the Percentage by Size and Color – Military Green against PO qty
o Sizes S & XL represent 10% in each size of the total quantity available so the
inspector will pull 10% of the Sample pull (10% of 80= 8 pieces for sizes S & XL)
o Sizes M & L represent 20% in each size of the total quantity available so the
inspector will pull 20% of the Sample pull (20% of 80= 16 piece for sizes M & L)
o Total Military Green pulled is 48 pieces
Total Sample Pull 32 (Navy) + 48 (Military Green) = 80 pieces
• After the quantity of pieces that need to be inspected per color/size, the inspector
must calculate the number of cartons to pull the units from.
• No more than 3 units per carton can be pulled. Inspector must divide each DPCI
(size/color) pull qty by 3 to obtain the number of cartons needed.
Size S M L XL
Navy # of pieces to pull 8 8 8 8
Number of Cartons to pull 3 3 3 3
Size S M L XL
Military Green # of pieces to pull 8 16 16 8
Number of cartons to pull 3 6 6 3
Pull 30 cartons (3 cartons each for sizes S, M, L & XL in Navy, 3 cartons each for
sizes S & XL and 6 cartons each for sizes M & L in Military Green)
• The inspector now knows that to perform the inspection 30 cartons must be pulled
and 80 units (8 per size in Navy and S & XL in Military Green and 16 per size M & L)
will be inspected from those cartons.
• Inspector obtains the SL Product Inspection Form and completes it with initial
When selecting Cartons, it’s important not to ignore those cartons difficult to reach.
• Using the quantity of cartons pulled in the previous step (30) select one carton at
DPCI (size/color) level.
o Confirm packing method is according to Floor Ready Requirements or clients
packing method
• For any defects found during the carton audit must be classified using the SL DCL
and entered in the inspection form
inspect 100% of cartons for the DPCI that failed and correct all issues and re conduct
a carton 2nd audit on that specific DPCI pulling 10 cartons.
• Complete the carton audit inspection results in the Product Inspection Form using
the Resource document
Measurement and Workmanship Audit from all cartons previously selected (3 units
per carton).
Best Practices
• Spread all units divided per size and color on a table. If units are on a hanger place
on a rack. This way you will be able to verify the consistency of color
• The measurement audit reviews samples against the spec to ensure Points Of
Measure (POM) are within tolerance.
• The inspector uses the following Sample Plan for the measurement audit to calculate
the quantity of units to pull to measure.
Target Measurement Sample Plan
32 5 5
50 7 7
65 8 8
80 10 10
• The total minimum pull is 32 pieces or a minimum of one (1) piece per DPCI.
Size S M L XL Total
Military Green Quantity 1000 2000 2000 1000 6000
Navy Quantity 1000 1000 1000 1000 4000
PO Quantity 2000 3000 3000 2000 10,000
• Inspector based on the purchase order quantity, size/color, pulls a minimum of one
piece per color per size (8pcs) from the units pulled from the cartons.
• To reach the minimum sample pull of 32 the inspector will need to select extra
pieces. When pulling the extra units to reach the appropriate pull size the inspector
should use a weighted average and pull samples across all sizes and colors (DPCI).
• Using the appropriate method of measure, the inspector evaluates all points of
measure (POM) against the specification sheet and records the audit on the
measurement worksheet.
• For Targets Softlines Method of Measure review www.partnersonline.com>Product
Development>Requirements and Procedures>Softlines Product
Development>Method of Measure.
• For DUPRO – Inspector must evaluate all Points Of Measure (POM) indicated in the
specification sheet/sketches.
• For FRI - The inspector must evaluate the all Key Point Of Measure (KPOM)
indicated in the specification sheet/sketches/measurement Worksheet information
and any POM that were issues from DUPRO.
o If a POM is out of Tolerance this is considered a Minor defect and counts as 1 pt
o If a POM is out of Tolerance and jumps into the next size range this is considered
a Major defect and counts as 1 pt.
• One unit cannot have more than a 1 pt score for minor and 1 pt score for major, but
all POM must be recorded on the measurement worksheet
• After all pieces have been measured and recorded in the measurement worksheet,
the inspector must calculate if the measurement audit passes or fails. Use the
instructions on the measurement worksheet to make this determination.
Best Practice - At the same time of the measurement audit, the inspector should
complete the workmanship audit portion of the inspection for the pieces that are being
reviewed.
• Complete the measurement section of the Product Inspection Form with all needed
information and add the result of the measurement audit
Note: Even if the Measurement audit fails, you must to proceed and complete the
Workmanship audit
• The workmanship audit reviews all samples pulled (80) against: spec for
construction, color standards, elements of the SIP, assembly, functionality and safety
and, if applicable, should cover the entire product both inside and out.
The inspector must verify:

• Broken and/or skipped stitches
• Crooked and/or incorrect stitch type
• SPI (stitch per inch) requirements
• Drill or dart holes
• Needle holes and/or needle chew
Check all working components:

• Zippers work properly to ensure they are in proper
working condition:
• Buttons fit into button holes
• Snaps open and close correctly
Note: If the product is on a hanger, it should be
removed from the hanger during inspection.

Country of Origin, Fiber Content, (against test
reports)
• Care instructions (against test reports)
• DCPI/Factory ID # label.
Check/verify against:
• Target specifications and requirements (Minimum
Standards)
Check security of all attachments:

• All accessories must be exercised/tested to
ensure secure attachment

safety issues (even if acceptable testing results are
available)
Check colors:
• Against approved color standards (if applicable),
first dye lots approvals for consistency in the
sample pull lot and (if applicable) approved shade
band.
• Verify hand feel-fabric quality against approved
swatches and approved sealed samples
• Check approved trim suppliers and packing

method (floor ready requirements)
• Hang Tags
• Price Labels
• If product is required to be needle detected during

production (Children’s products) all units of the
sample pull must pass thru the needle detector.
safety issues. With one unit found contaminated the
inspection fails
Best Practice - If applicable divide defects per category and keep them in a separate
area of the inspection room. Use stickers to identify defects found on an item.
Complete all steps of the workmanship audit on the unit and record, if applicable,
multiple defects on the same unit. This is very important to understand the overall
quality level of the product, helps to identify trends and gives a clear picture of the
correction action need.
• You must never stop the inspection/audit even if the number of points/defects
• Once inspected all units (80), complete the Workmanship section of the Product
Inspection Form, entering all defects found and the result of the Workmanship Audit.
Note: All defects found on a garment/unit must be noted on the product inspection form,
but only one score point per defect category, Major & Minor, per unit is calculated.
Example 1: one unit is found with two minor defects. Inspector will record both defects
but will score the unit 1.pt in the major
R303/R502 1 1 Uneven cuffs/Pocket size
Example 2: one unit is found with one major defect and one minor defect. Inspector will
score 1.0 in each defect category
F001/R502 1 1 1 Hole in yarn/Pocket size
rejected
o The Workmanship Audit is rated acceptable if the score of defective units adds
up to a number less than or equal to the accept level
o The Workmanship Audit is failed if the score of defective units is greater than the
accept level.
Three garments with Non uniform shaped pockets - 3 Major defects
Three garments with broken stitches – 3 Major defects
One garment with puckering – 1 Major defect
Total Major defects found during the Workmanship Audit 7

• Enter the Inspection Result (Carton Audit + Measurement Audit & Workmanship
Audit)

corrective action plan for the future orders. Defective units found during the
inspection should be segregated and replaced with acceptable quality.
If inspection Fails
o The root causes
production
implemented immediately in production line in the case of Dupro and for future
you’re your Local TSS office and provide full detailed information (size, color,
quantities & impact on delivery dates) on the defect/issue that could not be
corrected.
Ready To Assemble (RTA): Example for a Factory FRI Inspection
• Vendor “Nice Table “has a Purchase Order of 9.000 Console Tables ready for their
internal FINAL inspection (100% packed in shipping cartons with complete packing
list)
• The inspector needs to determine the quantity of units to inspect using the RTA
Target Sampling Plan RTA grid against the available quantity.
Target PO Quantity
Console Table Total
Available Quantity 9000 9.000
• For this Inspection 32 units (Console tables) must be pulled from the purchase
order/cartons and inspected.
• Due to the unique packing method of RTA products the inspector must pull 32
Cartons
When selecting Cartons, it’s important not to ignore those cartons difficult to reach. In
the case pictured here, you can see the inspector is placing a sticker on the cartons
to be pulled. He is selecting cartons on the bottom and middle, and not just selecting
the cartons on the top and on the outside (which are easier to be pulled)
• Once pulled all needed cartons (32) for the inspection, select one Carton and
perform the Drop Test
• Drop Test - before starting the test the inspector verifies carton selected is not
damaged
• Perform the drop test in accordance with weight and height requirements.
Note information on Drop test procedure is available in Partnersonline
• Record on the inspection report the results of the Drop test (pass or fail)
• Once performed the Drop test Inspect all shipping cartons left (31) using the
information on the PO or packing list as well as the shipping and packing information
that is part of the SIP (as applicable). Using this information check or confirm the
following:
o Confirm packing method is according to transit test report
• For any defects found during the carton audit must be classified using the RTA DCL
and entered in the inspection form
Currently there is no standardized measurement audit process for Hardgoods defined,

but a measurement audit should be conducted for any Hardgoods product that has
measurements and tolerances indicated on the Vendor or Target product specification.
• The inspector conducts the workmanship audit on all components/units from the
selected cartons. Open one carton at a time and inspect the components of that
unit/product.
Check components against SIP approved elements (if

applicable):
• Approved material (hardware)
• Item set up form or Vendors generated
Specifications
• Labels (country of origin, warning label, ect)
• Approved samples (Red and Yellow)
Check:
• Number of components, parts, hardware, etc
against the assembly instructions
• Component information stickers against assembly
instructions
• Measurements and Shape of components (if
applicable)
Check components for:
• Workmanship defects; scratches, dents, cracks
etc
• Shading between components and approved
shade band
• Poor finish of surface, for sanding or bubbling
defects etc
• Sharp and rough edges etc
Check:
• Moister content. Tolerance based of product
category and testing protocols (indoor or outdoor)
• All areas of a single component must be evaluated. Don’t stop at the first defect
found. Complete all steps of the workmanship audit on each component of the
product and record, if applicable, multiple defects on the same component/product.
This is very important to understand the overall quality level of the product. Helps to
identify trends and gives a clear picture of the correction action needed.
• You must never stop the workmanship audit even if the number of points/defects
• Once inspected all units (32) of the workmanship audit, complete the Workmanship
section of the Product Inspection Form, entering all defects found using the RTA
DCL.
Assembly Audit
• Based the on the assemble sampling plan the inspectors pulls, from the
workmanship audit, the indicated quantity to perform the assembling audit
• Eight tables need to be assembled.

• Using the assembly instructions the inspector assembles one unit at the time.
• Once assembled the unit the inspector checks for:
o Cracks formed during assembling phase.
o Screws pointing out.
o Uneven or gaps between assembled components.
o Uneven surfaces or sharp/rough edges. etc
• The inspector must verify:
o Measurements of the assemble unit against assembled measurements indicate
on the packaging or if applicable Vendors Generate Specifications.
o All function and/or operational areas should be tested.
Draws should open smoothly and close properly, Locks and key should
function as intended, etc
o Unit should be place on top of a glass surface to verify its stability (if applicable
due to size)
o Once assembled all units these should be lined up side by side for comparison of
color, height and construction against the approved samples (Red and Yellow).
• Using the RTA DCL the inspector records all the defects found in the Product
Inspection Form.
Note: The maximum points a ‘unit’ can receive is 1.0 i.e. unit inspected receives two
major (1.0) points and one minor (0.5) point; the total given to that unit is 1.0 not 2.5.
But two or more minors on each unit is counted as 1.0 point, which is determined by
severity of the defects.
• Using the Sampling Plans the inspector determines if the inspection (Carton,
Workmanship and Assemble Audit) has passed or fails.
Note: there is a zero tolerance during the assemble audit for Mal function, not
operational as intended and/or assembling defects (unit cannot be assembled).
Workmanship Audit – Maximum Major Defects Points Tolerance
• The workmanship audit fails if the total major defects exceed the acceptable level.
Workmanship Audit – Maximum Total Defects Points Tolerance
• The workmanship Audit fails if the total defects points (minor plus major or only
major) exceed the acceptable level.
Note: Inspection is rated acceptable only if Carton, Workmanship and assembly Audit
pass, with satisfactory testing results.
• Enter inspection results in the inspection form.
• Insert test #, Test report date and results of 3rd party testing Lab (as applicable).
corrective action plan for the future orders/production. Defective units found should
be segregated and replaced with acceptable quality.
If inspection Fails
o The root causes
o what is the overall impact on the order in terms of Quantity and On-time delivery
production.
implemented immediately in production line (in the case of Dupro and for future
the inspector must perform a 2nd inspection before scheduling a TCPS inspection
TARGET’S
NEEDLE & METAL
CONTAMINATION
POLICY AND
PROCEDURE
Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination Policy and Procedure 1 of 11

TARGET’S NEEDLE AND METAL CONTAMINATION
POLICY AND PROCEDURE
Overview
Target’s policy and procedure is as follows:
Needle and Metal Contamination Policy: The regulation put in place to ensure products
which are manufactured and sold in the US market are free of any broken needle or
metal parts which could cause an injury to a Target guest.
Broken Needle Control Log and Metal Detection Procedure: Is the implementation of
guidelines and rules to be followed to ensure the Policy is achieved. This is backed up
with documentation and regular checks at the factory level.
Table of Contents
1. Needle and Metal Contamination Policy
2. Prevention
3. Detection
4. 9 Point Calibration Process
Objective
• Understand Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination Policy and Procedure

1. Needle and Metal Contamination Policy
• Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination Policy ensures that products sold in the
US market are free of any broken needle or unwanted sharp metal parts. Target will
only work with Vendors/Factories compliant with our policy.
• Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination Policy is divided into two phases:
o Prevention- Broken Needle Control Log procedure. Applies to all factories
producing Target products where needle operations are involved.
o Detection - Needle/Metal Detector in all factories producing Children’s and
Softhome products without metal trims. Target recommends all factories use
Metal detection equipment, where applicable.
• If products are discovered contaminated after they have been sold this could cause
an injury to a Target guest and would result in the following for both Vendor and
Target:
o Bad publicity
o Legal action
o Product Recall
o Financial loss
• Due to the manufacturing techniques and equipment used the following items are a
risk factor for our Target guests:
o Broken Sewing Needles
o Broken Knitting Needles
o Pins
o Staples
o Wires
o Scissors (Scissor tips)
o Other Stray Metals
o Razor blades

2. Prevention
Broken Needle Log Control Procedure
Every factory that uses any type of needle operation, regardless of product, is required
to comply with the Broken Needle Control Log procedure.
The Broken Needle Control Log should include:
o Date/Time of Incident
o Production Line
o Operation
o Operator
o Machine Type/Machine ID
o Mount Broken Needle
o Panel/Garment Destroyed – Yes or No
o Mechanic’s signature and Date
Example: Sample Broken Needle Control Log
Example: Completed Broken Needle Control Log
• Maintain a controlled needle inventory system and a broken needle control log.
• This log should include all broken parts or damaged needles along with any
corrective action taken.
• Each sewing machine should have an ID (identification number).
• Needle replacement should be done only by designated factory personnel (e.g. inline
supervisor, mechanic, needle log supervisor, etc.) to provide a log recording all parts
of a broken needle have been accounted for.
Note: Sewing operator should not have free access to spare needles.
• Production work areas are to be kept clear of unnecessary sharps (e.g. scissors,
razor blades, staples, pins and loose metal parts).
• Machines and/or operators which continue to have broken needle issues should be
reviewed and appropriate corrective action taken.
• Machines and their surrounding areas should be checked daily for needle and/or
metal contamination.
For products where a needle/metal detector is mandatory

• In the event of a needle breaking during any sewing operation, the panel or product
piece being sewn should be retrieved from the production line and checked for
broken parts.
• Broken parts should be sealed on the broken needle log control sheet indicating all
details listed above.
• If all broken parts are not accounted for, contaminated panels or product pieces
should be passed through the needle detector. If the needle detector still detects
metal parts and if after further investigation, the pieces cannot be found, the panel or
product pieces should be destroyed and recorded on the log.

For products where a needle/metal detector is not mandatory
• In the event of a needle breaking during any sewing operation, the panel or product
piece being sewn should be retrieved from the production line and checked for
broken parts.
• Broken parts should be sealed on the broken needle log control sheet indicating all
details listed above.
• If all broken parts are not accounted for, contaminated panels or product pieces
should be destroyed and recorded on the log.
• During Factory Evaluations, TCPS MT’s will check the following to ensure factory is
compliant with the Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination Policy:
o Needle Inventory System
o Broken Needle control log for accuracy and integrity of the records.
o Sewing machines have ID number and are verified against the Needle Inventory
System and Broken Needle control log.
o Check machine oil sump for any broken parts and surroundings for loose metal
parts.
o Check that sewing operator does not have access to needles and unnecessary
sharps by verifying machine surrounding and drawers.
Note: Factories found to be non-compliant with Target’s Needle and Metal

Contamination Policy will be placed on hold for corrective action.
3. Detection
Needle/Metal Detector
• All factories producing Children’s and Softhome products MUST have an appropriate
number of Needle/Metal Detectors, so as not to cause bottle necks at the point of
needle detection and to ensure all productions passes through the needle detector.
• The Needle Detector should be placed in a controlled area to ensure there is a clear
delineation of the product that has passed through the needle detector, and those
which have not.
o The controlled needle detection area should be established so that no finished
product can move to the packing/finishing area with out being passed thru the
needle detector in advance.
Note: Do not permit any metallic tools or fixtures in this area or on the person
operating the machine. Keep all unnecessary metal away from this area.

o All applicable units must pass thru the Metal Detector before the Packing phase
(in other words – sales ready)
• The Needle Detector must work at a minimum sensitivity level of 1.2mm diameter.
o A 9 point calibration procedure must take place a minimum of two times a day.
Target recommends higher frequency of checks with higher production levels.
o Target recommends Enclosed-Head Detection which ensures that this sensitivity
is guaranteed at every point.
o Tunnel or plate detectors do not guarantee total coverage due to blind spots
• It is factory’s responsibility to contact their detector supplier and obtain the

appropriate equipment to be compliant to Target requirements.
• Vendors are recommended to use trim/components that are non-ferrous and nickel
free or with finish suitable for needle/metal detectors.
o Examples of Compatible (non-ferrous) Metals are Brass, Bronze Copper and
Aluminium.
o Examples of Non-Compatible (ferrous) Metals are: Steel, iron, cobalt and nickel-
plated.
o Vendor/Factory should state, at time of purchase, that items need to be suitable

to pass through needle/metal detection equipment.
• Units should be placed on the automated conveyor belt allowing it to pass through
the detector head without manipulation.
o Detector should be calibrated by supervisor only
o Never force the product through the detector head
o Product must pass through detector without operator assistance
o Records of production detected must be kept available for TCPS to review (style-
quantity/date/hour-operator-supervisor-contamination)

Best Practice: Product passed through the detection equipment should be held in a
separate holding area, until it has been established that the next calibration test has
passed (should there be an issue between calibration tests, allows for easy rechecking
of product)
• Contaminated goods (rejected) should be kept in a separate area, making sure

potentially contaminated products do not get mixed with the accepted items.
• When any form of metal has been detected:

o Check for metal part using the hand held detector, if available, to identify
location of metal part within product.
o If found:
■ Remove Metal and re-detect product to make sure all contamination has
been removed.
■ Log and advise supervisor for decision to keep for records or return to
department/owner.
■ Identify Root Cause and take corrective action. Document the process
implemented.
o If NOT found:
■ Call supervisor
■ Destroy product
■ Identify root cause and take corrective action
■ Document and implement the process
Exception for Softhome

• Items such as area rugs or carpets that cannot be passed through the metal detector
tunnel due to width or height are to be scanned with hand held equipment with a
planned and documented sequence to ensure full coverage of item
Note: Target recommends the use of a bulk detector for large items instead of hand
equipment.

4. 9 Point Calibration Process
• The 9 Point calibration ensures that the equipment is functioning correctly and
operating at the correct sensitivity (1.2mm).
• The 9 Point calibration must be done a minimum of 2 times per shift by supervisor.
• Reports must be available for TCPS to review at anytime
Best Practice: Target recommends doing the 9 Point Calibration test every hour.
Process
1. The 9 Point Calibration check on the detector is done by dividing the metal detector
conveyor belt in 3 zones.
Example: Zones A, B, C
A B C
2. The Calibration Card, supplied by machine vendor, is passed through each of these
zones at three different height levels.
• Factories must have an approved ferrous Calibration Card from equipment
manufacturer
• Hand made calibration cards are NOT acceptable
3. The Detector sensitivity must be set at a level which is less than 1.2mm sphere to
detect the Calibration Card.
4. The Calibration Card is placed on the conveyor belt and passed through each zone –
A, B and C. Readings are recorded on a 9 Point Calibration Report.

• The 9 Point Calibration Report should be marked as follows
o Y- if the needle detection activates (alarm sounds, light activates and machine
stops) when the 1.2mm Ferrous Calibration Card is passed through the search
head.
A B C
o N - if the needle detector has no reaction (no alarm sound/light) when the 1.2mm
Ferrous Calibration Card is passed through the search head.
• If there is no reaction during the 9 point Calibration procedure the operator must stop
the machine and call the supervisor. All production must be placed on hold since last
acceptable 9 Point Calibration Report record.
• If repairs are needed, call for a qualified technician responsible for the
Needle/Mechanical detection equipment and after repair do a new 9 point Calibration
test for verification.
Example: 9 Point Calibration Report

9 PIONT CALIBRATION REPORT SUPERVISIOR
DATE TIME CLIENT/STYLE SIZE/COLOR A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 C1 C2 C3 NAME SIGNATURE
01.01.08 07.30 AM TARGET/12345 RED-2-3-4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Mario Rossi
01.01.08 08.30 AM TARGET/12345 BLUE-2-3-4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Mario Rossi
01.01.08 09.30 AM TARGET/12345 GREY-2-3-4 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Mario Rossi
01.01.08 10.30 AM TARGET/12345 GREY-5-6-7 Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Mario Rossi
Note: When conducting the calibration test you must use only the calibration card and
card holder, no paper or products are allowed to be put through the metal detector.
5. The card is to be placed in the center slot of the holder (1 1/2” in height) and passed
through each zone – A, B and C. Readings are recorded on a 9 Point Calibration
Report.
6. The card is then placed at the top slot of the holder (3” in height) and passed through
each zone – A, B and C. Readings are recorded on a 9 Point Calibration Report.

During the Factory Evaluation Process, it is the TCPS Manufacturing Technicians (MT)
responsibility to ensure that factories producing Children’s and Softhome products have:
• Appropriate number of Metal/Needle Detectors for Target’s production.
• Metal/needle detectors are installed before packing area and there is a clear
delineation from detected and non detected goods.
• A 9 point calibration procedure is in place with daily records showing that calibration
procedure is in use.
• Records of production lots that have passed through the machine.
Note: Factories non-compliant with Target’s Needle and Metal Contamination

Policy will be placed on hold for corrective action
During Placement and Pre Production Meetings

• TCPS must determine if product with trims and embellishments can be passed
through the needle/metal detector equipment without detection.
• In the event of non-compatible trims, TCPS will immediately alert their supervisor
and Local MR that product is exempt from needle detection screening.
• TCPS (MT or Inspector) will test approved red/yellow seal samples through factories
metal/needle detector.
After completing a Product Inspection TCPS may decide to pass products inspected
through the Needle/Metal detector and record results.
• There is a Zero tolerance when finding product with metal contamination during
inspections. Inspections will automatically FAIL if:
o 1 contaminated unit is found
o If missing detection records
• During Inspections, TCPS will check the 9 Point Calibration records and that Target’s
requirements have been followed.
Note: Failure to comply with Target’s requirements will result in shipments being put on
hold until all products can be processed through a detector.

FLOOR READY
REQUIREMENTS
Floor Ready Requirements 1 of 10

FLOOR READY REQUIREMENTS
Overview
Provides Floor Ready specifications by product category and presentation type for
apparel, intimates, shoes, handbags and soft home (towels/rugs). Floor Ready
Requirements, particularly for softlines apparel and shoes, should be addressed during
the product design and development stage due to their potential impact on cost (e.g.
hanger/caps, carton dimensions, packing materials, etc). The vendor must provide
communication to the factory on the requirements and a copy of the Floor Ready
Specifications for the specific product category and presentation.
Table of Contents
1. Floor Ready Product General Guidelines
2. Ticketing
3. Products on Hangers
4. Folded Product
5. Minimal Trash and Proper Packing
6. Delicate/Specialty Packing Requirements
7. Shoes
Objectives
• Understand Target’s Floor Ready Specifications
• Understand Floor Ready Requirements for product categories and presentation
types
Resources
POL: Guidelines and Info > Requirements and Procedures > Product Packaging > Floor
Ready Requirements and Hangers

1. Floor Ready Product General Guidelines
Program Requirements and Objectives

• Program requirements apply to Softlines (apparel and intimates), Softhome (towels
and rugs) and shoes.
• Floor Ready Requirements

o Pre-Ticketed with a scannable UPC
o Pre-Hung on Target approved hangers with size caps
o Pre-Folded to Target’s store presentation requirements
o Shipped with minimal trash (tissue, clips, pins, tape, etc.)
• Target determines the store presentation, if item is to be hanging or folded.
Floor Ready Expectations
• Floor Ready Specifications have been developed by product category and

presentation type to enable factories to successfully provide floor ready products to
Target.
Note: Floor Ready Specifications should be included within the SIP
POL: Guidelines and Info > Requirements and Procedures > Product Packaging > Floor
Ready Requirements and Hangers

The following is an example of the Floor Ready Specifications available on Partners
Online for a specific product category. The specifications will include the product
description, ticketing requirements and presentation requirements.
Example: Tops
2 3
1. Description of product category is located in upper left corner.
2. Ticketing requirements are contained in the first column.
3. Presentation requirements are in the second column.

2. Ticketing
Ticketing Requirements
• All items (selling units) must have a scannable UPC.
• Ticket placement is dependent on the type of garment and presentation type.
Examples of presentation types include:
o Hanging Tops
o Folded Tops
o Hanging Bottoms
o Folded Bottoms
o Garments with Multiple Pieces
Hanging Tops
• With sleeves: place tickets at end of wearer’s left sleeve.
• Sleeveless: place tickets at the seam beneath the wearers’ left armhole.
Note: In either case, if the placement would damage the garment, place the ticket
through the main label.
Folded Tops
• Tickets should be applied through the main label.
o If an item has a heat transfer label, the ticket should be applied through the
wearers’ left shoulder seam. Longer attachment may be required.
Hanging Bottoms
• Buyer will determine hanging direction for hanging bottoms. Options include
open/forward, closed/side, open/reverse, folded/hanging.
• Ticket placement will be dependent on the hanging direction.
Folded Bottoms
• The ticket should be attached on the wearer’s right side at the waistband.

Garments with Multiple Pieces
• Garments with multiple pieces require an “AN” ticket on the secondary item, which is
a ticket with zero retail and no UPC.
• To determine which item is the secondary item, refer to the specifications.
AN Ticket Example Example of a 2 piece toddler outfit requiring an AN ticket
Main ticket on “AN” ticket on

garment top garment bottom
(secondary item)
Note: Factories should have a current printout of the guidelines from POL for the
products they are producing.
3. Products on Hangers
How to Order Hangers
• Braiform (incorporating Plasti-form and Braitrim) is Target’s only designated hanger

and size cap supplier. Hangers and size caps must be ordered from Braiform. No
other supplier may be used.
o Product received on counterfeit hangers/size caps are subject to penalty
charges.
o A list of Braiform worldwide locations can be found on Partners Online.

Types of Hangers
• Hangers have a smooth face to reduce potential hanger marks.
• There are 2 versions of top hangers:
o Padded – Most common version used
o Notched – Used for items with narrow shoulder straps
• Bottom hangers have padded pinch grip closures.
Hanger Presentation Requirements

• Information on the required hanger style and length by product category and
presentation direction is provided in the Floor Ready Specifications located on
Partners Online.
• Hanger and size cap style numbers are provided under Presentation with each Floor
Ready Specification.

• Hanger hook should open to the left when garment is viewed from front.
• Size caps are required on all hangers.
4. Folded Product
• Folding dimensions are specified by product category and/or size to ensure a

consistent presentation in all Target Stores.
• It is important to refer to instructions from Partners Online for the correct size
dimensions by product category. Vendor should provide factory with a copy of the
Floor Ready Specifications.
• Size Strips are required on all folded products.
o Placement of size strips:
Tops: lower right hand corner, along the right folded edge.
Bottoms: Back of wearer’s right leg. Refer to the Floor Ready Requirements
for specific placement.
Size strip should be visible around folded edge.
Note: Concerns regarding the use or placement of the size strip should be directed to
Target.
Example: Floor Ready folded product

5. Minimal Trash and Proper Packing
• Never include tape, tissue, pins, clips, individual polybags or chipboard boxes
without prior approval from Target Floor Ready.
o If innerpack of the shipping carton is 1, an individual polybag may be used.
• Select proper size carton and pack goods securely based on specified case pack
quantity.
• Light weight cardboard sheet is permitted on top and bottom of carton to prevent
damage upon opening of carton.
• Anchoring is permitted to prevent shifting during transit for product on hangers.
o The preferred method is to construct the carton to include space at both ends to
insert and secure the hook of the hanger in place.
Example: Correct Anchor
Example: Incorrect Anchor (Plastic Zip Tie)- safety issue for Target store team members
Proper packing of Assortment Items

• If shipping an Assortment item, which is when multiple Target item numbers are
placed in a carton, a large master polybag may be used to pack the cartons or the
contents may be separated into smaller bundles within the carton by combining like
styles, colors or sizes (e.g. all reds together, all size S together).
• Individual polybags are never permitted without prior approval from Target.

6. Delicate/Specialty Packing Requirements
This applies to all business-casual apparel including dress slacks, blazers, skirts,
dresses, woven tops and shirts. Includes fabrics such as silk, rayon, satin and linen.
The packing requirements are

• Items must be well steamed or pressed prior to packing
• Items must be folded neatly and consistently
• Closed/sealed polybags must be used to define innerpacks
o Heavier weight polypropylene (minimum thickness .04 mils) and BHT free.
• Flat packing is preferred
• Reduce potential for shifting within the carton during transit
o Alternating inners reduces bulk and maximizes cube.
o Select proper size carton in order to pack product tightly.
o Anchor hanging garments within the carton.
• A “Delicate Item” label must be applied to the shipping carton for cartons which have
been packed with a specific quantity per Innerpack (referred to as breakpack).
Please refer to the “Carton Marking” document for complete instructions.
• Share your ideas and expertise to identify and develop best methods for packing
new or difficult fabrics, silhouettes or other product categories
Note: Consult with your vendor if you have any questions as to whether you should
follow these requirements.
7. Shoes
• POL: Guidelines and Info > Requirements and Procedures > Product Packaging >
Floor Ready Requirements and Hangers > Floor Ready Specifications > Shoes
• Target determines the box code or presentation direction, and communicates this in
the commit.
Note: Charges will be assessed if products do not match the required specifications for
ticketing, hanging, folding and packing.

STANDARD
INSPECTION
PACKET
Standard Inspection Packet 1 of 20

STANDARD INSPECTION PACKET (SIP)
Overview
The Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) is a formal documentation of production activities
maintained by Vendor/Factory. It is the factory’s responsibility to formally document
results of production data in addition to Target’s requirements and they must be
furnished to TCPS for review upon request.
Table of Contents
1. Importance of SIP Packet
3. SIP – Phase 1
4. SIP – Phase 2
Objectives
• Understand the importance of the SIP packet, its supporting documents and
components for phase 1 & 2.
• Understand the factory roles and responsibilities.
Resource
• SIP Checklist
• POL: Guideline & Info > Requirements & Procedures > Product Development /
Quality Assurance > Hardlines or Softlines Quality Assurance > Forms > Standard
Inspection Packet (SIP) Checklists

1. Importance of SIP Packet
The SIP package is a very important tool for both Factory and TCPS because:
• Contains all necessary information for production.
• The SIP file makes sure that the Factory is always aware of the requirements
requested for that product before starting production and supports the Factory during
each phase of production.
• Avoids mistakes or misinterpretation during production.
• Crucial for factories internal and TCPS inspections.
During your Placement and Pre Production Meetings the PPR document will indicate
what items and/or documents are needed in the SIP file based on the type of product
that you are going to produce for Target.
• These documents are available and downloadable from POL.
• Vendors are responsible to handover these forms to each factory before Placement
and Pre Production meetings.
• It is TSS Vendors/Factories responsibility to communicate to TSS if there are missing

components and work with TSS to complete the SIP file in a timely manner for each
phase.
• SIP checklist is divided into Phase 1 and Phase 2. Phase 1 must be completed at
Pre-Production Meeting before production begins. Phases 1 & 2 before TCPS Final
inspection.
• The Factory obtains all required components of the SIP and brings the Sip file to be
checked by TSS merchant during the Placement and Pre Production Meetings for
TSS Vendors. The TSS local Merchant will check all items required in the sip file and
will approve them.
Note: for Non-TSS Vendors Target recommends Vendor/Factory to use these

documents during their internal Placement and Pre Production Meetings and inspections

Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) checklist
• The SIP is located within the Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR)

document. The SIP Checklist helps you to verify during your meetings that all
requested elements and documentation is within the SIP file.
Example: SIP Checklist
• Reference Code - Letter codes on the PPR indicate specific items or documents that
are needed in the SIP file. Helps you with any needed communication between
Vendor, Factory and TSS.
• Check as Added - Vendor/Factory Checks as item is added to SIP

• Item / Item Description - Detail description of item to included in SIP. Helps you
understand why you and/or TCPS need the Item in the SIP.
• SIP Phase - Phase 1 or 2 indicates when item or documentation is needed.

o SIP Phase 1 Items - To Be Completed Prior To Production Start
o SIP Phase 2 Items - To Be Completed Prior To The Final Random Inspection
(FRI)
2.Vendor and Factory Roles and Responsibilities

• Complete the SIP packet according to each phase.
• Insert documentation of in-line quality control.
• Ensure that SIP files are available in each factory producing the merchandise.
• Factories must not start the production unless phase 1 has been completed.
• If missing components exits Vendor/Factory must communicate with TSS for timing
of completion for those missing Items.
• SIP file documentation must be kept for 2 years after last shipment
• Contact TCPS or local TSS office if help is needed.
Note: All forms and information are available for Vendors in POL. Vendors will share the
available forms and information with their factories.
Assurance (Softlines or Hardlines) > Forms.

3. SIP – Phase 1 Items to be completed prior to production start
A. Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR) document

B. Red Seal sample
C. Technical Spec and Construction
D. Final Item Set-up Form
E. Total Program Quantity and Deliverables (Commit & Purchase Order)
F. Color Standards
G. Color Swatches/Shade Bands/Fabric Swatches
H. Finish Quality
I. Artwork
J. Trims, Accessories and Labeling
K. Yellow Seal Sample
L. Product Testing Results
M. Grouping Logic Form
N. Updated VTA Elements
HL only
O. BOM (Bill of Materials- refer to UL)
P. UL Official Product Report
Q. Labeling Verification on Production Products (Rating/Warning)
R. Exploded View of Product Drawing
A. PPR Document
Latest version of the PPR document, used during Placement and Pre Production
Meetings, must be printed and inserted in the SIP.
• Vendor/Factory should review the document to ensure pending details or issues that
may effect production start date are resolved before proceeding into production.
• For Non-TSS Vendors, Target recommends using these forms for the SIP.
Example: Pre-Production Planning Requirements (PPR) Document

B. Red Seal Sample
• A duplicate copy of the sample submitted to Minneapolis for approval. Once
approved, the TSS merchant seals the sample with the red seal and/or puts a
signature onto the sample tag in the appropriate field.
• For Non TSS Vendors Minneapolis will approve, seal the sample and return back to
Vendor.
• The Approval Red Sealed Sample is the sample approved for Pre Production. The
sample is approved for Measurements (Specification Details), Styling, Workmanship
and components (unless specified).
• Vendor makes duplicate copies of any samples submitted to Minneapolis. One
sample is sent to Minneapolis, the other is vendor’s own sample to keep in the
factory.
C. Technical Specification & Construction

• Vendor/Factory must obtain copies of the approved Target or Vendor Generated
Spec details. These contain material details, Spec and sketches and any additional
comments from the Development stage or any other comments about the product
from Target Personnel.
Example: Softlines Specification Details

Example: Softhome Specification Details
Example: Hardgoods Specifications Details and Construction

Vendor uses own spec or spec issued from PD&D or design team
D. Final Item Set Up (ISU) – HG/SH only

• After Item Set Up form has been completed and approved, Factory has to include it
in the SIP. This is to ensure that TCPS and US Customs have a clear description of
the item.
• Approved and completed ISU is provided to Vendor by local MR (TSS) or
Minneapolis (Non-TSS) to deliver this information to the Factory.
Example: HL Item Set-Up Form

E. Total Program Quantity and Deliveries (Commit & Purchase orders)
• Vendors must download the Purchase Order from PartnersOnline (POL) and
Approved CMS worksheet, if applicable.
• The Vendor must print the last updated version to keep the SIP file updated.
• During TCPS Final inspection, the best practice for the Vendor is to download the
Purchase Order three days before inspection and forward it to the Factory for them
to include it into the SIP packet.
Note: Any important special instructions, memos or emails are to be included in the SIP.
Example: Target PO
Example: Target Commitment

F. Color Standards
• Vendor must insert in the SIP file all color standards: Archroma standards, Target
color Appearance standard or Vendors own Appearance standard according to
program requirements. These are used during factory internal and TCPS
inspections.
• Your lab dip is not your standard for production. All readings and evaluations must
be done using the Color standard during production, unless a Best Can Do has been
approved by Minneapolis. In this case Lab Dip must be available in the SIP File
Note: Where color standards apply to multiple styles, color standards can be shared
across multiple SIP's, provided that the products are being produced in the same factory
and are of the same fabrication/standard/ finish.
Note: Color standards should be kept clean, away from direct light and should be never
cut. This will ensure a clean visual for good color matching
G. Color Swatches/Shade Bands/Fabric Swatches

• Where product either undergoes additional finishing or is made from natural
materials, approved shade band is to be included in SIP.
• Vendor must insert the approved shades bands which have been approved/signed
by TSS or PM Minneapolis.
Note: Shade band may be given in the form of actual samples or swatches/cuttings,
depending on the nature of the product. In any case, all must be clearly marked and
included in the SIP packet.
Example: Softlines and Hardlines approved shade bands

H. Finish Quality
• As applicable, Samples/Cuttings/ Swatches of all, as approved by the PM/Buyer, to
be attached to a card, which has been chopped/stamped and signed by TSS MR.
• For Non-TSS Vendors it is Vendors responsibility to obtain all approvals from PM's in
Minneapolis
Note: Where submissions were given in the form of a sample (rather than a cutting or
swatch), obviously it cannot be attached to a trim card. Sample(s) must be clearly
marked and included in the SIP by the Factory. BULK production fabric quality/handfeel
must match Target’s approved standard.
I. Artwork
• If applicable Vendor inserts a copy of approved Artwork
Example: Approved Artwork

J. Trims, Accessories and Labeling
• During the Placement Meeting, for TSS Vendor, TSS MR will check against
approved sample and Specification details what components need to be included in
the SIP (see below).
• Vendor must obtain items and during Pre-Production Meeting TSS MR will verify and
approve.
• TCPS will verify completeness of the file during Pre-Production Meeting and
inspections.
Example: Trims/Accessories Checklist
• For Non-TSS Vendors it is Vendors responsibility to obtain all approvals from PM's in
Minneapolis
• All Items, Components and Trims must be approved by a Target representative. A
stamp must be on your SIP indicating approval of all items, components and trims.
Example: Approved Trims, Accessories and Labeling

• Softlines and Softhome product only
o All Softlines product and specific Softhome product categories must contain an
additional label with DPCI and factory identification information.
o The DPCI and Factory Label ID:
Has to be white and the information will print in black.
Label should be made of a paper like material that is 100% nylon composite.
The label is Vendor/Factory managed and must be smaller than the care
label.
It can not show from underneath the other labels.
Guidelines are available from your Vendor.
Example: DPCI and Factory Label ID
K. Yellow Sealed Sample

• Based on Red Seal sample and any feedback from Minneapolis – factory makes
Pre-Production sample (if applicable a full size set) in the actual bulk fabric/raw
material, trims, accessories, and construction details.
• The samples are evaluated for Measurements (Specification Details), Styling,
Workmanship and compared against the Red sealed sample by TCPS during the Pre
Production meeting for TSS Vendors. For Softlines, you may compare to the Red
Seal sample of Approved Pending Changes (APC).
• If acceptable, Core size (as defined by client) is selected and a yellow seal attached
by TCPS. This sample is part of a full size set reviewed at Pre-Production Meeting.
• For Non-TSS Vendors factory approves Pre-Production samples and submits a copy
to Minneapolis. Factory should not wait for approval from Target Headquarters to
begin production.
• The Yellow Seal Samples are being sent for reference only. If Target Headquarters
finds an issue with the sample, they will notify the Vendor/Factory to stop production.
Example: Yellow Sealed Sample

L. Product Testing Results
• Vendors are expected to submit product for testing, in various stages of production,
according to Product Testing Protocols and Department.
• All test lab reports, passed or over-ride authorization report attached to failed report
test, are to be included in the SIP.
• Where multiple colors/DPCI's have been submitted for testing at the same time and
one or multiple colors/DPCI's fail testing, while others pass, overall test status will
read as "failed".
• Report should be checked at color/DPCI level to verify which have passed versus
failed and reason for failing.
Example: Softlines Test Report
Note: Target has created in the SIP Checklist a Table for tracking all testing and
approvals during the lifecycle of the program.
Example: SIP Color Fabric Checklist

M. Grouping Logic Form
• This form is completed during the Pre-Production meeting by TCPS and inserted in
the SIP.
Example: Grouping Logic Form
N. Updated VTA Elements (Refer to VTA document)

• Includes dates committed to during the Placement Meeting (TSS Vendor). VTA will
be reviewed by TSS team and TCPS throughout life cycle of the program, to ensure
that factory is still committed to dates shown.
• Vendor/Factory must review on a daily base this document to make sure that he
meets all dates indicated. If you can not met required dates should contact Target
and TCPS and work together to ensure on time shipment
Example: Vendor Timing and Action (VTA)

These elements/documents of the SIP are related to Hardlines products only:
O. BOM (bill of Materials- refer to UL)
P. UL Official Product Report
Q. Labeling Verification on Production Products (Rating/Warning)
R. Exploded View of Product Drawing
These elements/documents of the SIP are related to Target.com products only:
MPS computerized SIP Summary

• For TSS Vendor for Target.com orders; a summary is printed based on the MPS
Purchase Order detail. This summary includes all detail about the style, packing
instructions, delivery, and more.
Note: For Target.com orders, if changes are made to the MPS PO after the MPS SIP
Summary, Packing List or Vendor Commercial Invoice have been printed, the TSS
Local Team will provide updated copies to the Vendor/Factory as applicable.
4. SIP Phase 2 Items must be completed prior to Factory internal and TCPS FRI
inspections
S. Floor Ready Requirements
T. Retail Packaging Design and PPG (Product Packaging guide)
U. Carton Dimensions and Packing Method
V. Carton Marks and Labels
W. HL Transit Testing Report (if applicable)
X. Factory Performed internal Inspections
Y. TCPS Inspection Reports (Once performed)
Completed Packing List

Green Seal Sample (If applicable)

S. Floor Ready Requirements
• Target Orders (not Target.com) – guidelines are available from POL for the Vendor
to download and give to factory to insert in the SIP file. It is the vendor’s
responsibility to give this information to factory for execution.
• It’s important that products for Target are packed correctly to allow efficient execution
in Target stores.
Example: Softlines Requirements from POL
Note: It is not required that the Floor Ready samples are stamped or signed, but must
be available in the SIP file for TCPS to review.
T. Retail Packaging Design and PPG (Product Packaging Guide)

• A copy of the PPG should be included.
U. Carton Dimensions and Packing Method

• Guideline showing how merchandise is to be packed/folded/made floor ready based
on brand/gender must be included.
• A copy of the Approved Packaging Specs must be included.
V. Sample Carton Markings

• Included in the SIP file so that TCPS can verify that cartons will be marked correctly.
Factories should also include a DPCI carton label.
Example: Carton Requirements from POL

W. HL Transit Testing Report (if applicable)
• Per testing protocols, the Vendor/Factory is expected to submit Product Packaging
samples for testing (as applicable) to Targets approved test lab.
• These reports must be included in the SIP.
Example: Transit Testing Report
X. Factory Performed Inline Inspections

• Factories are expected to perform their internal DUPRO (10% & 50%) and FRI
inspections (100% produced and 80% packed minimum requirement). If either of
these inspections fails, 100% re-inspection is to be done and defective units are to
be removed. Thereafter, factory is to perform random audits through to FRI.
• All factory performed inspection reports are to be included in the SIP File.
Y. TCPS Inspection Reports

• All TCPS inspection (DUPRO & FRI) reports should be added to the SIP once they
have been performed.
Example: TCPS Inspection Report

Completed Packing List
• Used by TCPS to verify shipping quantity against Purchase order.
• Target has not made it mandatory to use their specific layout; however, all
information required by Target must be shown in the Vendor/Factory packing list.
Note: Quantity Deviation Approval - Where a Factory intends to ship quantities different
from ordered quantity, approval must be included as part of the SIP. It can be in the form
of written authorization from Target Import Department or email notification from Local
TSS Office. Target expects Vendors/Factories to ship 100% of the quantity ordered.
However, should there be a discrepancy + or -, the approval obtained from TSS local
merchant or Minneapolis is to be included in the SIP packet.
SIP Complete
• No DUPRO inspection by TCPS will be done without a complete SIP phase 1.
• No FRI inspection can take place by TCPS without a complete SIP file phases 1 & 2.
Note: Charges will be assessed incase of missing or incomplete SIP file

The most up-to-date SIP checklist can be located on POL: Guideline & Info > Requirements &
Procedures > Product Development / Quality Assurance > Hardlines or Softlines Quality
Assurance > Forms > Standard Inspection Packet (SIP) Checklists
PACKING &
CARTON
MARKINGS
Packing and Carton Markings 1 of 15

PACKING & CARTON MARKINGS
Overview
How the shipping carton will be packed and marked needs to be determined before
shipments are due to be delivered to the Target consolidator. The vendor and factory
need to work together to determine who is responsible for submitting carton marking
samples to Target for approval and who will create or order the carton barcode label.
The vendor and factory also need to work together to determine how Purchase Order
details such as PO #, DPCI (Department, Class and Item, Target’s item number) and
casepack will be communicated to the factory.
Table of Contents
1. Carton and Innerpack Requirements
2. Carton Markings and Barcode Requirements
Objectives
• Understand Target’s requirements for packing the shipping carton, including
innerpack requirements
• Understand Target’s requirements for marking and labeling the shipping carton
• Understand Assortment Item and how it impacts the carton packing and carton
markings
Resources
• Barcode Label Order Form
• Barcode Label Approval Form
• Target HQ Contact for Carton Markings
o Vendor Operations Helpline 612-304-6266
o Vendor.Operations@Target.com

1. Carton and Innerpack Requirements
Target Stores Shipping Carton
• Shipping Carton Specifications

o Must use the proper sized shipping carton for product and quantity of units in the
carton.
o A shipping carton should meet Target conveyable requirements:
Minimum: 22.9cm x 22.9cm x 5.1cm, 1.39 kg. (9”x9”x2”, 3 lbs.)
Maximum: 107cm x 61cm x 76cm, 27.2 kg (42”x24”x30”, 60 lbs.)
Note: If carton does not fall within these dimensions and weight, contact your Vendor.
o Items should fit firmly in the shipping carton to minimize damage during transit.
o Guidelines for carton durability/strength:
Minimum Mullen Burst Test of 175-200 pounds corrugated fiberboard.
Minimum Edge Crush Test factor of 29-32
Carton may need to be stronger for heavier items or fragile product.
o Cartons should be sealed with tape or glue.
Ensure carton will remain sealed through changes in climate (temperature,
humidity, etc.) and multiple handlings.
Do not use bands or staples on cartons. Exceptions must be approved by
Target Vendor Operations.
• Transit Test Requirements for Shipping Carton

o Transit testing provides an indication of the product’s ability to “survive” the
supply chain and arrive safely at our stores.
o All fragile items require package transit testing (vibration and drop testing). Non-
fragile items do not require transit testing.
Note: Refer to Product Testing Topic for full details.
Target Stores Innerpack Requirements
• Innerpack
o If the Purchase Order states that you are to create innerpacks (grouping of
selling units) within a shipping carton, each innerpack must contain the correct
number of selling units as specified on the Purchase Order.
o Innerpack example: Shirt with a casepack of 8/2 would have 4 innerpacks inside
the shipping carton with 2 shirts in each innerpack. Each carton would contain a
total of 8 shirts.

o Innerpack dimensions and weight must be under 50.8cm x 33cm x 33cm. 27.2 kg
(20” x 13” x 13”, 60 lbs).
If the innerpack exceeds these dimensions, it will not fit into the carton at the
Target Regional Distribution Center for processing to the stores.
If the innerpack exceeds these dimensions contact the vendor. The vendor
should immediately work with the Target to discuss changes to the casepack.
o Packaging Options for creating an Innerpack and grouping selling units together.
Cardboard Box (cannot be used for apparel)
Polybags
Bands
Box Polybag Band
Note: Innerpacks do not require any markings.
Target.com Shipping Carton
• Must use the proper sized shipping carton for product and quantity of units in the
carton. Items should fit firmly in the carton to minimize damage during transit.
• The maximum shipping carton size for Target.com is 81.3cm (32”) long, 51cm (20”)
wide, and 73.7 cm (29”) and 18.14 kg (40 lbs).
o The exception to this size requirement would be single items that are larger such
as gazebos or furniture items.
o If the shipping carton is larger, contact your Vendor.
• Guidelines for carton durability/strength:
o Minimum Mullen Burst Test of 175-200 pounds corrugated fiberboard.
o Minimum Edge Crush Test factor of 29-32
o Carton may need to be stronger for heavier items or fragile product.

• Cartons should be sealed with tape or glue.
o Ensure carton will remain sealed through changes in climate (temperature,
humidity, etc.) and multiple handlings.
o Do not use bands or staples on cartons. Exceptions must be approved by Target
Vendor Operations.
• Complete Transit Test Requirements for Shipping Carton as outlined for Target
Stores.
• Individual Selling Units in Shipping Carton
o Each sellable unit must be individually boxed, poly bagged or shrink-wrapped.
Boxed Poly bagged
Shrinkwrapped Selling Unit within Single Packaging
• A scannable UPC is required to be visible on each sellable unit.
• One UPC corresponds to one unique product including assortments.

• No price tags on product. Softlines (apparel items) may have the price on the
hangtag.

Example of incorrect packaging:
Items are not

individually
packaged and do
not have a visible
UPC code.
2. Carton Markings and Barcode Requirements
• Human readable information is required on the shipping carton.

o Information must be written in English.
o Required elements can be printed directly on the carton or on a label.
o Size of print must be a minimum of 3/16” (6mm), bold.
o Display human readable information on two (2) adjacent sides of carton.
o Must contain required elements for Target Stores or Target.com.
Target Stores Carton Marking Requirements:
Consignee Name Target Stores

Purchase Order Number 1234567 or 0013-1234567 or
0013-1234567-0581
DPC-Item # 013050123
Style # PID/Vendor Style #
Color and Size Optional
Casepack # of selling units in carton
Country of Origin Specify country
Carton # -- of --- 1 of 200, 2 of 200, etc.
At Purchase Order level
Carton Dimensions in CM L x W x H in centimeters

Example of the Target Stores carton markings
Target.com Carton Marking Requirements:
Consignee Name Target.com or

Target.com c/o Amazon.com
Purchase Order Number 1234567
TC-Item # 5-8 digit #
Color If applicable
Size If applicable
Casepack # of selling units in carton
Country of Origin Specify Country
Carton # -- of -- 1 or 200, 2 of 200, etc.
Carton Dimensions in CM L x W x H in centimeters
Example of the Target.com human readable carton markings

Carton Barcode Label
• In addition to the human readable information, every shipping carton must have a
carton barcode.
• Carton barcode label includes DPCI number or UPC number and a 14 digit barcode
which is scanned by Target.
• Adhesive label size is 10.2 cm x 5.1 cm (4” x 2”)
• Barcode label can be created by vendor/factory or purchased from one of our label
providers. Contact your Vendor for barcode label supplier information.
o Label providers that can create the carton barcode label:
▪ Avery Dennison/RVL
▪ Pax Tag and Label
▪ Paxar
▪ Shore to Shore
o Complete and submit Barcode Label Order Form to label provider. Form
available in resource section.
o Allow a minimum of 7 working days for shipment from label provider to arrive at
ordering location.
o Carton barcode can be created using one of the following 3 options:
1. Target UPC
▪ Used when selling unit is marked with a Target UPC.
▪ If you are placing a Target UPC code on the selling unit that begins with the
numbers 49, you will use the Target UPC to create the carton barcode.
▪ Add “70” to beginning of item UPC and recalculate check digit (last number).
For assistance in calculating check digit use check digit calculator on
www.uc-council.org or www.gs1us.org website.
Example:
2. Manufacturer UPC
▪ Used when selling unit is marked with the manufacturer’s UPC.
▪ If you are placing a Manufacturer UPC code on the selling unit, you will use
the Manufacturer UPC to create the carton barcode.
Example:

▪ Add “10” to the item UPC and recalculate the check digit (last number). Refer
to the Uniform Code Council for other options for the first 2 digits of the carton
barcode and assistance in recalculating the check digit. UCC website is
www.uc-council.org or www.gs1us.org
3. Item UPC
▪ Used when shipping carton is the selling unit and the carton is marked with
the item UPC. You do not need to add another barcode; the UPC can be
used as the carton barcode. An example would be a TV.
▪ Barcode height of the UPC code must be at least 2 inches (5.08cm).
o Vendor/factory(s) creating their own carton barcode labels are
responsible for the barcode quality.
• A barcode verifier should be used to ensure symbol quality is consistently meeting

the minimum grade requirements established by the GS1 organization and are
available on their website www.gs1us.org.
• Technical requirements for 14 digit carton barcode
o Format
▪ Barcode Height: 1.25 inches (32mm)
First digit (packaging indicator) must start with a value of 1-8.
Narrow element (X): 0.040 inches (1.016mm)
o Print Quality
Symbol color and label must be black on white.
No ink jet symbols accepted.
o Quiet Zone – unmarked space located around the carton barcode
Quiet zone: minimum 0.40 inches (10.16mm)
• Barcode label placement on shipping carton
o Place barcode label a minimum of 1.5” (3.8cm) away from edge of carton.
Note: Target recommends barcode label is placed in center of carton vertical face.
o Do not place over seams.

o Do not cover with tape.

o Establish a process to ensure correct barcode is placed on carton and that it
matches the carton contents.
Note: Charges will be assessed for barcodes which do not scan or cartons which do not
have a barcode.
• Assortment Item Requirements for Target Stores

o Target Merchandising department will assign a DPCI (department/class/item
number) to the Assortment Item.
o Assortment items are used for seasonal sets, transitions and salesplans when all
stores or a group of stores need the same amount of product.
o Casepack for an Assortment Item is always one (1), which represents 1
Assortment is contained in the shipping carton.
• Assortment Item Carton Marking Requirements
o Carton barcode label must be created using the Assortment Item DPCI.
o Casepack is 1 representing 1 Assortment is contained in the carton
o Style # must state “Assortment”.
Target Stores
PO# 1234567
DPCI 064030999 Assortment Item DPCI
Style # Assortment Indicate Assortment as Style
Color: Size
Casepack: 1 Casepack = 1
Country of Origin:
Carton# ___ of ___
Carton Dim H /W /L
Note: Selling units should never be ticketed with the assortment DPCI.
• Label Approval
o All vendors must submit human readable information to Target for approval prior
to their first shipment. Vendor should determine if sample will be submitted by
vendor or factory.
o Carton barcode labels created by vendor and or factory should also be submitted
for approval.
o Complete the Label Approval Form and send to Target Vendor Operations prior
to first shipment. Form available in resource section.
o Barcode labels created by one of the designated label providers do not need to
be approved.
• Additional Labels on Shipping Carton for Target Stores

o Additional labels may be required on the shipping carton based on the type of
product or specific direction from Target on a specific event. The following are
labels you may be required to place on the shipping carton.
▪ Fragile Item Label
o Cartons containing fragile items such as glass or ceramic items, should be
marked with the words “Fragile” and/or “This End Up”
o Markings may be direct printed on the carton, or may be printed on a label that is
applied to the carton. Labels must not cover any pertinent information for
product identification (including barcodes).
o Markings must be applied on 2 adjacent sides of each carton – near the shipping
container barcodes. It is permissible to apply markings to all 4 sides of the
carton.
o Placement should be consistent on each carton.
Example of the fragile carton markings
• Delicate Item Label

o Delicate Item carton labels identify cartons of hanging apparel items that require
gentle handling by Distribution Center team members.
o Delicates” include business-casual hanging apparel such as dress slacks,
blazers, skirts, dresses, woven tops and shirts. Also included – but not limited to
fabrics such as silk, rayon, satin, linen and wool.
o Cartons that require these labels are opened by the Regional Distribution
Centers in the U.S. and repacked to distribute the contents to more than 1 store.
o Minimum label size is length: 5” (12.7cm), height: 3 ½” (8.89cm).
o Pre-printed labels may be purchased from Avery Dennison.
o Apply 1 label to each carton. The label should be placed on the top of each
carton. There is no specific location for the label on the top of the carton.
However, the label must not cover any other human readable information or
barcodes applied to the carton.
Example of the delicate item label
Target Stores Target Stores

PO# 1234567 PO# 1234567
DPC-Item # 123456789
DPC-Item # 123456789 STYLE#
STYLE #: COLOR:
COLOR: SIZE: SIZE:
CASEPACK: 12 CSPK:
COUNTRY OF
Country of Origin:
CARTON # _ of _
Carton Dimensions in CM

• Event Label
o Event labels are used to identify cartons that contain product sold for a short
period of time. The color of the label makes these cartons clearly visible to store
employees as they walk through the stock rooms.
o 3 events require event labels:
Mini Seasonal
Rear Seasonal
Sales Plan (End Caps)
o Target Merchandising Department will specify when an event label should be
used. Specific events along with the appropriate color label for each event are
located on Partners Online.
POL: Guidelines & Info> Requirements & Procedures> Shipping >Import Carton
Markings > Target is Importer of Record
Example: Event Label
o Labels should be applied to two (2) adjacent sides – do not cover human
readable information or barcode label.
Example of carton with an event label.
Target Stores Target Stores

PO# 1234567 PO# 1234567
DPC-Item # 123456789 DPC-Item # 123456789
STYLE #: STYLE#
COLOR:
COLOR: SIZE: SIZE:
CASEPACK: 12 CSPK:
Country of Origin: Country of Origin:
CARTON # _ of _ Cart. #
Carton Dimensions in CM Dimensions
H cm __/ W cm __/ L cm __
o Minimum label size for the event label is 5” x 3.5” (1.7cm x 8.89cm).
o 36 point Bold font for print

o Blank label stock in the appropriate color can be purchased from Avery
Dennison.
• Transition Label
o Each individual Target Merchandising department who requires use of transition
labels determines the requirements, the information to be contained on the label
and the color of the label. This information will be communicated to the vendors
directly.
o Placement on the shipping carton would be the same as the event label
o If an event label is required, a transition label will not be required.

Barcode Label Order Form
DPCI / U.P.C. IMPORT CARTON BAR CODE LABEL ORDER FORM
Target (ICBS Label)

SHIP
ORDER DATE: DATE REQ. PO#
VIA:
Bill To: Ship To:
Contact: Contact:
Email: Email:
Phone: Fax: Phone:
Special Instructions:
Note: Check Digits are not included in the form below and will be calculated by the Label Provider.
DPC-Item Carton Bar Code OR Vendor U.P.C. or EAN-13
Enter a
U.P.C Only
Carton Bar number Enter first 11 digits of

Use for
Instructions: Enter Code from U.P.C. Carton Bar

9 digit Target Item Label 1 through …Or… Code Label
Prefix number (DPC-Item). Quantity 8 first 12 digits of EAN-13 Quantity
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
7049 0
Please note, this generic form may be used to order the Import Carton Bar Code labels ONLY from any Target
approved label supplier.

Barcode Label Approval
Carton Marking Approval Form

(Note: This form is used for all types of labels submitted for Target Corporation
Approval.)
To: Vendor Operations – Carton Marking Approval

Fax: 612-304-1869
Contact Name: ____________________________________________________
Email: ____________________________________________________
Phone #: ____________________________________________________
Fax #: ____________________________________________________
Date Submitted: ____________________________________________________
Vendor name and #: ____________________________________________________

Dept # and/or description
____________________________________________________
of goods:
Type of
LTL / TL
Shipment:
Small parcel (FedEx, UPS, etc.)
Type of Label:
EAN.UCC-14 (SCC-14, Case UPC or ITF-14) & Human Readable

Markings (Must submit UCC-128 Pallet Label for approval also.)
Direct-to-Store
Import Human Readable Carton Markings (submit illustration)

Import Carton Barcode – (Only needed when barcodes are not
created by Target Barcode Suppliers. Include illustration of Human
Readable Markings for approval also.)
UCC/EAN-128 Carton Label (Full Case Flow/Breakpack or Predistro)
UCC/EAN-128 Pallet Label (Must submit carton barcode label &
human readable markings also.)
UCC/EAN-128 Assortment Item Label
UCC/EAN-128 PIPO Label
Target.com

INTERNATIONAL
TRANSPORTATIO
N / SHIPPING
International Transportation / Shipping 1 of 21

INTERNATIONAL TRANSPORTATION / SHIPPING
Overview
Import Transportation provides information and requirements for preparing an Import
shipment for Target from your facility. Import Transportation includes booking a
purchase order, proper loading of the merchandise, delivery of less then container
freight as well as delivery of full containers,
document delivery and the time requirements.
Table of Contents
1. Factory Booking Requirements
2. Loading and Delivery of Freight
3. Documentation Requirements
Objectives
• Understand Target’s shipping requirements
• Understand factory’s responsibility of cargo handling and consolidation
Resources
• Container Load Plan
• Air Freight Agreement letter
• Vendor Air Freight Agreement letter
• Air Freight Worksheet
• Local Consolidator

1. Factory Booking Requirements
• After Purchase Order is designated to Factory

o The vendor will determine who will be responsible for booking, delivery of cargo
and documentation
• After Purchase Order is designated to Factory
o Vendor/Factory will provide consolidator information for booking or Target
systems OTM (Overseas Transportation Management)
Booking Cargo
• Vendor/Factory is responsible for:

o One booking per PO
o Items needed to place a booking:
Purchase Order #
# of cartons
Total weight of cartons
Dimensions of cartons
Total CBMs (cubic meters) and kilos
Ready Cargo date
Identify hazardous materials
o Book with designated Consolidator a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 17
calendar days in advance from first day of ship window (Market conditions may
dictate variances to this standard)
o Book cargo using the consolidator’s web-based booking tool or OTM (will be
available throughout 2008 as origins are approved for OTM)
Note: Target.com POs are not available on the web-site
• Consolidator is responsible for:

o Verify PO details
o Book cargo with Ocean Carrier
o Communicate any exceptions or discrepancies to Target for resolution
o Confirm CBM’s (cubic meters) of each purchase order
o Determine if PO is Full Container Load or Less than Container Load
Note: Vendor and factory will work together to determine if the goods that are being
shipped are hazardous or dangerous goods

Shipping Hazardous Materials (Dangerous Goods)
• Hazardous materials are reviewed as any solid, liquid or gas that has the potential to
harm people, other living organisms, property or the environment. A hazardous
material may be radioactive, flammable, explosive, toxic, corrosive, biohazardous, an
oxidizer, an asphyxiant, an allergen, or may have other characteristics that make it
hazardous in specific circumstances.
• Risks associated with hazardous materials may require the removal of these
materials from products or packaging or may require safety precautions during their
transport, use, storage and disposal.
• Target requires all vendors to research and obey all U.S. laws as they relate to
hazardous materials
Examples of hazardous materials (dangerous goods) includes, but is not limited to:
o Fragrances, nail polish and its remover

o Matchboxes, matches and butane lighters
o Oil diffusers
o Kerosene or mercury based thermometers
o Touch up paint or glue included with furniture. (Carton must be properly marked)
o If clarification is needed on Hazardous Material, e-mail
msds.questions@target.com
2. Loading and Delivery of Freight
• Consolidator will determine freight type and communicate to vendor/factory:

o Container Yard (CY) factory load is also referred to as FCL-Full Container Load
o Consolidated Freight Station (CFS) consolidator load with other Target freight
o Less than Container Load (LCL) at consolidator with non-Target freight (used at
smaller origins)
o Air Freight
CY (Container Yard) Factory Loading Requirements
• Target’s import carton marking instructions must be followed.

o The consolidator cannot inspect the accuracy of the carton markings on factory
loads, but our U.S. Deconsolidators will note all exceptions.
• The consolidator will advise the vendor/factory of the ocean carrier container release
number.
• The vendor/factory is responsible to arrange pick up of the container from the ocean
carrier.

• Procedures for loading correctly are as follows:
o Inspect containers for potential water damage due to holes and cracks in the roof
and walls, or defective door seals. The inspection must be completed prior to
vendor/factory acceptance and loading of the ocean container.
o Utilize container capacity to the maximum to avoid payment of additional ocean
freight cost.
o Minimum Container Capacities:
40’ 56 CBM’s
40 HC’ 64 CBM’s
45’ 73 CBM’s
20’ 28 CBM’s (Weight restricted

freight only)
o Anything less than 56 CBM’s per 40’ container must be delivered to Target’s
consolidator for consolidation in PO# / Item # integrity.
o Containers loaded must not exceed the following weight restrictions:
▪ 45’ container – 44,000 pounds / 19,732 kilograms
▪ 40’ container - 44,000 pounds / 19,732 kilograms
▪ 20’ container - 36,000 pounds / 16,330 kilograms
o Containers loading sequence:

▪ Left to Right
▪ Bottom to Top
▪ Nose to Tail of Container, by Company:
o Target Stores in the nose of the container
o Then, Target.com
o Finally, Target Advertising/Non-Retail in the tail of the container
▪ PO #’s and Item #’s must face tail of container
▪ All loads Must be Stabilized
▪ Do not mix PO’s and items throughout the container.
▪ View from Rear of Container
▪ When the carton weight or dimensions will not allow for the “Standard Load
Requirements”, container MUST still be loaded with consistency appropriate
to the product.
▪ ANY exceptions in loading the container must be indicated on the Container
Load Plan (CLP).
POL: Guidelines and Information>requirements>shipping>transportation

imports>standard loading requirements
Note: Non-compliance of these requirements will result in a claim filed against the
Vendor.

Example: Container Load Plan (also see resources)
CONTAINER LOAD PLAN

Factory/Vendor: Container No. Seal Number(s)
Container Delivery
Consignee: Date: CY or CFS?

Total Total Total
Grand
Total
Employee Who Sealed Container Employee ID
Time Container
Date Container Sealed Sealed
o The container load plan must be fully completed, including the name of the
employee who sealed the container, the employee ID#, the time the container
was sealed and the seal numbers applied to the container.
o The container load plan must be attached onto the last row of cartons prior to the
closure of the container.
o The CLP should be sent to the consolidator within 48 hours of container delivery.
Note: No container load plan is necessary for CFS shipments.
Note: Central America container load plans are required to be sent to the consolidator
the same day as the container is delivered/picked up.
o Multiple POs may be loaded into a single container along with Target.com POs to
utilize all space available in a container
o Target’s vendors should ship orders ‘complete’ (without overages or shortages).
o Stabilize the load to avoid in-transit shifting and damage.
Stabilization Requirement:

Stair Loading
Stabilize the load to prevent transit shifting
All CFS cargo must be delivered to the

Consolidator in PO/ITEM integrity.
Load stabilization or blocking and bracing charges are the responsibility of the
vendor
o All Cargo must be floor loaded to maximize container space. Pallets/Skids are
NOT permitted.
o All exceptions to the purchase order MUST BE communicated to the
consolidator. If an order is factory loaded in one or more containers but has an
overflow of cartons, it must be handled as follows:
The Consolidator must receive vendor Container Load Plan within 2 calendar
days of FCR receipt (this allows consolidator to transmit timely Advanced
Ship Notice to Target). Non-Compliance will result in penalty to vendor
imposed by consolidator.
Overflow cartons must be delivered to Target's designated consolidator.
Two separate sets of documents must be provided; one for the factory loaded
container(s) and one for the overflow cartons. (This is required due to U.S.
Customs processing methods for full containers vs. less than container P.O.
shipments).
o Deliver the container to the designated port within the ship window assigned to
Purchase Order
o Prepare required shipping information (SI) per US Customs 24-hour manifest
cutoff requirements to the designated consolidator four (4) days prior to the
chancel date for CY (factory load)
o Port terminal Issues a non-negotiable receipt

CFS (Consolidated Freight Station) Delivery Requirements
• CFS freight must be delivered to consolidator on first day of PO ship window with
required shipping information for the 24-hour Manifest.
Example: Ship window of July 1-July 6 Freight must be delivered on July 1st
o Consolidator conducts shipment audit

o Consolidator issues non-negotiable warehouse receipt
o Consolidator books containers with steamship line
• All CFS cargo must be delivered to the Consolidator in PO/ITEM integrity.

• LCL (Less than Container Load) & MCC (Multiple Country Consolidation) requires
authorization on ALL shipments
Forwarders Cargo Receipt (FCR)
• Issued after requirements are completed.

• Requirements include:
o Containers and overflow are delivered.
o Cargo is received at appropriate time.
o Carton markings are acceptable
o Cargo received in good order
o Full and accurate set of documents are delivered.
o Origin charges are paid by the vendor/factory.
Seal Management
• Seal Management Letter for low-medium risk countries is located on POL:

Guidelines & Info>Requirement & Procedure>Shipping>Shipping
Tab>Transportation Import>Seal Management
• Seal Management Letter for high risk countries is located on POL: Guidelines &
Info>Requirement & Procedure>Shipping>Shipping Tab>Transportation Import>Seal
Management
Note: Contact your local consolidator to determine if your factory is low, medium or high
risk

CY Seal Process for Low-Medium Risk Countries
Vendor/Factory Consolidator Steamship Deconsolidator

Trucking Appointment x
Pick-up Container x
Pick-up Steamship Seal x
Load Container x
Apply Customs Seal x
Apply Target Seal x
Apply Steamship Seal x
Record Seals x x
Validate Seals at Export x x
Validate Seals at Import x x x
1. Vendor/Factory will set up trucking appointment to pick-up empty containers from the
steamship line designated by Target’s nominated consolidator. Trucking will be the
responsibility of the vendor unless terms of the sale are FCA.
2. Target’s vendor/factory will control the trucking and pick up of container and
steamship line seal from the container yard and position the container to the factory. If
the steamship line releases the seals in groups, the vendor should maintain inventories.
Seals must be logged in a book and signed out as described in the CTPAT regulations.
3. The vendor/factory will maintain a container seal log with the following information:
date/time of sealing, seal number, container number, employee name and identification
that completed the container sealing process. (This includes full inventory visibility.
When the seal arrived in factory and from which SSL). The Steamship Line Seal must be
maintained in the container seal log at the factory.
4. The vendor/factory will load the container and attach any origin customs agency seal
and steamship line issued seal. Steamship line seals must be attached to the right door
(looking at the container) of the container or the portal hole if available.
5. The vendor/factory must follow the below steps when attaching a seal:
o V – View seal and container locking mechanisms for tampering

o V – Verify seal number against documents
o T – Tug on the seal to make sure that it is affixed properly to the container
o T – Twist and turn the seal to make sure that does not unscrew
6. The steamship line seal will be noted on the truck bill of lading and/or Container Load
Plan and signed by the vendor along with a date stamp and time. A copy of this truck bill
will be included in the document pouch submitted to the consolidator and maintained by
the origin consolidator.

7. The steamship line seal number will be noted on the documentation submitted to the
consolidator in compliance with the C-TPAT 24-hour manifest requirements.
8. In compliance with CTPAT regulations, vendor/factory should be doing regular audits

and keeping a log of findings for Target’s review.
CY Low-Medium Risk Countries Seal Discrepancy
• If at any time a seal discrepancy is brought to the consolidator attention a Seal

Discrepancy Form must be completed and sent to:
InternationalSupplyChain.Security@target.com with an explanation.
• If seal discrepancy is due to origin customs inspection, maintain copy of inspection
certificate and update container load plan with accurate seal number.
• If a steamship line issued seal is found to be missing at the time of processing
through the port terminal gates or the original seal issued by the SSL is different from
the seal number issued by the SSL and recorded by the consolidator, the following
actions should be taken:
1. If the container has not been loaded onto the departing vessel, the consolidator will
report the discrepancy to the SSL if found prior to the port. If found after the
container arrives at the port, the SSL will report to the consolidator. Then, request to
hold the container until research can be done with the vendor to determine the
location of the original seal issued by the carrier. If seal discrepancy is found after
container is loaded on a vessel the SSL will report to the consolidator.
2. The consolidator will notify the vendor, International Supply Chain Security and
Target Overseas Operations of the seal discrepancy and request local origin
customs to authorize a physical inspection of the container.
3. All charges related to inspection of the container will be the responsibility of Target,
unless it can be determined that the vendor was in error when attaching the seal and
the correct seal can be accounted for. If the vendor is in error, all inspection charges
will be the responsibility of the vendor. Overseas Operations will notify Target buying
departments of possible shipment delays and any additional costs.
4. The consolidator and/or a vendor representation, when legally applicable, should be
present for the inspection. The full contents of the container should be removed and
the container inspected as per CTPAT guidelines. Contents of the cartons should be
randomly inspected to ensure that the integrity of the cartons have not been
compromised.
5. A copy of the inspection report and clearance authorization will be forwarded to
Target Global Assets protection.
6. Once the inspection report has been received and approved by Target Asset
Protection, the container will be rebooked and sealed with new Steamship Line
issued Seal.
7. Low/Medium risk origin seal management begins again.

CY Seal Process for High Risk Countries
Vendor/Factory Consolidator Steamship Deconsolidator

Trucking x
Pick-up x
Pick-up x
Load x
Apply x
Apply x
Apply x
Record x x
Validate x x
Validate x x x
1. Vendors will set up trucking appointments to pick-up empty containers from the
steamship line designated by Target’s nominated consolidator. Trucking will be the
responsibility of the vendor unless terms of the sale are FCA.
2. Target’s vendor will control the trucking and pick up of container and steamship line
seal from the container yard and position the container to the factory. If the
steamship line issues the seals in groups, the vendor should maintain a record of the
seal inventories. Steamship line seals must be logged in a book and signed out as
described in the C-TPAT regulations.
3. In addition to the seal issued by the steamship line, a Target authorized seal will be
provided to each factory by the consolidator as a secondary seal. It is the vendor’s
responsibility to request the Target issued seal. This seal is either a cable seal or a
bar seal that will be managed by the consolidator on behalf of Target. The seals will
be purchased at Target’s expense. .
4. The vendor will maintain a log of the container seal numbers issued by the
steamship line and the Target’s authorized seal numbers. The following information
should be included:
o Date both seals arrived in factory

o Issuing party of the seal(s): Steamship Line or Target (via consolidator)
o Factory employee name and identification that completed the container sealing
process
o Date/time of sealing at the factory (record for each seal number)
o Seal number
o Container number
o Both the Steamship Line Seal and the Target Issued Seal must be maintained in
the container seal log at the factory.

5. The vendor will load the container and apply Target’s authorized seal in addition to
any origin customs agency seal and steamship line issued seal. Steamship line seals
must be attached to the right door (looking at the container) of the container or the
portal hole if available.
6. The vendor must follow the below steps when attaching a seal: V – View seal and
container locking mechanisms for tampering:
o V – Verify seal number against documents

o T – Tug on the seal to make sure that it is affixed properly to the container
o T – Twist and turn the seal to make sure that does not unscrew
7. The Target Seal and the steamship line seal will be noted on the truck bill of lading
and/or Container Load Plan and signed by the vendor along with a date stamp and
time. A copy of this truck bill will be faxed to the origin consolidator within 1 hour of
departure from the factory and maintained by the origin consolidator.
8. In compliance with CTPAT regulations, vendors should perform regular audits and
maintain a log of findings for Target’s review.
CY High Risk Countries Seal Discrepancy
• If seal discrepancy can be explained due to origin customs inspection, maintain copy
of inspection certificate and update container load plan with accurate seal number.
• If a steamship line issued seal is found to be missing at the time of processing
through the port terminal gates or the original seal issued by the SSL is different from
the seal number issued by the SSL and recorded by the consolidator, the following
actions should be taken:
1. If the container has not been loaded onto the departing vessel, the consolidator will
report the discrepancy to the SSL if found prior gating into the port. If found after the
container has gated into the port, the SSL will report to the consolidator. Then,
request to hold the container until research can be done with the vendor to determine
the location of the original seal issued by the carrier.
2. The consolidator will notify the vendor, International Supply Chain Security and
Target Overseas Operations of the seal discrepancy and request local origin
customs to authorize a physical inspection of the container.
3. All charges related to inspection of the container will be the responsibility of Target,
unless it can be determined that the vendor was in error when attaching the seal and
the correct seal can be accounted for. If the vendor is in error, all inspection charges
will be the responsibility of the vendor. Overseas Operations will notify Target buying
departments of possible shipment delays and any additional costs.
4. The consolidator and/or a vendor representation should be present for the
inspection. The full contents of the container should be removed and the container
inspected as per CTPAT guidelines. Contents of the cartons should be randomly
inspected to ensure that the integrity of the cartons have not been compromised.
5. A copy of the inspection report and clearance authorization will be forwarded to
Target Global Assets protection.
6. Once the inspection report has been received and approved by Target Asset
Protection, the container will be rebooked and sealed with new Steamship Line
issued Seal and Target issued Seal.
7. High risk origin seal management process begins again.
Import Air Freight
• When is Air Freight used?

o Air Freight is used to meet in-store date deadlines for merchandise that is not
able to ship with the original ship window.
o Vendor and Target Merchandising Department jointly agree product must be air-
lifted to meet the in-store date, and decide who will pay for air freight charges.
o Vendors are required to use a Target designated Air Freight Forwarder.
• International Air Freight Procedures

o All air shipments move on a freight collect basis.
o POs with FOB Terms - Vendors are responsible for all origin charges.
o POs with FCA Terms - Origin charges will be part of the Target Air Freight
Discount Worksheet.
o If the vendor/factory is responsible for any portion of the airfreight charge (i.e.:
sea/air difference) this is accomplished by providing a Late Shipment Discount
on the Commercial Invoice.
o Airfreight Forwarder Grid (see resources)
o Airfreight forwarders will receive an Import Air Authorization Form from Target
Import Transportation. If the request indicates the vendor is responsible for any
portion of the airfreight charges then the forwarder will be responsible for
completing the Discount Worksheet.
Discount Worksheet Procedures
• The Air Freight forwarder is responsible for:

o Calculating the air freight charges for the shipment.
Completing a Target Air Freight Discount Worksheet
Providing a copy of the worksheet to the vendor
• The Vendor is responsible for:
o Applying late shipment discount to the commercial invoice.
Note: The discount must be titled “Late Shipment Discount.”

Note: It is imperative that this letter is received, and dated, prior to the aircraft departure
date.
Preparing Air Freight Agreement letter

Moving the shipment on a Freight Collect basis
All documents in addition to the Target Air Freight Discount Worksheet and
the Vendor Air Freight Agreement letter.
o If the vendor does not produce the Vendor Air Freight Agreement letter and/or
show a “Late Shipment Discount” on their commercial invoice the forwarder will

accept the commercial documents, as presented, and forward the shipment on a
collect basis.
o Vendors must continue to coordinate all aspects of air shipments with our air
forwarders. This covers:
Cargo booking
Cargo delivery
Commercial documents preparation
Note: Documents for Air Shipments need to be shipped with the goods. Until documents
are received in good order, the goods cannot be shipped.
• Late Shipment Discount Procedure

o If the vendor is responsible for part or all of the air freight charges, the following
documents need to be completed and received. Until documents are received in
good order, the goods cannot be shipped.
Note: The documents are acceptable as email attachments
o Air Freight Discount Worksheet

o Vendors will receive the Air Freight Discount Worksheet from the Air
Freight Forwarder.
Air Freight Agreement letter below (also see resources)
Example: Vendor Air Freight Agreement Letter
ABC Vendor Inc.

April 26, 20##
To: (Appropriate Company Name)
Re: Dept 83, PO 1234567
The merchandise covered under your order number (insert PO number)

will not be available for
shipment by the Cancel Date on the order. As an inducement to persuade
(insert Target Stores
or Target.com) not to reject the merchandise outright, we are
offering to reduce the price of the merchandise by (insert amount
calculated on the Worksheet under Vendor Portion).
Sincerely,
Note: This letter must be on the vendor’s letterhead stationary and must be dated prior
to the aircraft departure date.
o The vendor will prepare the letter on signed vendor letterhead. It is

imperative that this letter is received and dated prior to the aircraft
departure date.
o Commercial Invoice
▪ Please ensure the “Late Shipment Discount” amount matches the
▪ Calculated amount on the Air Freight Discount Worksheet. The
discount must be titled “Late Shipment Discount”.
Example of the late shipment discount deduction on a Commercial Invoice:
Item Description Quantity Price Total
041081234 Women’s knit 5000 pcs $10.00 $50,000.00

sweater – Blue
041091235 Women’s knit 4000 pcs $10.00 $40,000.00

sweater – Red
Total first cost $90,000.00
Late Shipment ($3,000.00)

discount
Net Invoice $87,000.00

Total
Note: In this example, the total invoice cost is $90,000 and the late shipment discount is
$3,000. The net invoice total should be $87,000. The Broker will present to US Customs
at the reduced net total of $87,000.00.
Should a net invoice total fall bellow the cost of the goods – no discount should be taken
as Target can not present a negative invoice to US Customs. The Air Freight forwarder
will complete the Discount Worksheet and request the vendor to complete the Target Air
Freight Agreement letter which will be forwarded to Target with the documents. These
totals will provide the correct dollar amount for Target Import Claim Dept to file a claim
with the vendor for the air freight. No Discount is deducted from the invoice.
Visas:
o If there is sufficient time for the vendor to obtain a visa in the discounted
amount he must do so. If there is not sufficient time, the vendor should
proceed with the original visa so as not to delay the shipment.
Letters of Credit:
o Our Letters of Credit are being amended to incorporate this procedure.
For all air shipments where the vendor is responsible for some of the
airfreight charges the air waybill, Vendor Air Freight Agreement letter and
Target Corporation Air Freight Discount Worksheet must be presented to
our bank. And, of course, the commercial invoice must indicate a Late
Shipment Discount equaling the amount on the worksheet. Letters of
Credit will continue to allow Target Corporation to reduce any draft
payments when an air waybill is presented.

Customs Brokers:
o If airfreight documents are received and include a commercial invoice
with a “Late Shipment Discount” and a Vendor Air Freight Agreement
letter then the discount is to be treated as a non-dutiable charge. If all of
these documents are not received in proper order then Entry is to be
made at the full invoice value, before any discount, and an inquiry must
be sent to the appropriate Commodity Specialist.
o If the shipment is subject to quota restrictions, and the Visa does not
include a Late Shipment Discount corresponding to a discount on the
commercial invoice, the discount is still treated as a non-dutiable charge.
In the event that Customs requests an explanation for the difference in
value between the commercial invoice and the visa please send an
inquiry to the appropriate Commodity Specialist.
o Finally, the billing packet must include a copy of the Vendor Air Freight
Agreement letter and the Air Freight Worksheet (also see resources)
Example: Import Transportation
TARGET CORPORATION AIR FREIGHT DISCOUNT WORKSHEET
Company (circle one): Target Mervyn’s Target.com

Department: Purchase Order:
MAWB: HAWB:
a) Total Cubic Meters (CBMS)

b) x Target Corporation Estimated Ocean Freight per CBM Rate
c) = Estimated Ocean Freight Amount (a times b)
d) Total Collect Air Freight Amount
e) Vendor Portion (d less c)
The forwarders name and address must appear on the worksheet.
Note: Vendor Portion may be Sea/Air difference, 50% of the Sea/Air difference, 25% of
the Sea/Air Difference, etc. Amend the worksheet to accommodate the various terms,
which are communicated via the Import Air Freight Request.

Example: Import Transportation
Example of Vendor Air Freight Agreement ABC VENDOR INC.
April 26, 20##

To: Target Stores
Re: Dept 83, PO 123456
The merchandise covered under your order number (insert PO number)

will not be available for shipment by the Cancel Date on the order. As an
inducement to persuade (insert Target Stores or Target.com) not to reject
the merchandise outright, we are offering to reduce the price of the
merchandise by (insert amount calculated on the Worksheet under
Vendor Portion).
Sincerely,
Note: This letter must be on the vendor’s letterhead stationary and must be dated prior
to the aircraft departure date.

3. Documentation Requirements
• Documents are required by US Customs and Border Protection (CBP) along with
other Government Agencies have stringent and detailed requirements for importation
of goods into US
o Without these documents, the product could be delayed in US customs
• Each factory should work with their vendor to obtain a list of all required documents.
Example of a Container Load Plan
CONTAINER LOAD PLAN

Factory/Vendor: Container No. Seal Number(s)
Consignee: Container Delivery Date: CY or CFS?

Total Total Total

Grand Total
Employee Who Sealed Container Employee ID
Date Container Sealed Time Container Sealed

Example of an Air Freight Agreement letter

Example of a Vendor Air Freight Agreement letter

Example of an Air Freight Discount Worksheet

PRODUCT
SAFETY,
RECALL
AND
PRODUCT
REGULATORY
COMPLIANCE
REFERENCES
Product Safety Recall and Product Regulatory Compliance References 1 of 4
PRODUCT SAFETY RECALL AND PRODUCT REGULATORY
COMPLIANCE REFERENCES
Overview
Target is bound by law to report safety issues to the appropriate U.S. Government
agency. All manufacturers producing merchandise for the U.S. must understand and
comply with all U.S. Government Standards and Regulations in addition to the Target
Standards for Product Safety. Failure to comply with these standards and regulations
may result in a recall or removal of product from sale.
Target is committed to buying and selling safe products. We require that all
manufacturers whom our vendors do business with are in compliance with the U.S. law.
Non-compliance with any product safety laws or regulations may result in monetary
penalty, costly administrative actions and/or litigation, as well as negative publicity.
Table of Contents
1. Vendor/Factory Roles and Responsibilities
2. Product Safety and Recall Definitions
3. Target Safety Standards
4. Product Regulatory References
Objectives
• Understand the Product Safety and Product recall processes
• Understand the factory responsibilities
1. Vendor/Factory Roles and Responsibilities
• Produce a safe, quality product which meets Target standards, industry standards
and all U.S. State or Federal standards and regulations for safety.
• If the product fails to comply, and a product recall is initiated, it is the vendor’s
responsibility to compensate Target for all costs associated with the product recall.
2. Product Safety and Recall definitions
• A Recall is the removal of product from sale in conjunction with government agency.
Consumer level notification may be required.
• A Voluntary Market Withdrawal is the removal of product from sale (either vendor
initiated or Target initiated). Consumer level notification is not required.
Reasons Recalls are initiated

• To protect US consumers from potentially hazardous products.
• When a product does not meet State or Federal standards.
• When a product does not meet Target standards.
• When a product violates Intellectual Property Laws.
How Recalls are initiated

• U.S. Government mandated by one of the following agencies:
o Consumer Products Safety Commission (CPSC)
o US Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
o United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)
o Customs and Border Patrol (CBP)
o Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
• Vendor (manufacturer or distributor) can initiate recalls when a product does not
meet product safety standards.
• Target can initiate a recall when the product does not meet a Federal or State
regulation or standard or a Target Safety Standard. Target can initiate a recall when
the product contains a hazard which could create substantial risk of injury to person
or property.
o In case of a recall, vendor is responsible for costs associated with the recall.
These costs, could include, but are not limited to:
Cost of product
Destruction of the product
Transportation/Supply Chain costs
Labor Costs
In-Store Signage
Advertising Disclaimers
• Competitor initiated
o Copyright infringements
o Trademark infringements
o Other infringements
3. Target Safety Standards
• Target’s expectation is that Vendors/Factories comply with Government, Target and

Industry Standards and Regulations for their specific products.
• Safety related standards can be found in the product protocol.
• POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Product
Development > Childrens Safety Guide
• POL: Product Development > Requirements & Procedures > Softlines Quality
Assurance > Children’s Apparel > Manufacturing Safe Garments
Assurance > Softhome > Regulatory and Safety
4. Product Regulatory References
Common State and Federal regulations include but are not limited to the following:
• Consumer Products Safety Act – This protects the public against unreasonable risk
of injury and death associated with consumer products.
Website: www.cpsc.gov
• California Proposition 65. This law is intended to warn consumers of potential risks
associated with specific chemicals contained in consumer products. Although this is
a state regulation, Target applies it to all products.
Website: www.oehha.ca.gov
• Federal Hazardous Substances Act – 15 U.S.C 1261-1278
• Federal Food, Drug, & Cosmetic Act – 21 U.S.C 301-397
• Flammable Fabrics Act – 15 U.S.C 1191-1204
• Poison Prevention Packaging Act – 15 U.S.C 1471-1476
• United States Food & Drug Administration (FDA). Website: www.fda.gov
• United States Department of Agricultural (USDA). Website: www.usda.gov
• United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Website: www.epa.gov

Factory Education Manual English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Factory Education Manual English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Target

Factory Education Manual 2 of 11

Master Table of Contents

Global Compliance ………………………………………………….. 1-41

C-TPAT - International Supply Chain ……………………………… 1-36

Product Design & Development – Color …………………………… 1-8

Product Design & Development – Sample Requirements and Fit 1-29

Product Design & Development – Trims …………………………… 1-6

Product Design & Development – Sample Management 1-8

Factory Evaluation…………………………………………………… 1-12

Production Planning …………………………………………………. 1-7

Product Testing ……………………………………………………. 1-22

Product Inspections ………………………………………………….. 1-50

Targets Needle and Metal Contamination Policy and Procedure 1-11

Standard Inspection Packet (SIP)…………………………….. 1-20

Packing & Carton Markings ………………………………………… 1-20

International Transportation / Shipping ……………………………. 1-15

Product Safety, Recall and Product Regulatory References …… 1-4

Factory Education Manual 3 of 11

Factory Education Initiative

Roles and Responsibilities

Target Compliance & Production Services (TCPS)

Factory Education Manual 4 of 11

Recommendation for Presenting Factory Education Materials

Factory Education Completion Date

Factory Education Manual 5 of 11

Merchandise within a Target Store

Target Store Facts:

Being the Best Factory Ever!

Remember this document is for the sole use of authorized Business

Factory Education Manual 6 of 11

Factory Education Manual 7 of 11

Anchoring – Process of securing product on hangers within the shipping carton to

Approved/Authorized Supplier – Suppliers on the Owned Brand Approved Supplier

AQL –Acceptable Quality Level

BOL or B/L – Bill of Lading

BPM – Business Partner Management is a system that is used to build a Business

Breakpack – A method of distribution where product is brought into the Regional

BV – Bureau Veritas testing lab

CAP – Corrective Action Plan

Casepack – The number of selling units per carton.

CBP – Customs and Border Control

Consolidator – An overseas business partner that manages the movement of Target

COO – Country of Origin; country of manufacture or production.

Copyright – Original work fixed in a tangible medium (books, movies, sound,

Factory Education Manual 8 of 11

CPSC – Consumer Products Safety Commission

Deconsolidator - A business partner in US that unloads the freight once cleared by

DQA – Dedicated Quality Assurance personnel at vendor level

DuPro – During production Inspection

EDI – Electronic Data Interchange

EPA – Environmental Protection Agency

ETA – Estimated Time of Arrival

ETD – Estimated Time of Departure

EBP – External Business Partner

FDA – US Food and Drug Administration

Floor Ready - Requirements for product presentation and sale

Forwarder – Also referred to as Freight Forwarder or Consolidator.

FRI – Final Random Inspection

Grovesite – External FTP site for product objectives

Innerpack - Grouping of selling units within a casepack/carton

Factory Education Manual 9 of 11

KPOM – Key Points of Measure